WO2021166541A1 - Heat conductive material forming composition, heat conductive sheet, heat conductive multilayer sheet, and device having heat conductive sheet - Google Patents
Heat conductive material forming composition, heat conductive sheet, heat conductive multilayer sheet, and device having heat conductive sheet Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2021166541A1 WO2021166541A1 PCT/JP2021/002045 JP2021002045W WO2021166541A1 WO 2021166541 A1 WO2021166541 A1 WO 2021166541A1 JP 2021002045 W JP2021002045 W JP 2021002045W WO 2021166541 A1 WO2021166541 A1 WO 2021166541A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- group
- heat conductive
- composition
- general formula
- compound
- Prior art date
Links
Classifications
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B27/00—Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B27/00—Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin
- B32B27/18—Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin characterised by the use of special additives
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B7/00—Layered products characterised by the relation between layers; Layered products characterised by the relative orientation of features between layers, or by the relative values of a measurable parameter between layers, i.e. products comprising layers having different physical, chemical or physicochemical properties; Layered products characterised by the interconnection of layers
- B32B7/02—Physical, chemical or physicochemical properties
- B32B7/027—Thermal properties
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08G—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED OTHERWISE THAN BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING UNSATURATED CARBON-TO-CARBON BONDS
- C08G59/00—Polycondensates containing more than one epoxy group per molecule; Macromolecules obtained by polymerising compounds containing more than one epoxy group per molecule using curing agents or catalysts which react with the epoxy groups
- C08G59/18—Macromolecules obtained by polymerising compounds containing more than one epoxy group per molecule using curing agents or catalysts which react with the epoxy groups ; e.g. general methods of curing
- C08G59/20—Macromolecules obtained by polymerising compounds containing more than one epoxy group per molecule using curing agents or catalysts which react with the epoxy groups ; e.g. general methods of curing characterised by the epoxy compounds used
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08G—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED OTHERWISE THAN BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING UNSATURATED CARBON-TO-CARBON BONDS
- C08G59/00—Polycondensates containing more than one epoxy group per molecule; Macromolecules obtained by polymerising compounds containing more than one epoxy group per molecule using curing agents or catalysts which react with the epoxy groups
- C08G59/18—Macromolecules obtained by polymerising compounds containing more than one epoxy group per molecule using curing agents or catalysts which react with the epoxy groups ; e.g. general methods of curing
- C08G59/40—Macromolecules obtained by polymerising compounds containing more than one epoxy group per molecule using curing agents or catalysts which react with the epoxy groups ; e.g. general methods of curing characterised by the curing agents used
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08G—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED OTHERWISE THAN BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING UNSATURATED CARBON-TO-CARBON BONDS
- C08G59/00—Polycondensates containing more than one epoxy group per molecule; Macromolecules obtained by polymerising compounds containing more than one epoxy group per molecule using curing agents or catalysts which react with the epoxy groups
- C08G59/18—Macromolecules obtained by polymerising compounds containing more than one epoxy group per molecule using curing agents or catalysts which react with the epoxy groups ; e.g. general methods of curing
- C08G59/40—Macromolecules obtained by polymerising compounds containing more than one epoxy group per molecule using curing agents or catalysts which react with the epoxy groups ; e.g. general methods of curing characterised by the curing agents used
- C08G59/62—Alcohols or phenols
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08K—Use of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
- C08K3/00—Use of inorganic substances as compounding ingredients
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08K—Use of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
- C08K3/00—Use of inorganic substances as compounding ingredients
- C08K3/28—Nitrogen-containing compounds
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08K—Use of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
- C08K3/00—Use of inorganic substances as compounding ingredients
- C08K3/38—Boron-containing compounds
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08L—COMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
- C08L101/00—Compositions of unspecified macromolecular compounds
- C08L101/02—Compositions of unspecified macromolecular compounds characterised by the presence of specified groups, e.g. terminal or pendant functional groups
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08L—COMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
- C08L63/00—Compositions of epoxy resins; Compositions of derivatives of epoxy resins
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K5/00—Heat-transfer, heat-exchange or heat-storage materials, e.g. refrigerants; Materials for the production of heat or cold by chemical reactions other than by combustion
- C09K5/08—Materials not undergoing a change of physical state when used
- C09K5/14—Solid materials, e.g. powdery or granular
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L23/00—Details of semiconductor or other solid state devices
- H01L23/34—Arrangements for cooling, heating, ventilating or temperature compensation ; Temperature sensing arrangements
- H01L23/36—Selection of materials, or shaping, to facilitate cooling or heating, e.g. heatsinks
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L23/00—Details of semiconductor or other solid state devices
- H01L23/34—Arrangements for cooling, heating, ventilating or temperature compensation ; Temperature sensing arrangements
- H01L23/36—Selection of materials, or shaping, to facilitate cooling or heating, e.g. heatsinks
- H01L23/373—Cooling facilitated by selection of materials for the device or materials for thermal expansion adaptation, e.g. carbon
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a composition for forming a heat conductive material, a heat conductive sheet, a heat conductive multilayer sheet, and a device with a heat conductive layer.
- Patent Document 1 describes a heat conductive material containing a compound represented by the following general formula (XII) as a heat conductive material used for a heat radiating sheet ([Claim 1] [Claim 8]. ] [Claim 19] [Claim 20])
- an object of the present invention is to provide a composition for forming a heat conductive material having excellent heat conductivity. Another object of the present invention is to provide a heat conductive sheet, a heat conductive multilayer sheet, and a device with a heat conductive layer formed by the above composition.
- the present inventors have found that the thermal conductivity of the heat-conducting material to be formed is improved by using a composition for forming a heat-conducting material containing a compound having two or more triazine rings, and complete the present invention. I let you. That is, it was found that the above-mentioned problems can be achieved by the following configuration.
- a composition for forming a heat conductive material which comprises inorganic particles and a compound represented by the general formula (1).
- E 1 to E 6 independently represent a single bond, -NH-, or -NR-.
- R represents a substituent.
- B 1 , B 2 , B 3 and B 4 represent k + 1 valent, l + 1 valent, m + 1 valent and n + 1 valent organic groups, respectively, and at least one of them may have a substituent k + 1.
- L represents a divalent organic group.
- k, l, m, and n each independently represent an integer of 0 or more.
- X 1 to the k present may each be the same or different.
- l is 2 or more
- X 2 of the l present may each be the same or different.
- m is 2 or more
- X 3 and m pieces present may each be the same or different.
- n is 2 or more
- X 4 n number present may each be the same or different.
- the total of k, l, m, and n is 2 or more.
- Each of X 1 to X 4 independently represents a group represented by the general formula (2).
- * represents a coupling position.
- D 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
- a 1 represents an aromatic ring group which may have a substituent or an aliphatic ring group which may have a substituent.
- Q and Y 1 are independently selected from the group consisting of a monovalent group having a hydroxyl group and an epoxy group, an amino group, a thiol group, a carboxylic acid group, an isocyanate group, and a monovalent group having an oxetanyl group. Represents a specific functional group.
- p represents an integer greater than or equal to 0.
- q represents an integer of 0 to 2. In the general formula (2), if D 1 there are a plurality, D 1 there are a plurality, may each be the same or different.
- r is an integer of 1 or more.
- L in the above general formula (1) is a divalent aromatic ring group which may have a substituent, a divalent aliphatic ring group which may have a substituent, and carbon.
- the content of the compound represented by the general formula (1) is 3 to 40% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition for forming a heat conductive material.
- a heat conductive sheet formed by curing the composition for forming a heat conductive material according to any one of [1] to [9].
- a device with a heat conductive layer comprising a heat conductive sheet according to [10] or a heat conductive layer including the heat conductive multilayer sheet according to [11], which is arranged on the device.
- the present invention it is possible to provide a composition for forming a heat conductive material having excellent heat conductivity. Further, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a heat conductive sheet, a heat conductive multilayer sheet, and a device with a heat conductive layer formed by the above composition.
- the composition for forming a heat conductive material, the heat conductive sheet, the heat conductive multilayer sheet, and the device with the heat conductive layer of the present invention will be described in detail.
- the description of the constituent elements described below may be based on a representative embodiment of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment.
- the numerical range represented by using "-" means a range including the numerical values before and after "-" as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
- the epoxy group is a functional group also called an oxylanyl group.
- an oxylanyl group For example, two adjacent carbon atoms of a saturated hydrocarbon ring group are bonded by an oxo group (—O—) to form an oxylan ring.
- Epoxide groups include the groups that are used.
- the epoxy group may or may not have a substituent (such as a methyl group), if possible.
- the acid anhydride group may be a monovalent group or a divalent group unless otherwise specified.
- the acid anhydride group represents a monovalent group, a substitution obtained by removing an arbitrary hydrogen atom from an acid anhydride such as maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, pyromellitic anhydride, and trimellitic anhydride.
- the group is mentioned.
- the acid anhydride group represents a divalent group
- the group represented by * -CO-O-CO- * is intended (* represents a bond position).
- a substituent for example, a substituent group described later
- Y may be possessed.
- alkyl group means a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group as long as the desired effect is not impaired.
- expressions such as “may” and “may” satisfy the conditions of "may” and “may”. It is intended that it does not have to be satisfied.
- “may have a substituent” also includes “may not have a substituent”.
- the type of the substituent, the position of the substituent, and the number of the substituents in the case of “may have a substituent” are not particularly limited.
- the number of substituents may be, for example, one or two or more.
- the substituent include a monovalent non-metal atomic group excluding a hydrogen atom, and for example, it can be selected from the following substituent group Y.
- examples of the halogen atom include a chlorine atom, a fluorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
- Substituent group Y Halogen atom (-F, -Br, -Cl, -I, etc.), hydroxyl group, amino group, carboxylic acid group and its conjugate base group, carboxylic acid anhydride group, cyanate ester group, unsaturated polymerizable group, epoxy group, oxetanyl Group, aziridinyl group, thiol group, isocyanate group, thioisocyanate group, aldehyde group, alkoxy group, allyloxy group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, alkyldithio group, aryldithio group, N-alkylamino group, N, N-dialkylamino Group, N-arylamino group, N, N-diarylamino group, N-alkyl-N-arylamino group, acyloxy group, carbamoyloxy group, N-alkylcarbamoyloxy group, N-aryl
- composition of the present invention is an inorganic particle and a compound represented by the general formula (1) described later (hereinafter, also abbreviated as “specific compound”). .) Including.
- the composition for forming a heat conductive material of the present invention having such a structure can form a heat conductive material having excellent heat conductivity.
- the specific compound is a compound having two or more triazine rings, it is considered that the specific compound has a high affinity with inorganic particles.
- the specific compound has at least two predetermined groups (specific functional groups), not only between the inorganic particles having a high affinity but also between the specific compounds, the specific compound and the specific compound as desired. It is considered that an interaction occurs with other components to be added (for example, a phenol compound and / or an epoxy compound). Therefore, the heat conduction path through the specific compound is formed by the interaction of the specific compound via the specific functional group, so that the heat conductivity of the heat conductive material formed by using the composition of the present invention is improved. The inventors speculate that this is the case.
- the composition for forming a heat conductive material of the present invention contains a specific compound.
- the specific compound is a compound represented by the general formula (1).
- E 1 to E 6 independently represent a single bond, -NH-, or -NR-.
- R represents a substituent.
- the substituent represented by R include a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
- the plurality of Rs may be the same or different.
- E 1 ⁇ E 6 are each independently, -NH-, or, -NR- is preferably, -NH- Is more preferable.
- B 1 , B 2 , B 3 and B 4 represent k + 1 valent, l + 1 valent, m + 1 valent and n + 1 valent organic groups, respectively, and at least one of them comprises a substituent. It represents a k + 1 valent, l + 1 valent, m + 1 valent, or n + 1 valent aromatic ring group that may have.
- Examples of the organic group represented by B 1 to B 4 include a group obtained by removing j hydrogen atoms from a hydrocarbon group which may have a hetero atom having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
- j means k + 1, l + 1, m + 1, or n + 1.
- the hydrocarbon group before removing j hydrogen atoms may have, for example, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms and a substituent which may have a substituent. Examples thereof include an aliphatic ring group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms and an aromatic ring group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
- Examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms include methane, ethane, propane, butane, pentane, hexane, and heptane.
- Examples of the aliphatic ring group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms include a cyclohexane ring group, a cycloheptane ring group, a norbornane ring group, and an adamantane ring group.
- Examples of the aromatic ring group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms include an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms and an aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms.
- Examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring and an anthracene ring, and examples of the aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms include a furan ring and a pyrrole ring. , Thiophene ring, pyridine ring, thiazole ring, carbazole ring, indole ring, benzothiazole ring and the like.
- the organic group represented by B 1 to B 4 j hydrogen atoms were removed from the aromatic ring group which may have a substituent because the heat conductivity of the heat conductive material is more excellent. It is preferably a group, and more preferably a group obtained by removing j hydrogen atoms from the benzene ring.
- k, l, m, and n each independently represent an integer of 0 or more. However, the total of k, l, m, and n is 2 or more. For l, m, and n, 0 to 5 is preferable, and 1 to 2 is more preferable, respectively.
- B 1 does not have X 1.
- B 2 does not have X 2. If m is 0, then B 3 does not have X 3. If n is 0, then B 4 does not have X 4.
- X 1 present a plurality (k number) may each be the same or different.
- l is 2 or more (that is, if X 2 there are a plurality)
- X 2 that there are a plurality of (l number) may each be the same or different.
- m is 2 or more (that is, if X 3 there are a plurality)
- X 3 present a plurality (m pieces) may each be the same or different.
- n is 2 or more (that is, if X 4 there are a plurality), X 4 present more of (n) may each be the same or different.
- the total number of k, l, m, and n is 2 or more, preferably an integer of 2 to 12, and more preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
- the total number of X 1 to X 4 which may exist in a plurality of each is 2 or more, preferably an integer of 2 to 12, and more preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
- k is preferably 1 or more (more preferably 1 to 2)
- l is preferably 1 or more (more preferably 1 to 2)
- m is 1 or more (more preferably 1 to 2).
- n is 1 or more (more preferably 1 to 2).
- B 1 preferably has 1 or more (preferably 1 to 2)
- X 1 and B 2 preferably has 1 or more (preferably 1 to 2) X 2.
- 3 preferably has one or more (preferably one or two) X 3.
- L represents a divalent organic group.
- R N represents a substituent.
- the substituents represented by R N e.g., like a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
- examples of the aromatic ring group, the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and the substituent that the aliphatic ring group may have include a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. Can be mentioned.
- Examples of the aromatic ring group include an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms and an aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms.
- Examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms include a monocyclic aromatic ring group such as a benzene ring; a polycyclic aromatic ring group such as a naphthalene ring and an anthracene ring; and the like.
- Examples of the 3 to 20 aromatic heterocyclic groups include monocyclic aromatic ring groups such as a furan ring, a pyrrole ring, a thiophene ring, a pyridine ring, and a thiazole ring; a benzothiazole ring, a carbazole ring, and an indole ring.
- Polycyclic aromatic ring groups such as; Examples of the aromatic ring group as L include a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the above example.
- Examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group include an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and specifically, a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, a pentylene group, a hexylene group and a methylhexylene group. , And a heptylene group and the like.
- Examples of the aliphatic ring group include a cyclohexane ring group, a cycloheptane ring group, a norbornane ring group, and an adamantane ring group.
- As the aliphatic ring group as L a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the above example can be mentioned.
- Aromatic ring group which may have a substituent, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent, an aliphatic ring group which may have a substituent, or -O-, -S.
- both ends of L are carbon atoms from the viewpoint that the heat conductive material is more excellent in heat conductivity.
- the terminal carbon atom may be a part of the cyclic structure.
- L in the above general formula (1) may have a divalent aromatic ring group or a substituent which may have a substituent. It is a divalent organic group having at least one selected from the group consisting of a divalent aliphatic ring group which may have and an alkylene group which may have a branch having 2 or more carbon atoms. It is preferable, and a divalent organic group having a divalent aromatic ring group which may have a substituent may be more preferable because the thermal conductivity is more excellent.
- r is an integer of 1 or more. r is preferably an integer of 1 to 20, and more preferably an integer of 1 to 10.
- X 1 to X 4 independently represent the groups represented by the general formula (2).
- * represents a bonding position with any of B 1 to B 4.
- D 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
- the divalent linking group include -O-, -S-, -CO-, -NR N- , -SO 2- , an alkylene group, or a group composed of a combination thereof.
- -NR N - in R N represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
- the alkylene group is preferably a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
- D 1 is preferably "single bond” or "a group consisting of a combination selected from the group consisting of -O-, -CO-, and an alkylene group", and is preferably a single bond, * A -alkylene group-O-.
- CO- * B * A- CO-O-alkylene group-* B , * A- O-alkylene group-O- * B , * A- CO-O-alkylene group-O-CO- * B , * A -CO-O-alkylene group-O- * B or * A- O-alkylene group-O-CO- * B is more preferable.
- * A represents a a bond position opposite to the A 1
- * B is the bonding position to A 1.
- a 1 represents an aromatic ring group which may have a substituent or an aliphatic ring group which may have a substituent.
- a 1 is bonded to D 1 , Y 1 , and Q with an atom constituting the aromatic ring group or the aliphatic ring group.
- a 1, good aromatic ring which may have a substituent group may be either a monocyclic aromatic ring group polycyclic aromatic ring group.
- the number of membered rings of the monocyclic aromatic ring group is preferably 6 to 10.
- the number of rings constituting the polycyclic aromatic ring group is preferably 2 to 4, more preferably 2.
- the number of membered rings of the rings constituting the polycyclic aromatic ring group is preferably 5 to 10 independently.
- the aromatic ring group may be an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group or an aromatic heterocyclic group.
- the number of heteroatoms contained in the aromatic heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 5.
- hetero atom examples include a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, an oxygen atom, a selenium atom, a tellurium atom, a phosphorus atom, a silicon atom, and a boron atom. Of these, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, or an oxygen atom is preferable.
- aromatic ring group examples include a benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, an anthracene ring group, a benzothiazole ring group, a carbazole ring group, an indole ring group and the like.
- an aliphatic ring group which may have a substituent may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
- the number of membered rings of the monocyclic aliphatic ring group is preferably 6 to 10.
- the number of rings constituting the polycyclic aliphatic ring group is preferably 2 to 4, more preferably 2.
- the number of membered rings of the rings constituting the polycyclic cycloalkane ring group is preferably 5 to 10 independently.
- the number of carbon atoms as ring member atoms in the aliphatic ring group is preferably 6 or more, more preferably 6 to 12.
- the number of carbon atoms which are ring-membered atoms is intended to be the number of carbon atoms which are ring-membered atoms constituting the aliphatic ring.
- the aliphatic ring group include a cyclohexane ring group, a cycloheptane ring group, a norbornane ring group, and an adamantane ring group.
- Q and Y 1 are independently a hydroxyl group (-OH), a monovalent group having an epoxy group, an amino group, a thiol group (-SH), and a carboxylic acid group (-COOH).
- a specific functional group selected from the group consisting of a monovalent group having an isocyanate group (-NCO) and an oxetanyl group. That is, the group represented by the general formula (2) is a group having at least one specific functional group.
- the group represented by the general formula (2) is "a group having a specific functional group” even if the group represented by the general formula (2) is a group containing a specific functional group as a part. Often, the group represented by the general formula (2) may be the specific functional group itself.
- the monovalent group having an epoxy group as the specific functional group for example, a group represented by "-Leo -epoxy group” is preferable.
- Leo is a single bond or divalent linking group, and an oxygen atom, an alkylene group (preferably a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), or a group composed of a combination thereof.
- the monovalent group having the epoxy group is preferably "-O-alkylene group-epoxy group".
- the substituent that the epoxy group may have, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is preferable.
- the amino group as the specific functional group is not particularly limited, and may be any of primary, secondary, and tertiary.
- -N ( RE ) 2 RE may be a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group (which may be linear or branched) independently of each other).
- the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 3.
- the alkyl group may further have a substituent.
- monovalent group having an oxetanyl group is, for example, groups represented by "- - L eo oxetanyl group" are preferred.
- Leo is a single bond or divalent linking group, and an oxygen atom, an alkylene group (preferably a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), or a group composed of a combination thereof.
- the monovalent group having an oxetanyl group is preferably "-O-alkylene group-oxetanyl group".
- the substituent that the oxetanyl group may have, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is preferable.
- the specific functional group is preferably a monovalent group having a hydroxyl group or an epoxy group.
- p represents an integer of 0 or more. Among them, p is preferably 0 to 5, more preferably 0 to 1. When p is 0, Y 1 binds directly to any of B 1 to B 4. That is, X 1 to X 4 may be the specific functional group itself.
- q represents an integer of 0 to 2. Among them, q is preferably 0 to 1.
- the groups represented by the plurality of general formulas (2) may be the same or different.
- D 1 there are a plurality D 1 there are a plurality, they may each be the same or different.
- a 1 there are plural A 1 there are a plurality, they may each be the same or different.
- Qs the plurality of Qs may be the same or different.
- the specific compound may have one group represented by the general formula (2) alone, or may have two or more groups. Among them, the specific compound is preferably "a compound having only a hydroxyl group as a specific functional group” or "a compound having only a monovalent group having an epoxy group as a specific functional group”.
- the Hansen solubility parameter (hereinafter, also abbreviated as "HSP") value of the compound represented by the general formula (1) is preferably 28 MPa 0.5 or less because the water resistance is improved. , 26 MPa 0.5 or less is more preferable.
- the lower limit of the HSP value of the specific compound is not limited, and for example, 10 MPa 0.5 or more is preferable.
- the HSP value of the specific compound the value calculated from the following formula is adopted.
- HSP value (HSP d 2 + HSP p 2 + HSP h 2 ) 0.5 HSP d , HSP p , and HSP h represent the dispersion term, polarity term, and hydrogen bond term of HSP values, respectively (units are MPa 0.5 ).
- HSP d , HSP p , HSP h are HSPiP (Hansen Solubility Parameter)
- the content of the specific compound is preferably 3 to 40% by mass, preferably 3 to 40% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition, from the viewpoint that the heat conductivity of the heat conductive material is more excellent. More preferably, it is ⁇ 25% by mass.
- the content of the specific compound is preferably 4 to 60% by mass, more preferably 10 to 35% by mass, still more preferably 12 to 30% by mass, based on the mass of the inorganic particles.
- the specific compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the composition of the present invention may further contain a phenolic compound.
- the phenol compound is a compound other than the specific compound. For example, even when the specific compound has a phenolic hydroxyl group, the specific compound does not correspond to the phenol compound.
- the phenolic compound is selected from the group consisting of the compound represented by the general formula (P1) or the compound represented by the general formula (P2) because the obtained heat conductive material has more excellent thermal conductivity. It is preferably one or more.
- m1 represents an integer of 0 or more. m1 is preferably 0 to 10, more preferably 0 to 3, still more preferably 0 or 1, and particularly preferably 1.
- na and nc each independently represent an integer of 1 or more.
- Na and nc are preferably 1 to 4 independently of each other.
- R 1 and R 6 independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a carboxylic acid group, a boronic acid group, an aldehyde group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
- the alkyl group may be linear or branched.
- the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
- the alkyl group may or may not have a substituent.
- the alkyl group portion of the alkoxy group and the alkyl group portion of the alkoxycarbonyl group are the same as those of the alkyl group.
- R 1 and R 6 are preferably a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, more preferably a hydrogen atom or a chlorine atom, and even more preferably a hydrogen atom.
- R 7 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydroxyl group. If R 7 there is a plurality, R 7 where there are a plurality, may each be the same or different. If R 7 there are a plurality of R 7 there are a plurality, also preferably at least one R 7 is a hydroxyl group.
- L x1 represents a single bond, -C (R 2 ) (R 3 )-or-CO-, and -C (R 2 ) (R 3 )-or -CO- preferable.
- L x2 represents a single bond, -C (R 4 ) (R 5 )-or-CO-, and -C (R 4 ) (R 5 )-or-CO- is preferable.
- R 2 ⁇ R 5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
- the above-mentioned substituents are preferably a hydroxyl group, a phenyl group, a halogen atom, a carboxylic acid group, a boronic acid group, an aldehyde group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group, and preferably a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, or a carboxylic acid group.
- Boronic acid group, aldehyde group, alkyl group, alkoxy group, or alkoxycarbonyl group are more preferable.
- the alkyl group may be linear or branched.
- the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
- the alkyl group may or may not have a substituent.
- the alkyl group portion of the alkoxy group and the alkyl group portion of the alkoxycarbonyl group are the same as those of the alkyl group.
- the phenyl group may or may not have a substituent, and when it has a substituent, it more preferably has 1 to 3 hydroxyl groups.
- R 2 to R 5 are preferably a hydrogen atom or a hydroxyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom.
- L x1 and L x2 are independently -CH 2- , -CH (OH)-, -CO-, or, respectively. -CH (Ph)-is preferable.
- the Ph represents a phenyl group which may have a substituent.
- in the general formula (P1) if R 4 there are a plurality, R 4 there are a plurality may each be the same or different. If R 5 there are a plurality, the plurality of R 5 may each be the same or different.
- Ar 1 and Ar 2 independently represent a benzene ring group or a naphthalene ring group, respectively.
- Ar 1 and Ar 2 are preferably benzene ring groups independently of each other.
- Q a is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a phenyl group, a halogen atom, a carboxylic acid group, a boronic acid group, aldehyde group, alkoxy group or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
- the alkyl group may be linear or branched.
- the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
- the alkyl group may or may not have a substituent.
- the alkyl group portion of the alkoxy group and the alkyl group portion of the alkoxycarbonyl group are the same as those of the alkyl group.
- the phenyl group may or may not have a substituent.
- Q a is preferably bonded to the para position with respect to the hydroxyl group that the benzene ring group to which Q a is bonded may have.
- Q a is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
- the alkyl group is preferably a methyl group.
- m2 represents an integer of 0 or more.
- the m2 is preferably 0 to 10, more preferably 0 to 4.
- nx represents an integer of 0 to 4. nx is preferably 1 to 2, and more preferably 2.
- ny represents an integer of 0 to 2.
- the ny existing may be the same or different.
- at least one ny preferably represents 1.
- m2 represents 1
- m2 represents 4
- at least one ny of four existing ny represents 1, and more preferably two ny represent 1.
- nz represents an integer of 0 to 2.
- the nz is preferably 1.
- the total number of nx, ny that may exist in a plurality of ny, and nz is preferably 2 or more, and more preferably 2 to 10.
- R 1 and R 6 independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a carboxylic acid group, a boronic acid group, an aldehyde group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
- R 1 and R 6 in the general formula (P2) is the general formula (1) and R 1 and R 6 in the same respectively. If R 1 there are a plurality, R 1 existing in plural numbers may each be the same or different. If R 6 there are a plurality, R 6 existing in plural numbers may each be the same or different.
- Q b represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a phenyl group, a halogen atom, a carboxylic acid group, a boronic acid group, an aldehyde group, an alkoxy group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
- the alkyl group may be linear or branched.
- the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
- the alkyl group may or may not have a substituent.
- the alkyl group portion of the alkoxy group and the alkyl group portion of the alkoxycarbonyl group are the same as those of the alkyl group.
- the phenyl group may or may not have a substituent.
- Q b is preferably a hydrogen atom. When there are a plurality of Q bs , the plurality of Q bs may be the same or different.
- Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (P2) include benzenetriol (preferably 1,3,5-benzenetriol).
- phenol compounds examples include biphenyl aralkyl type phenol resin, phenol novolac resin, cresol novolac resin, aromatic hydrocarbon formaldehyde resin modified phenol resin, dicyclopentadienephenol addition type resin, phenol aralkyl resin, and polyhydric hydroxy compound.
- the lower limit of the hydroxyl group content of the phenol compound is preferably 3.0 mmol / g or more, more preferably 8.0 mmol / g or more, further preferably 11.0 mmol / g or more, and particularly preferably 12.0 mmol / g or more. Most preferably 13.0 mmol / g or more.
- the upper limit is preferably 25.0 mmol / g or less, more preferably 23.0 mmol / g or less.
- the hydroxyl group content is intended to be the number of hydroxyl groups (preferably phenolic hydroxyl groups) possessed by 1 g of the phenol compound.
- the phenol compound may or may not have an active hydrogen-containing group (carboxylic acid group or the like) capable of polymerizing with the epoxy compound.
- the lower limit of the active hydrogen content of the phenol compound (total content of hydrogen atoms in hydroxyl groups, carboxylic acid groups, etc.) is preferably 8.0 mmol / g or more, more preferably 10.5 mmol / g or more, and 11.0 mmol. / G or more is more preferable, 12.0 mmol / g or more is particularly preferable, and 13.0 mmol / g or more is most preferable.
- the upper limit is preferably 25.0 mmol / g or less, more preferably 23.0 mmol / g or less.
- the upper limit of the molecular weight of the phenol compound is preferably 600 or less, more preferably 500 or less, further preferably 450 or less, and particularly preferably 400 or less.
- the lower limit is preferably 110 or more, and more preferably 300 or more.
- the phenol compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the content of the phenol compound is preferably 1.0 to 25.0% by mass, preferably 3.0 to 20.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition. Is more preferable.
- the composition of the present invention may contain a compound having a group capable of reacting with an epoxy compound described later (also referred to as “other active hydrogen-containing compound”) as a compound other than the phenol compound and the specific compound.
- the composition of the present invention contains a phenol compound and also contains other active hydrogen-containing compounds, the mass of the content of the other active hydrogen-containing compound with respect to the content of the phenol compound in the composition of the present invention.
- the ratio (content of other active hydrogen-containing compound / content of phenol compound) is preferably 0 to 1, more preferably 0 to 0.1, and even more preferably 0 to 0.05.
- the composition of the present invention may further contain an epoxy compound.
- the epoxy compound is a compound other than the specific compound.
- An epoxy compound is a compound having at least one epoxy group (oxylanyl group) in one molecule. Epoxy groups may or may not have substituents, if possible.
- the number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 2 to 40, still more preferably 2 to 10, and particularly preferably 2 in one molecule.
- the molecular weight of the epoxy compound is preferably 150 to 10000, more preferably 150 to 2000, and even more preferably 250 to 400.
- the lower limit of the epoxy group content of the epoxy compound is preferably 2.0 mmol / g or more, more preferably 4.0 mmol / g or more, and further preferably 5.0 mmol / g or more.
- the upper limit is preferably 20.0 mmol / g or less, more preferably 15.0 mmol / g or less.
- the epoxy group content is intended to be the number of epoxy groups contained in 1 g of the epoxy compound.
- the epoxy compound is preferably liquid at room temperature (23 ° C.).
- the epoxy compound may or may not exhibit liquid crystallinity. That is, the epoxy compound may be a liquid crystal compound. In other words, a liquid crystal compound having an epoxy group can also be used as the epoxy compound.
- the epoxy compound (which may be a liquid crystal epoxy compound) include a compound having a rod-like structure at least partially (a rod-like compound) and a compound having a disk-like structure at least partially. Be done. Among them, a rod-shaped compound is preferable because the obtained heat conductive material has more excellent heat conductivity.
- the rod-shaped compound and the disk-shaped compound will be described in detail.
- Examples of the epoxy compound which is a rod-shaped compound include azomethines, azoxys, cyanobiphenyls, cyanophenyl esters, benzoic acid esters, cyclohexanecarboxylic acid phenyl esters, cyanophenylcyclohexanes, cyano-substituted phenylpyrimidines, and alkoxy-substituted phenyls. Examples thereof include pyrimidines, phenyldioxans, trans, and alkenylcyclohexylbenzonitriles. Not only low molecular weight compounds as described above, but also high molecular weight compounds can be used.
- the above-mentioned polymer compound is a polymer compound obtained by polymerizing a rod-shaped compound having a small molecule reactive group.
- Preferred rod-shaped compounds include rod-shaped compounds represented by the following general formula (XXI).
- Q 1 and Q 2 are independent epoxy groups, and L 111 , L 112 , L 113 , and L 114 each independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group. .. A 111 and A 112 each independently represent a divalent linking group (spacer group) having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. M represents a mesogen group. Epoxy group of Q 1 and Q 2 may be substituted or may not have.
- L 111 , L 112 , L 113 , and L 114 each independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group.
- the divalent linking groups represented by L 111 , L 112 , L 113 , and L 114 are independently -O-, -S-, -CO-, -NR 112- , and -CO-O, respectively.
- R 112 is an alkyl group or a hydrogen atom having 1 to 7 carbon atoms.
- L 113 and L 114 are preferably —O— independently of each other.
- L 111 and L 112 are preferably single bonds independently of each other.
- a 111 and A 112 each independently represent a divalent linking group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
- the divalent linking group may contain heteroatoms such as non-adjacent oxygen and sulfur atoms.
- an alkylene group, an alkaneylene group, or an alkynylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms is preferable.
- the above-mentioned alkylene group, alkenylene group, or alkynylene group may or may not have an ester group.
- the divalent linking group is preferably linear, and the divalent linking group may or may not have a substituent.
- substituents examples include a halogen atom (fluorine atom, chlorine atom, and bromine atom), a cyano group, a methyl group, and an ethyl group.
- a 111 and A 112 are each independently preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably a methylene group.
- M represents a mesogen group, and examples of the mesogen group include known mesogen groups. Of these, a group represented by the following general formula (XXII) is preferable.
- W 1 and W 2 independently represent a divalent cyclic alkylene group, a divalent cyclic alkaneylene group, an arylene group, or a divalent heterocyclic group, respectively.
- L 115 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
- n represents an integer of 1 to 4.
- W 1 and W 2 examples include 1,4-cyclohexenediyl, 1,4-cyclohexanediyl, 1,4-phenylene, pyrimidine-2,5-diyl, pyridine-2,5-diyl, 1,3. 4-Thiadiazole-2,5-diyl, 1,3,4-oxadiazole-2,5-diyl, naphthalene-2,6-diyl, naphthalene-1,5-diyl, thiophene-2,5-diyl, And pyridazine-3,6-diyl.
- W 1 and W 2 may each have a substituent.
- substituents include the groups exemplified in the above-mentioned substituent group Y, and more specifically, a halogen atom (fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, and iodine atom), a cyano group, and a carbon.
- An alkyl group having a number of 1 to 10 for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, etc.
- an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms for example, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, etc.
- a group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms for example, an acyl group.
- An acyl group for example, formyl group and acetyl group, etc.
- an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms for example, a methoxycarbonyl group, an ethoxycarbonyl group, etc.
- an acyloxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms for example, an acyloxy group.
- W 1 there are a plurality W 1 existing in plural numbers may each be the same or different.
- L 115 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
- the divalent linking group represented by L 115 include the above-mentioned divalent linking groups represented by L 111 to L 114 , and examples thereof include -CO-O- and -O-CO-. , -CH 2- O-, and -O-CH 2- .
- the plurality of L 115s may be the same or different from each other.
- the preferred skeleton of the basic skeleton of the mesogen group represented by the above general formula (XXII) is illustrated below.
- the mesogen groups may be substituted with substituents on these skeletons.
- the biphenyl skeleton is preferable in that the obtained heat conductive sheet has more excellent thermal conductivity.
- the compound represented by the general formula (XXI) can be synthesized by referring to the method described in JP-A No. 11-513019 (WO97 / 00600).
- the rod-shaped compound may be a monomer having a mesogen group described in JP-A-11-323162 and Patent No. 4118691.
- the rod-shaped compound is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (E1).
- LE1 independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Of these, LE1 is preferably a divalent linking group.
- the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but a linear alkylene group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms is preferable.
- a plurality of LE1s may be the same or different from each other.
- L E2 are each independently a single bond, -CO-O-, or, -O-CO- is preferred.
- the plurality of LE2s may be the same or
- LE3 may independently have a single bond or a substituent, respectively, and may have a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring aromatic ring group or a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. Represents a non-aromatic ring group of, or a polycyclic group composed of these rings.
- L E3 represents a single bond, 1,4-phenylene group, or 1,4-cyclohexene-diyl group are preferable.
- Substituent having a group represented by L E3 each independently represent an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, or, preferably an acetyl group, an alkyl group (preferably having a carbon number of 1) Gayori preferable.
- the substituents may be the same or different.
- the plurality of LE3s may be the same or different.
- pe represents an integer of 0 or more. If pe is the integer of 2 or more, there exist a plurality of (-L E3 -L E2 -) may each be the same or different. Among them, pe is preferably 0 to 2, more preferably 0 or 1, and even more preferably 0.
- LE4 independently represents a substituent.
- the substituent is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, or an acetyl group, and more preferably an alkyl group (preferably 1 carbon number).
- a plurality of LE4s may be the same or different from each other. Further, when le described below is an integer of 2 or more, a plurality of LE4s existing in the same (LE4 ) le may be the same or different.
- le independently represents an integer of 0 to 4. Among them, le is preferably 0 to 2 independently of each other. A plurality of le's may be the same or different from each other.
- the rod compound preferably has a biphenyl skeleton.
- the epoxy compound preferably has a biphenyl skeleton, and the epoxy compound in this case is more preferably a rod-shaped compound.
- the epoxy compound which is a disk-shaped compound, has a disk-shaped structure at least partially.
- the disc-like structure has at least an alicyclic or aromatic ring.
- the disk-shaped compound can form a columnar structure by forming a stacking structure by ⁇ - ⁇ interaction between molecules.
- Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. examples thereof include the triphenylene structure described in 2012, 51, 7990-7793 or JP-A-7-306317, and the tri-substituted benzene structure described in JP-A-2007-2220 and JP-A-2010-244038.
- the disk-shaped compound preferably has three or more epoxy groups.
- a cured product of an epoxy compound containing a disk-shaped compound having three or more epoxy groups tends to have a high glass transition temperature and high heat resistance.
- the number of epoxy groups contained in the disk-shaped compound is preferably 8 or less, and more preferably 6 or less.
- the disk-shaped compound examples include C.I. Destrade et al. , Mol. Crysr. Liq. Cryst. , Vol. 71, page 111 (1981); Chemical Society of Japan, Quarterly Review of Chemistry, No. 22, Liquid crystal chemistry, Chapter 5, Chapter 10, Section 2 (1994); B. Kohne et al. , Angew. Chem. Soc. Chem. Comm. , Page 1794 (1985); Zhang et al. , J. Am. Chem. Soc. , Vol.
- Examples of the compounds described in 116, page 2655 (1994), and Japanese Patent No. 4592225 include compounds in which at least one (preferably three or more) ends are epoxy groups. Examples of the disk-shaped compound include Angew.
- epoxy compounds examples of other epoxy compounds other than the above-mentioned epoxy compounds include epoxy compounds represented by the general formula (BN).
- nDN represents an integer of 0 or more, preferably 0 to 5, and more preferably 1.
- RDN represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
- the divalent linking group includes -O-, -O-CO-, -CO-O-, -S-, an alkylene group (preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms), and an arylene group (the carbon number is preferably 1 to 10). 6 to 20 is preferable), or a group composed of a combination thereof is preferable, an alkylene group is more preferable, and a methylene group is more preferable.
- Examples of other epoxy compounds include compounds in which the epoxy group is fused. Examples of such a compound include 3,4: 8,9-diepoxybicyclo [4.3.0] nonane and the like.
- epoxy compounds include, for example, bisphenol A type epoxy compounds, bisphenol F type epoxy compounds, bisphenol S type epoxy compounds, and bisphenol AD type epoxy compounds, which are glycidyl ethers such as bisphenol A, F, S, and AD. Etc .; hydrogenated bisphenol A type epoxy compound, hydrogenated bisphenol AD type epoxy compound, etc .; phenol novolac type glycidyl ether (phenol novolac type epoxy compound), cresol novolac type glycidyl ether (cresol novolac type epoxy compound), bisphenol A Novolak type glycidyl ether, etc .; Dicyclopentadiene type glycidyl ether (dicyclopentadiene type epoxy compound); Dihydroxypentadiene type glycidyl ether (dihydroxypentadiene type epoxy compound); Polyhydroxybenzene type glycidyl ether (polyhydroxybenzene type) Epoxy compounds); benzenepolycarboxylic acid type gly
- the epoxy compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the content of the epoxy compound is preferably 1.0 to 25.0% by mass, preferably 3.0 to 20.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition. Is more preferable.
- the composition of the present invention preferably contains at least one of the above-mentioned phenol compound and epoxy compound.
- the composition may contain only the phenol compound among the phenol compound and the epoxy compound (it may be substantially free of the epoxy compound), or may contain only the epoxy compound (it may contain only the epoxy compound). It may be substantially free of phenolic compounds) or both.
- the composition of the present invention contains an epoxy compound and a phenol compound, respectively, the ratio of the content of the epoxy compound to the content of the phenol compound in the composition is the ratio of the epoxy group of the epoxy compound to the hydroxyl group of the phenol compound.
- the equivalent ratio (number of epoxy groups / number of hydroxyl groups) is preferably 30/70 to 70/30, more preferably 35/65 to 65/35.
- the ratio of the content of the epoxy compound to the content of the phenol compound in the composition is the activity of the epoxy group of the epoxy compound and the activity of the phenol compound.
- the equivalent ratio (number of epoxy groups / number of active hydrogens) with hydrogen (hydrogen atom in hydroxyl group, etc.) is preferably 30/70 to 70/30, and more preferably 35/65 to 65/35. preferable.
- the number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound and the number of epoxy groups contained in the specific compound with respect to the total number of hydroxyl groups contained in the phenol compound and the number of hydroxyl groups contained in the specific compound in the composition.
- the ratio of the total number of epoxy groups is preferably 30/70 to 70/30, more preferably 40/60 to 60/40, and 42/58. An amount of about 58/42 is more preferable.
- the composition may contain only one of the epoxy compound and the phenol compound, may contain both, or may not contain both.
- the composition contains a specific compound having an epoxy group, a specific compound having an active hydrogen, and / or other active hydrogen-containing compound
- the total content of the epoxy compound and the specific compound having an epoxy group is used.
- the ratio of the total content of the phenol compound, the specific compound having active hydrogen, and other active hydrogen-containing compounds is the equivalent ratio (epoxide group) of the epoxy group in the system to the active hydrogen (hydrogen atom at the hydroxyl group, etc.).
- Numberer of compounds / number of active hydrogens is preferably 30/70 to 70/30, more preferably 40/60 to 60/40, and even more preferably 42/58 to 58/42. ..
- the total content of the phenol compound and the epoxy compound in the composition is preferably 5 to 90% by mass with respect to the total mass of the solid content. 10 to 50% by mass is more preferable, and 15 to 40% by mass is further preferable.
- the composition for forming a heat conductive material of the present invention contains inorganic particles.
- the inorganic particles include inorganic oxides such as iron oxide, silica (SiO 2 ), alumina (Al 2 O 3 ), TiO 2 , BaTIO 3 , and ZrO 2 ; inorganic nitrides such as aluminum nitride and silicon nitride; Examples thereof include fine particles such as sparingly soluble ionic crystals such as calcium oxide, barium fluoride, and barium sulfate; and clays such as montmorillonite.
- the inorganic particles are preferably an inorganic nitride or an inorganic oxide, and more preferably an inorganic nitride, because the obtained heat conductive material has better thermal conductivity.
- the inorganic nitride include boron nitride (BN), carbon nitride (C 3 N 4 ), silicon nitride (Si 3 N 4 ), gallium nitride (GaN), indium nitride (InN), and nitride.
- the above-mentioned inorganic nitrides may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the inorganic nitride preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a boron atom, an aluminum atom, and a silicon atom in that the obtained heat conductive material has more excellent thermal conductivity. More specifically, the inorganic nitride is preferably boron nitride, aluminum nitride, or silicon nitride, more preferably boron nitride or aluminum nitride, and even more preferably boron nitride.
- the shape of the inorganic particles is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include rice granules, spheres, cubes, spindles, scales, agglutinates, and indefinite shapes. Of these, the shape of the particles is preferably scaly and agglutinating. Further, the inorganic particles having different shapes may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the size of the inorganic particles is not particularly limited, but the average particle size of the inorganic particles is preferably 500 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 300 ⁇ m or less, still more preferably 200 ⁇ m or less, in that the dispersibility of the inorganic particles is more excellent.
- the lower limit is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of handleability, 10 nm or more is preferable, and 100 nm or more is more preferable.
- 100 inorganic particles are randomly selected using an electron microscope, the particle size (major axis) of each inorganic particle is measured, and they are calculated by arithmetic mean. .. When using a commercially available product, the catalog value may be used.
- the content of the inorganic particles is preferably 60 to 90% by mass, more preferably 70 to 85% by mass, still more preferably 75 to 80% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
- the solid content of the composition is intended to mean all components excluding the solvent when the composition contains a solvent, and if it is a component other than the solvent, it is regarded as a solid content even if it is a liquid component. ..
- the average particle size of the inorganic particles contained in the composition is preferably larger than 3 ⁇ m, more preferably 4 to 50 ⁇ m, in that the heat conductive material is more excellent in heat conductivity.
- the inorganic substances preferably have inorganic substances having different average particle diameters.
- both the inorganic substance X having an average particle size of 20 ⁇ m or more and the inorganic substance Y having an average particle size of less than 20 ⁇ m are used. It is also preferable to include it.
- the average particle size of the inorganic substance X is preferably 20 to 300 ⁇ m, more preferably 30 to 200 ⁇ m.
- the average particle size of the inorganic substance Y is preferably 10 nm or more and less than 20 ⁇ m, and more preferably 100 nm or more and 15 ⁇ m or less.
- the inorganic substance X is preferably an inorganic nitride or an inorganic oxide, more preferably an inorganic nitride, and even more preferably boron nitride.
- the inorganic substance Y is preferably an inorganic nitride or an inorganic oxide, more preferably boron nitride or aluminum oxide, and even more preferably boron nitride. As the inorganic substance X and the inorganic substance Y, each of them may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the mass ratio of the content of the inorganic substance X to the content of the inorganic substance Y is preferably 50/50 to 99/1, and 75/25 to 97/3. Is more preferable.
- the content of boron nitride in the inorganic particles is preferably 55% or more, more preferably 75% or more, because the heat conductive material formed by the composition has more excellent thermal conductivity.
- the composition of the present invention may further contain a curing accelerator because the heat conductive material is more excellent in heat conductivity.
- the curing accelerator include triphenylphosphine, a boron trifluoride amine complex, and the compounds described in paragraph 0052 of JP2012-67225A.
- 2-methylimidazole (trade name; 2MZ), 2-undecylimidazole (trade name: C11-Z), 2-heptadecylimidazole (trade name: C17Z), 1,2-dimethylimidazole (trade name).
- the curing accelerator may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the content of the curing accelerator is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass, based on the total content of the epoxy compound and the specific compound having an epoxy group. Is more preferable.
- composition of the present invention may further contain a dispersant.
- a dispersant When the composition contains a dispersant, the dispersibility of the inorganic substance in the composition is improved, and more excellent thermal conductivity and adhesiveness can be realized.
- the dispersant can be appropriately selected from commonly used dispersants.
- DISPERBYK-106 manufactured by BYK-Chemie GmbH
- DISPERBYK-111 manufactured by BYK-Chemie GmbH
- ED-113 manufactured by Kusumoto Kasei Co., Ltd.
- Ajisper PN-411 manufactured by Ajinomoto Fine-Techno
- REB122- 4 manufactured by Hitachi Kasei Kogyo
- the dispersant may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the content of the dispersant is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass, based on the content of the inorganic substance.
- the composition of the present invention may further contain a solvent.
- the type of solvent is not particularly limited, and an organic solvent is preferable.
- the organic solvent include cyclopentanone, cyclohexanone, ethyl acetate, methyl ethyl ketone, dichloromethane, tetrahydrofuran and the like.
- the content of the solvent is preferably such that the solid content concentration of the composition is 20 to 90% by mass, more preferably 30 to 85% by mass, and 40 to 40 to 80%. An amount of 85% by mass is more preferable.
- the method for producing the composition of the present invention is not particularly limited, and a known method can be adopted.
- various components can be mixed and produced.
- various components may be mixed all at once or sequentially.
- the method of mixing the components is not particularly limited, and a known method can be used.
- the mixer used for mixing is preferably a liquid disperser. And a homogenizer.
- the mixing device may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Deaeration treatment may be performed before and after mixing and / or at the same time.
- the composition of the present invention is cured to obtain a heat conductive material.
- the curing method of the composition of the present invention is not particularly limited, but a thermosetting reaction is preferable.
- the heating temperature during the thermosetting reaction is not particularly limited. For example, it may be appropriately selected in the range of 50 to 250 ° C. Further, when the thermosetting reaction is carried out, heat treatments having different temperatures may be carried out a plurality of times.
- the curing treatment is preferably performed on a film-like or sheet-like composition. Specifically, for example, the composition may be applied to form a film and a curing reaction may be carried out. When performing the curing treatment, it is preferable to apply the composition on the substrate to form a coating film and then cure.
- a different base material may be brought into contact with the coating film formed on the base material, and then the curing treatment may be performed.
- the cured product (heat conductive material) obtained after curing may or may not be separated from one or both of the substrates.
- the composition may be applied on different substrates to form coating films, and the curing treatment may be performed in a state where the obtained coating films are in contact with each other.
- the cured product (heat conductive material) obtained after curing may or may not be separated from one or both of the substrates.
- the curing treatment may be completed when the composition is in a semi-cured state. Further, after the composition is made into a semi-cured state, further curing treatment may be carried out to complete the curing.
- a curing treatment for bringing the composition into a semi-hardened state hereinafter, also abbreviated as "semi-hardening treatment”
- a curing treatment for completely curing hereinafter, also abbreviated as “main curing treatment” are performed. It may be divided into separate steps.
- a composition is applied onto a base material to form a coating film, and then the coating film on the base material is heated without pressure to form a semi-cured heat conductive material (hereinafter referred to as “semi-cured material”). It may also be abbreviated as “semi-hardened film”), or it may be used as a semi-cured film by heating the coating film on the substrate while also using press processing.
- the press working may be carried out before or after the above heating or the like, or may be carried out during the press working.
- the semi-hardening treatment When press working is performed in the semi-hardened film, it may be easy to adjust the film thickness of the obtained semi-hardened film and / or reduce the amount of voids in the semi-hardened film.
- the semi-hardening treatment may be performed in a state where the coating films formed on different substrates are laminated, or the semi-hardening treatment may be performed without laminating the coating films.
- the semi-hardening treatment may be carried out in a state where the coating film formed from the composition is further in contact with a material other than the coating film.
- the obtained semi-cured film may be used as it is as a heat conductive material, or may be used as a completely cured heat conductive material after the semi-hard film is further subjected to the main curing treatment.
- the semi-hardened film may be heated as it is without pressure, or may be heated after being pressed or while being pressed.
- the main curing treatment may be performed in a state where the separate semi-hardened films are laminated, or the main curing treatment may be performed without laminating the semi-hardened films.
- the main curing treatment may be carried out in a state where the semi-hardened film is arranged so as to be in contact with the device or the like to be used. It is also preferable that the device and the heat conductive material of the present invention are adhered to each other by this hardening treatment.
- a flat plate press or a roll press may be used.
- a roll press for example, a base material with a coating film obtained by forming a coating film on the base material is sandwiched between a pair of rolls in which two rolls face each other, and the above pair of rolls is used. It is preferable to apply pressure in the film thickness direction of the coating film-coated substrate while rotating the coating film-coated substrate.
- the base material may be present on only one side of the coating film, or the base material may be present on both sides of the coating film.
- the base material with a coating film may be passed through the roll press only once or may be passed a plurality of times.
- the semi-hardening treatment and / or the curing treatment in the main curing treatment or the like only one of the treatment by the flat plate press and the treatment by the roll press may be carried out, or both may be carried out.
- the shape of the heat conductive material is not particularly limited, and can be molded into various shapes depending on the application.
- a typical shape of the molded heat conductive material is, for example, a sheet shape. That is, it is also preferable that the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention is a heat conductive sheet (hereinafter, also abbreviated as "heat conductive sheet of the present invention").
- the thermal conductivity of the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention is preferably isotropic rather than anisotropic.
- the heat conductive material is preferably insulating (electrically insulating).
- the composition of the present invention is preferably a thermally conductive insulating composition.
- the volume resistivity of the heat conductive material at 23 ° C. and 65% relative humidity is preferably 10 10 ⁇ ⁇ cm or more, more preferably 10 12 ⁇ ⁇ cm or more, and even more preferably 10 14 ⁇ ⁇ cm or more.
- the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is usually 10 18 ⁇ ⁇ cm or less.
- the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention may be used in combination with other members other than the members formed from the composition of the present invention.
- the sheet-shaped heat conductive material may be combined with another sheet-shaped support of the layer formed from the composition of the present invention.
- the sheet-shaped support include a plastic film, a metal film, and a glass plate.
- the material of the plastic film include polyester such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polycarbonate, acrylic resin, epoxy resin, polyurethane, polyamide, polyolefin, cellulose derivative, and silicone.
- the metal film include a copper film.
- the film thickness of the sheet-shaped heat conductive material (heat conductive sheet) is preferably 100 to 300 ⁇ m, more preferably 150 to 250 ⁇ m.
- heat conductive multilayer sheet of the present invention in which an adhesive layer or an adhesive layer is arranged on one side or both sides of the heat conductive sheet of the present invention.
- heat conductive multilayer sheet of the present invention By bonding the heat conductive material to an object such as a device to which heat should be transferred through such an adhesive layer and / or an adhesive layer, a stronger bond between the heat conductive material and the object is performed. Can be realized.
- the heat conductive multilayer sheet of the present invention the heat conductive multilayer sheet having the heat conductive sheet of the present invention and an adhesive layer or an adhesive layer provided on one side or both sides of the heat conductive sheet. May be produced.
- one of the adhesive layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be provided on one side or both sides of the heat conductive sheet, respectively, or both may be provided.
- An adhesive layer may be provided on one surface of the heat conductive sheet, and an adhesive layer may be provided on the other surface. Further, the adhesive layer and / or the adhesive layer may be partially provided on one side or both sides of the heat conductive sheet, or may be provided on the entire surface.
- the heat conductive material such as the heat conductive sheet may be in a semi-cured state (semi-cured film), and the heat conductive sheet in the heat conductive multilayer sheet may be in a semi-cured state. ..
- the adhesive layer in the heat conductive multilayer sheet may be cured, semi-cured, or uncured.
- the adhesive layer preferably contains at least one adhesive compound (resin and / or low molecular weight compound, etc.).
- the adhesive layer may further contain other components such as fillers, if desired.
- the compound having adhesiveness a compound having insulating property, adhesiveness and / or flexibility at the time of adhesion is preferable.
- the epoxy compound may be an epoxy resin containing an acrylic modified rubber.
- polyimide resin and the modified polyimide resin examples include Iupicort FS-100L (manufactured by Ube Industries, Ltd.), Semicofine SP-300, SP-400, SP-800 (manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.), and Uimide series (manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.). Products such as Unitika Ltd.) can be mentioned.
- Examples of the above-mentioned polyamide-imide resin and modified polyamide-imide resin include KS series (manufactured by Hitachi Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.), Vilomax series (manufactured by Toyo Spinning Co., Ltd.), Toron (manufactured by Solvay Advanced Polymers Co., Ltd.) and the like. .. Above all, from the viewpoint of high heat resistance and high adhesiveness, it is preferable to use a modified polyamide-imide resin represented by the KS series (manufactured by Hitachi Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.).
- the polyimide resin, the polyamide-imide resin, and the modified polyamide-imide resin used for the adhesive layer may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Further, these resins are usually in a varnish state in which the resin is dissolved in a solvent, and can be directly applied to a support such as a PET film and dried to form a film and used as an adhesive layer.
- an epoxy compound as a compound having adhesiveness.
- an epoxy composition containing an epoxy compound, a curing agent thereof, and a curing agent accelerator may be used as the adhesive layer. It is also preferable to add glycidyl acrylate to the epoxy composition.
- the epoxy composition for example, the descriptions of JP-A-2002-134531, JP-A-2002-226996, and JP-A-2003-221573 can also be referred to.
- the epoxy compound used for the adhesive layer is not particularly limited as long as it cures and exhibits an adhesive action.
- a bisphenol A type or bisphenol F type liquid epoxy compound having a molecular weight of 500 or less when used, the fluidity at the time of lamination can be improved.
- a polyfunctional epoxy compound may be added for the purpose of increasing the Tg (glass transition temperature), and examples of the polyfunctional epoxy compound include a phenol novolac type epoxy compound and a cresol novolac type epoxy compound.
- the epoxy compound used for the adhesive layer the epoxy compound described as the epoxy compound that can be used in the composition of the present invention may be used.
- the curing agent for the epoxy compound examples include polyamide, polyamine, acid anhydride, polysulfide, boron trifluoride, or phenol compound (phenol novolac resin, bisphenol, which is a compound having two or more phenolic hydroxyl groups in one molecule. A, bisphenol F, bisphenol S, etc.). From the viewpoint of excellent electrolytic corrosion resistance during moisture absorption, it is also preferable to use a phenol compound such as phenol novolac resin, bisphenol novolak resin, or cresol novolak resin. Further, as the curing agent, the phenol compound described as the phenol compound that can be used in the composition of the present invention may be used.
- a curing accelerator When using a curing agent, it is preferable to use a curing accelerator together with the curing agent. It is also preferable to use triphenylphosphine or imidazole as the curing accelerator.
- the imidazole include 2-methylimidazole, 2-ethyl-4-methylimidazole, 1-cyanoethyl-2-phenylimidazole, and 1-cyanoethyl-2-phenylimidazolium trimerite.
- the imidazoles are commercially available from Shikoku Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd. under the trade names of 2E4MZ, 2PZ-CN, and 2PZ-CNS.
- the epoxy compound used for the adhesive layer is also preferably used in combination with a high molecular weight resin compatible with the epoxy compound.
- a high molecular weight resin compatible with the epoxy compound include a high molecular weight epoxy compound, a functional group-containing rubber having a large polarity, and a functional group-containing reactive rubber having a large polarity.
- the highly polar functional group-containing reactive rubber include acrylic modified rubber in which a highly polar functional group such as a carboxyl group is added to acrylic rubber.
- compatible with an epoxy compound means a property of forming a homogeneous admixture without separating from the epoxy compound and separating into two or more phases after curing.
- the weight average molecular weight of the high molecular weight resin is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of reducing the tackiness of the adhesive in the B stage and improving the flexibility during curing, the weight average molecular weight is preferably 30,000 or more.
- the high molecular weight epoxy compound is a high molecular weight epoxy compound having a molecular weight of 30,000 to 80,000, and an ultra high molecular weight epoxy compound having a molecular weight of more than 80,000 (Special Fair 7-59617, Special Fair 7-59618, Special Fair). 7-59619, Tokuhei 7-59620, Tokuhei 7-64911, Tokuhei 7-68327), all of which are manufactured by Hitachi Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.
- As a functional group-containing reactive rubber having a high polarity HTR-860P (trade name) of a carboxyl group-containing acrylic rubber is sold by Nagase ChemteX Corporation, for example.
- the amount added is 10 parts by mass or more when the resin constituting the adhesive layer is 100 parts by mass. It is preferably 40 parts by weight or less. When it is 10 parts by mass or more, it is easy to improve the flexibility, tackiness, and / or crack suppression of the phase containing the epoxy compound as the main component (hereinafter referred to as the epoxy compound phase), and the insulating property is improved. Hard to drop. When it is 40 parts by weight or less, the Tg of the epoxy compound phase can be improved.
- the weight average molecular weight of the high molecular weight epoxy compound is preferably 20,000 or more and 500,000 or less. In this range, the strength and / or flexibility in the sheet state and / or the film state is improved, and the tackiness is easily suppressed.
- the polyamide-imide resin, the modified polyamide-imide resin, and the epoxy compound preferably used for the adhesive layer may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Further, these compounds may be a mixture in a varnish state in which the compounds are dissolved in a solvent. By applying such a mixture directly to a support such as a PET film and drying the solvent, the compound can be formed into a film and used as an adhesive layer.
- silane coupling agent A silane coupling agent may be added to the adhesive layer in order to improve the interfacial bond between different materials.
- examples of the silane coupling agent include ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, ⁇ -mercaptopropyltrimethoxysilane, ⁇ -aminopropyltriethoxysilane, ⁇ -ureidopropyltriethoxysilane, and N- ⁇ -. Aminoethyl- ⁇ -aminopropyltrimethoxysilane can be mentioned.
- ⁇ -mercaptopropyltrimethoxysilane or ⁇ -aminopropyltriethoxysilane is preferable from the viewpoint of adhesive strength.
- the adhesive layer contains a silane coupling agent, the blending amount thereof is 0.1 to 10% by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the above-mentioned adhesive compound from the viewpoint of the effect of the addition and / or the influence on heat resistance. Part is preferable.
- the adhesive layer may contain a filler (preferably an inorganic filler).
- a filler preferably an inorganic filler.
- the handleability and thermal conductivity of the adhesive layer are improved. Further, it is possible to impart flame retardancy, adjust the melt viscosity, impart thixotropic property, and / or improve the surface hardness.
- the adhesive layer contains a filler
- its content is not particularly limited. Above all, the content is preferably 20 to 50 parts by volume with respect to 100 parts by volume of the compound having the adhesiveness contained in the adhesive layer. From the viewpoint of the effect of blending, the content is more preferably 30 parts by volume or more. Further, from the viewpoint of optimizing the storage elastic modulus of the adhesive, improving the adhesiveness, and / or suppressing the decrease in insulating property by suppressing voids, the content may be 50 parts by volume or less. preferable.
- the inorganic filler examples include aluminum hydroxide, magnesium hydroxide, calcium carbonate, magnesium carbonate, calcium silicate, magnesium silicate, calcium oxide, magnesium oxide, alumina (aluminum oxide), aluminum nitride, aluminum borate whisker, and boron nitride. , Crystalline silica, amorphous silica, silicon nitride, talc, mica, and barium sulfate. Among them, alumina, boron nitride, or aluminum nitride is preferable in that it has good heat dissipation because of its high thermal conductivity, it is easy to control impurities, and it has good heat resistance and insulating properties.
- One type of filler may be used alone, or two or more types may be used.
- the average particle size of the filler contained in the adhesive layer is not particularly limited.
- 0.1 to 10 ⁇ m is preferable, and 0.2 to 5 ⁇ m is more preferable.
- the content of the filler in the adhesive layer is 50% by volume or less (for example, 20% by volume or more and 50% by volume or less) with respect to the total volume of the adhesive layer from the viewpoint of balancing adhesiveness and thermal conductivity. It is also preferable.
- the adhesive layer contains at least one selected from the group consisting of an epoxy compound and a modified polyamideimide resin as a compound having adhesiveness, and at least one selected from the group consisting of alumina and silicon oxide as a filler.
- the content of the filler is 25 parts by volume or more and 100 parts by volume or less with respect to 100 parts by volume of the adhesive having adhesiveness, and the average particle size of the filler is 0.2 to 5 ⁇ m. It is preferable from the viewpoint of.
- the film thickness of the adhesive layer is preferably 1 to 16 ⁇ m, more preferably 2 to 15 ⁇ m, further preferably 3 to 14 ⁇ m, and particularly preferably 4 to 12 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of thermal conductivity and adhesiveness.
- the film thickness of the adhesive layer can be measured using a micrometer, a stylus type film thickness meter, a needle type film thickness meter, or the like.
- ⁇ Adhesive layer> As the material of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, various pressure-sensitive adhesives and / or thermosetting materials and the like, which have the required heat resistance and heat conduction performance, can be used without particular limitation. Further, a pressure-sensitive adhesive may be used in which various heat-conductive fillers are mixed in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to improve the heat-conductivity.
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer examples include an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive, an olefin-based pressure-sensitive adhesive, a silicone-based pressure-sensitive adhesive, a natural rubber-based pressure-sensitive adhesive, and a synthetic rubber-based pressure-sensitive adhesive.
- Acrylic adhesives or olefin adhesives are preferable because outgas is less likely to be generated in applications near semiconductors in electronic devices.
- a silicone-based adhesive containing a silicone resin as a main raw material is preferable.
- the "adhesive containing a silicone resin as a main raw material” is a pressure-sensitive adhesive containing 60% by mass or more (preferably 80% by mass or more) of a silicone resin.
- Examples of the pressure-sensitive adhesive using a silicone resin as a main raw material include a peroxide-crosslinked (cured) type silicone-based pressure-sensitive adhesive and an addition-reaction type silicone-based pressure-sensitive adhesive.
- a peroxide-crosslinked (cured) type silicone-based pressure-sensitive adhesive and an addition-reaction type silicone-based pressure-sensitive adhesive.
- an addition reaction type silicone-based pressure-sensitive adhesive is preferable because it has high thickness accuracy when it is made into a thin layer and it is easy to form a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer by a transfer method.
- addition reaction type silicone adhesive examples include a silicone rubber and a silicone resin, and if necessary, a cross-linking agent, a filler, a plasticizer, an antiaging agent, an antioxidant, and / or a coloring agent.
- adhesives containing additives such as (pigments, dyes, etc.).
- the silicone rubber is not particularly limited as long as it is a silicone-based rubber component, but is a silicone rubber containing an organopolysiloxane having a phenyl group (particularly, an organopolysiloxane having methylphenylsiloxane as a main constituent unit). Is preferable. Various functional groups such as vinyl groups may be introduced into the organopolysiloxane in such silicone rubber, if necessary.
- the silicone resin is not particularly limited as long as it is a resin of silicone used in the silicone adhesive, for example, units consisting of constituent units "R 3 SiO 1/2", from the constituent unit "SiO 2" comprising units, units consisting of constituent units "RSiO 3/2", and consists of at least one kind of unit selected from the group consisting of units consisting of constituent units "R 2 SiO" (co) polymer
- silicone resins containing organopolysiloxane represents a hydrocarbon group or a hydroxyl group.
- acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive examples include homopolymers and copolymers of (meth) acrylic acid and / or (meth) acrylic acid ester.
- butyl acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, etc. are the main raw materials for acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesives because they are excellent in flexibility, chemical stability, processability, and / or controllability of adhesiveness.
- a poly (meth) acrylic acid ester-based polymer compound as a component is preferable.
- the above polymer compound is obtained by copolymerizing one or more monomers selected from butyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, diethylhexyl acrylate and the like with acrylate, acrylonitrile, and / or hydroxyethyl acrylate, and the like.
- a copolymer having a structure in which a polar group such as a COOH group, -CN group, or -OH group is introduced is preferable.
- a crosslinked structure may be introduced into the acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive as long as the flexibility is not impaired.
- a crosslinked structure it is easy to improve long-term adhesion retention and film strength.
- a crosslinked structure can be introduced by reacting a polymer having a polar group such as an ⁇ OH group with a compound having a functional group that binds to the polar group such as a plurality of isocyanate groups or an epoxy group with the polar group. ..
- the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention can be used as a heat radiating material such as a heat radiating sheet, and can be used for heat radiating applications of various devices. More specifically, a device with a heat conductive layer can be produced by arranging a heat conductive layer containing the heat conductive material of the present invention on the device, and heat generated from the device can be efficiently dissipated by the heat conductive layer.
- the heat conductive layer may be a heat conductive layer including the above-mentioned heat conductive multilayer sheet. Since the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention has sufficient heat conductivity and high heat resistance, it is used for various electric devices such as personal computers, general household appliances, and automobiles.
- the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention has sufficient heat conductivity even in a semi-cured state, it reaches light for photocuring such as gaps between members of various devices. It can also be used as a heat radiating material to be placed in a part that is difficult to make. In addition, since it has excellent adhesiveness, it can be used as an adhesive having thermal conductivity.
- phenolic compounds A-1 to A-3 used in the examples are shown below.
- the phenol compound A-1 used in the examples was synthesized with reference to US Pat. No. 4,992,596.
- Inorganic substances inorganic nitrides and other inorganic substances
- the inorganic substances used in Examples and Comparative Examples are shown below.
- AA-3 Aluminum oxide (average particle size: 3 ⁇ m, manufactured by Sumitomo Chemical)
- AA-04 Aluminum oxide (average particle size: 0.4 ⁇ m, manufactured by Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd.)
- HP-40 MF100 Aggregated boron nitride (average particle size: 40 ⁇ m, made of Mizushima alloy iron)
- SP-3 Scaly boron nitride (average particle size: 4 ⁇ m, manufactured by Denka Corporation)
- PPh 3 triphenylphosphine
- DISPERBYK-106 (a polymer salt having an acidic group) was used as a dispersant.
- Examples 1 to 40 and Comparative Examples 1 to 12 preparation of composition
- a cured solution was prepared by blending the epoxy compounds and phenol compounds of the combinations shown in Tables 1 to 3 below in the addition amounts (g) shown in Tables 1 to 3 below. After mixing the entire amount of the obtained curing liquid, the solvent, the dispersant, the surface modifier (surface modifier for aluminum oxide), and the curing accelerator in this order, an inorganic substance (inorganic nitride, inorganic oxide) was added. ..
- the amount of the solvent added was set so that the solid content concentration of the composition was 50 to 80% by mass.
- the solid content concentration of the composition was adjusted for each composition within the above range so that the viscosities of the compositions would be about the same.
- the amount of the curing accelerator added was such that the content of the curing accelerator in the composition was 1% by mass with respect to the total content of the epoxy compound and the specific compound having an epoxy group.
- the addition amount of the inorganic substance total addition amount of the inorganic nitride and other inorganic substances was the addition amount (g) shown in Tables 1 to 3 below.
- the inorganic substances were mixed and used so that the ratio (mass ratio) of the contents of each inorganic substance satisfied the relationships shown in Tables 1 to 3 below.
- the amount of the dispersant added was such that the content of the dispersant in the composition was 0.2% by mass with respect to the content of the inorganic substance.
- the amount of the surface modifier for aluminum oxide added is 0 when the content of the surface modifier for aluminum oxide in the composition is 0 with respect to the content of aluminum oxide (the total content of AA-3 and AA-04). The amount was set to be 2% by mass. If the composition does not contain aluminum oxide, no surface modifier for aluminum oxide is used.
- ⁇ Preparation of adhesive layer film 1 (epoxy adhesive layer, no filler)> 21.6 parts of B-3 as an epoxy resin, 13.3 parts of A-1 as a curing agent , 0.21 parts of PPh 3 (triphenylphosphine) as a curing accelerator, and 64.9 parts of cyclopentanone are mixed.
- the coating liquid for the adhesive layer was obtained.
- the prepared coating liquid for the adhesive layer was uniformly applied onto the release surface of the release-treated polyester film (NP-100A Panac Co., Ltd., film thickness 100 ⁇ m), and at 120 ° C. for 5 minutes. It was left to obtain a coating film.
- the film thickness of the adhesive layer was set to 5 ⁇ m.
- ⁇ Preparation of adhesive layer film 2 (epoxy adhesive layer, with filler)> 21.6 parts of B-3 as an epoxy resin, 13.3 parts of A-1 as a curing agent , 0.21 parts of PPh 3 as a curing accelerator, 35 parts of alumina AA-04, and 100 parts of cyclopentanone.
- the mixture was mixed to obtain a coating liquid for an adhesive layer.
- the prepared coating liquid for the adhesive layer was uniformly applied onto the release surface of the release-treated polyester film (NP-100A Panac Co., Ltd., film thickness 100 ⁇ m), and at 120 ° C. for 5 minutes. It was left to obtain a coating film.
- the film thickness of the adhesive layer was set to 5 ⁇ m.
- ⁇ Preparation of cured multi-layer sheet> The obtained multilayer sheet was treated with a hot press under air (hot plate temperature 160 ° C., pressure 12 MPa for 20 minutes, and then further treated at normal pressure at 180 ° C. for 90 minutes) to cure the coating film, and the resin sheet was formed. Obtained.
- the polyester films on both sides of the resin sheet were peeled off to obtain a cured multilayer sheet (thermally conductive multilayer sheet) having an average film thickness of 200 ⁇ m.
- the temperature of the film surface of the coating film was heated to 100 ° C., and the linear pressure was 544 N / cm.
- the obtained semi-cured film was treated with a hot press under air (hot plate temperature 160 ° C., pressure 12 MPa for 20 minutes, and then further treated at normal pressure at 180 ° C. for 90 minutes) to cure the coating film, and the resin sheet was cured.
- Got The polyester films on both sides of the resin sheet were peeled off to obtain a heat conductive sheet having an average film thickness of 200 ⁇ m.
- Example 1 to 40 and Comparative Examples 1 to 12 evaluation of heat conductive sheet and heat conductive multilayer sheet
- the thermal conductivity evaluation was carried out using each thermal conductive sheet and the thermally conductive multilayer sheet obtained by using each composition.
- the thermal conductivity was measured by the following method, and the thermal conductivity was evaluated according to the following criteria.
- Water resistance evaluation was carried out using each heat conductive sheet and heat conductive multilayer sheet obtained by using each composition.
- the water content was measured by the following method, and the water resistance was evaluated according to the following criteria.
- Tables 1 to 3 below show the types and amounts (g) of phenol compounds, epoxy compounds, inorganic substances, curing accelerators, adhesive layers, and dispersants used in each heat conductive sheet and heat conductive multilayer sheet. The evaluation result is shown together with the amount (g).
- the composition of the present invention can be used to obtain a heat conductive sheet and a heat conductive multilayer sheet having excellent heat conductivity. Further, it was confirmed that the heat conductive sheet and the heat conductive multilayer sheet obtained by using the composition are excellent in water resistance. Further, regardless of whether the semi-cured film is produced by using a press such as a flat plate press or a roll press, or when the semi-cured film is produced without using a press, the heat conductive material formed from the composition of the present invention is the present invention. It was confirmed that the effect of the invention can be realized.
- the heat conductive sheet was more excellent in heat conductivity under the condition that the composition of the inorganic substance contained in the heat conductive sheet was 75% by mass or more of boron nitride (comparison between Examples 18 to 19 and Examples 22 to 23). Further, it was confirmed that the heat conductivity was superior to the heat conductivity under the condition that the composition of the inorganic substance contained in the heat conductive multilayer sheet was 80% by mass or more of boron nitride (comparison between Examples 16 to 17 and Examples 20 to 21). ).
Landscapes
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Materials Engineering (AREA)
- Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
- Power Engineering (AREA)
- Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
- Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Thermal Sciences (AREA)
- Combustion & Propulsion (AREA)
- Compositions Of Macromolecular Compounds (AREA)
Abstract
The present invention addresses the problem of providing a composition for forming a heat conductive material having excellent heat conductivity. Also, the present invention addresses the problem of providing a heat conductive sheet, a heat conductive multilayer sheet, and a device having a heat conductive sheet, which are formed of said composition. A heat conductive material forming composition according to the present invention contains inorganic particles and a compound represented by general formula (1).
Description
本発明は、熱伝導材料形成用組成物、熱伝導シート、熱伝導性多層シート、及び、熱伝導層付きデバイスに関する。
The present invention relates to a composition for forming a heat conductive material, a heat conductive sheet, a heat conductive multilayer sheet, and a device with a heat conductive layer.
パーソナルコンピュータ、一般家電、及び自動車等の様々な電気機器に用いられているパワー半導体デバイスは、近年、小型化が急速に進んでいる。小型化に伴い高密度化されたパワー半導体デバイスから発生する熱の制御が困難になっている。
このような問題に対応するため、パワー半導体デバイスからの放熱を促進する熱伝導材料が用いられている。
例えば、特許文献1には、放熱シートに用いられる熱伝導材料として、下記一般式(XII)で表される化合物を含有する熱伝導材料が記載されている([請求項1][請求項8][請求項19][請求項20])
Power semiconductor devices used in various electric devices such as personal computers, general household appliances, and automobiles have been rapidly miniaturized in recent years. With the miniaturization, it becomes difficult to control the heat generated from the high-density power semiconductor device.
In order to deal with such a problem, a heat conductive material that promotes heat dissipation from the power semiconductor device is used.
For example, Patent Document 1 describes a heat conductive material containing a compound represented by the following general formula (XII) as a heat conductive material used for a heat radiating sheet ([Claim 1] [Claim 8]. ] [Claim 19] [Claim 20])
このような問題に対応するため、パワー半導体デバイスからの放熱を促進する熱伝導材料が用いられている。
例えば、特許文献1には、放熱シートに用いられる熱伝導材料として、下記一般式(XII)で表される化合物を含有する熱伝導材料が記載されている([請求項1][請求項8][請求項19][請求項20])
Power semiconductor devices used in various electric devices such as personal computers, general household appliances, and automobiles have been rapidly miniaturized in recent years. With the miniaturization, it becomes difficult to control the heat generated from the high-density power semiconductor device.
In order to deal with such a problem, a heat conductive material that promotes heat dissipation from the power semiconductor device is used.
For example, Patent Document 1 describes a heat conductive material containing a compound represented by the following general formula (XII) as a heat conductive material used for a heat radiating sheet ([Claim 1] [Claim 8]. ] [Claim 19] [Claim 20])
本発明者らは、特許文献1に記載された熱伝導材料について、一般式(XII)中の、A2、A3およびA4をそれぞれ-N=とし、トリアジン環を有する化合物について検討したところ、熱伝導性について改善の余地があることを知見した。
Regarding the heat conductive material described in Patent Document 1, the present inventors have set A 2 , A 3 and A 4 in the general formula (XII) to −N = respectively, and examined a compound having a triazine ring. , It was found that there is room for improvement in thermal conductivity.
そこで、本発明は、熱伝導性に優れる熱伝導材料を形成するための組成物を提供することを課題とする。
また、本発明は、上記組成物により形成される、熱伝導シート、熱伝導性多層シート、及び、熱伝導層付きデバイスを提供することをも課題とする。 Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a composition for forming a heat conductive material having excellent heat conductivity.
Another object of the present invention is to provide a heat conductive sheet, a heat conductive multilayer sheet, and a device with a heat conductive layer formed by the above composition.
また、本発明は、上記組成物により形成される、熱伝導シート、熱伝導性多層シート、及び、熱伝導層付きデバイスを提供することをも課題とする。 Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a composition for forming a heat conductive material having excellent heat conductivity.
Another object of the present invention is to provide a heat conductive sheet, a heat conductive multilayer sheet, and a device with a heat conductive layer formed by the above composition.
本発明者らは、トリアジン環を2個以上有する化合物を配合した熱伝導材料形成用組成物を用いることにより、形成される熱伝導材料の熱伝導性が向上することを見出し、本発明を完成させた。
すなわち、以下の構成により上記課題を達成することができることを見出した。 The present inventors have found that the thermal conductivity of the heat-conducting material to be formed is improved by using a composition for forming a heat-conducting material containing a compound having two or more triazine rings, and complete the present invention. I let you.
That is, it was found that the above-mentioned problems can be achieved by the following configuration.
すなわち、以下の構成により上記課題を達成することができることを見出した。 The present inventors have found that the thermal conductivity of the heat-conducting material to be formed is improved by using a composition for forming a heat-conducting material containing a compound having two or more triazine rings, and complete the present invention. I let you.
That is, it was found that the above-mentioned problems can be achieved by the following configuration.
[1] 無機粒子と一般式(1)で表される化合物とを含む、熱伝導材料形成用組成物。
上記一般式(1)中、
E1~E6は、それぞれ独立に、単結合、-NH-、又は、-NR-を表す。Rは、置換基を表す。
B1、B2、B3、及びB4は、それぞれ、k+1価、l+1価、m+1価、及びn+1価の有機基を表し、それらの少なくとも1つが、置換基を有していてもよいk+1価、l+1価、m+1価、又は、n+1価の芳香環基を表す。
Lは、2価の有機基を表す。
k、l、m、及び、nは、それぞれ独立に、0以上の整数を表す。
kが2以上の場合、k個存在するX1は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
lが2以上の場合、l個存在するX2は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
mが2以上の場合、m個存在するX3は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
nが2以上の場合、n個存在するX4は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
また、k、l、m、及び、nの合計は2以上である。
X1~X4は、それぞれ独立に、一般式(2)で表される基を表す。
上記一般式(2)中、*は、結合位置を表す。
D1は、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
A1は、置換基を有していてもよい芳香環基、又は、置換基を有していてもよい脂肪族環基を表す。
Q及びY1は、それぞれ独立に、水酸基、エポキシ基を有する1価の基、アミノ基、チオール基、カルボン酸基、イソシアネート基、及び、オキセタニル基を有する1価の基からなる群から選択される特定官能基を表す。
pは、0以上の整数を表す。
qは、0~2の整数を表す。
上記一般式(2)中、D1が複数存在する場合、複数存在するD1は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。A1が複数存在する場合、複数存在するA1は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。Qが複数存在する場合、複数存在するQは、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
rは、1以上の整数である。
[2] 上記一般式(1)中のLが、置換基を有していてもよい2価の芳香環基、置換基を有していてもよい2価の脂肪族環基、及び、炭素数2以上の分岐を有していてもよいアルキレン基からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を有する2価の有機基である、[1]に記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。
[3] 上記一般式(1)中のLが、置換基を有していてもよい2価の芳香環基を有する2価の有機基である、[1]又は[2]に記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。
[4] 上記一般式(1)で表される化合物のハンセン溶解度パラメーター値が28MPa0.5以下である、[1]~[3]のいずれかに記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。
[5] 上記一般式(1)で表される化合物のハンセン溶解度パラメーター値が26MPa0.5以下である、[1]~[4]のいずれかに記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。
[6] 更に、硬化促進剤を含む、[1]~[5]のいずれかに記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。
[7] 上記無機粒子が、無機窒化物である、[1]~[6]のいずれかに記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。
[8] 上記無機粒子が、窒化ホウ素である、[1]~[7]のいずれかに記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。
[9] 上記熱伝導材料形成用組成物の全固形分に対して、上記一般式(1)で表される化合物の含有量が3~40質量%である、[1]~[8]のいずれかに記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。
[10] [1]~[9]のいずれかに記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物を硬化して形成される熱伝導シート。
[11] [10]に記載の上記熱伝導シートと、
上記熱伝導シートの片面又は両面に設けられた、接着剤層又は粘着剤層と、を有する、熱伝導性多層シート。
[12] デバイスと、
上記デバイス上に配置された、[10]に記載の熱伝導シート又は[11]に記載の熱伝導性多層シートを含む熱伝導層と、を有する、熱伝導層付きデバイス。 [1] A composition for forming a heat conductive material, which comprises inorganic particles and a compound represented by the general formula (1).
In the above general formula (1),
E 1 to E 6 independently represent a single bond, -NH-, or -NR-. R represents a substituent.
B 1 , B 2 , B 3 and B 4 represent k + 1 valent, l + 1 valent, m + 1 valent and n + 1 valent organic groups, respectively, and at least one of them may have a substituent k + 1. Represents a valent, l + 1 valent, m + 1 valent, or n + 1 valent aromatic ring group.
L represents a divalent organic group.
k, l, m, and n each independently represent an integer of 0 or more.
when k is 2 or more, X 1 to the k present, may each be the same or different.
when l is 2 or more, X 2 of the l present, may each be the same or different.
when m is 2 or more, X 3 and m pieces present, may each be the same or different.
when n is 2 or more, X 4 n number present, may each be the same or different.
Further, the total of k, l, m, and n is 2 or more.
Each of X 1 to X 4 independently represents a group represented by the general formula (2).
In the above general formula (2), * represents a coupling position.
D 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
A 1 represents an aromatic ring group which may have a substituent or an aliphatic ring group which may have a substituent.
Q and Y 1 are independently selected from the group consisting of a monovalent group having a hydroxyl group and an epoxy group, an amino group, a thiol group, a carboxylic acid group, an isocyanate group, and a monovalent group having an oxetanyl group. Represents a specific functional group.
p represents an integer greater than or equal to 0.
q represents an integer of 0 to 2.
In the general formula (2), if D 1 there are a plurality, D 1 there are a plurality, may each be the same or different. If the A 1 there are plural, A 1 there are a plurality, they may each be the same or different. When there are a plurality of Qs, the plurality of Qs may be the same or different.
r is an integer of 1 or more.
[2] L in the above general formula (1) is a divalent aromatic ring group which may have a substituent, a divalent aliphatic ring group which may have a substituent, and carbon. The composition for forming a heat conductive material according to [1], which is a divalent organic group having at least one selected from the group consisting of alkylene groups which may have several or more branches.
[3] The heat according to [1] or [2], wherein L in the general formula (1) is a divalent organic group having a divalent aromatic ring group which may have a substituent. Composition for forming a conductive material.
[4] The composition for forming a heat conductive material according to any one of [1] to [3], wherein the Hansen solubility parameter value of the compound represented by the general formula (1) is 28 MPa 0.5 or less.
[5] The composition for forming a heat conductive material according to any one of [1] to [4], wherein the Hansen solubility parameter value of the compound represented by the general formula (1) is 26 MPa 0.5 or less.
[6] The composition for forming a heat conductive material according to any one of [1] to [5], further containing a curing accelerator.
[7] The composition for forming a heat conductive material according to any one of [1] to [6], wherein the inorganic particles are inorganic nitrides.
[8] The composition for forming a heat conductive material according to any one of [1] to [7], wherein the inorganic particles are boron nitride.
[9] Of [1] to [8], the content of the compound represented by the general formula (1) is 3 to 40% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition for forming a heat conductive material. The composition for forming a heat conductive material according to any one.
[10] A heat conductive sheet formed by curing the composition for forming a heat conductive material according to any one of [1] to [9].
[11] The heat conductive sheet according to [10] and
A heat conductive multilayer sheet having an adhesive layer or an adhesive layer provided on one side or both sides of the heat conductive sheet.
[12] With the device
A device with a heat conductive layer, comprising a heat conductive sheet according to [10] or a heat conductive layer including the heat conductive multilayer sheet according to [11], which is arranged on the device.
E1~E6は、それぞれ独立に、単結合、-NH-、又は、-NR-を表す。Rは、置換基を表す。
B1、B2、B3、及びB4は、それぞれ、k+1価、l+1価、m+1価、及びn+1価の有機基を表し、それらの少なくとも1つが、置換基を有していてもよいk+1価、l+1価、m+1価、又は、n+1価の芳香環基を表す。
Lは、2価の有機基を表す。
k、l、m、及び、nは、それぞれ独立に、0以上の整数を表す。
kが2以上の場合、k個存在するX1は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
lが2以上の場合、l個存在するX2は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
mが2以上の場合、m個存在するX3は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
nが2以上の場合、n個存在するX4は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
また、k、l、m、及び、nの合計は2以上である。
X1~X4は、それぞれ独立に、一般式(2)で表される基を表す。
D1は、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
A1は、置換基を有していてもよい芳香環基、又は、置換基を有していてもよい脂肪族環基を表す。
Q及びY1は、それぞれ独立に、水酸基、エポキシ基を有する1価の基、アミノ基、チオール基、カルボン酸基、イソシアネート基、及び、オキセタニル基を有する1価の基からなる群から選択される特定官能基を表す。
pは、0以上の整数を表す。
qは、0~2の整数を表す。
上記一般式(2)中、D1が複数存在する場合、複数存在するD1は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。A1が複数存在する場合、複数存在するA1は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。Qが複数存在する場合、複数存在するQは、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
rは、1以上の整数である。
[2] 上記一般式(1)中のLが、置換基を有していてもよい2価の芳香環基、置換基を有していてもよい2価の脂肪族環基、及び、炭素数2以上の分岐を有していてもよいアルキレン基からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を有する2価の有機基である、[1]に記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。
[3] 上記一般式(1)中のLが、置換基を有していてもよい2価の芳香環基を有する2価の有機基である、[1]又は[2]に記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。
[4] 上記一般式(1)で表される化合物のハンセン溶解度パラメーター値が28MPa0.5以下である、[1]~[3]のいずれかに記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。
[5] 上記一般式(1)で表される化合物のハンセン溶解度パラメーター値が26MPa0.5以下である、[1]~[4]のいずれかに記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。
[6] 更に、硬化促進剤を含む、[1]~[5]のいずれかに記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。
[7] 上記無機粒子が、無機窒化物である、[1]~[6]のいずれかに記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。
[8] 上記無機粒子が、窒化ホウ素である、[1]~[7]のいずれかに記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。
[9] 上記熱伝導材料形成用組成物の全固形分に対して、上記一般式(1)で表される化合物の含有量が3~40質量%である、[1]~[8]のいずれかに記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。
[10] [1]~[9]のいずれかに記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物を硬化して形成される熱伝導シート。
[11] [10]に記載の上記熱伝導シートと、
上記熱伝導シートの片面又は両面に設けられた、接着剤層又は粘着剤層と、を有する、熱伝導性多層シート。
[12] デバイスと、
上記デバイス上に配置された、[10]に記載の熱伝導シート又は[11]に記載の熱伝導性多層シートを含む熱伝導層と、を有する、熱伝導層付きデバイス。 [1] A composition for forming a heat conductive material, which comprises inorganic particles and a compound represented by the general formula (1).
E 1 to E 6 independently represent a single bond, -NH-, or -NR-. R represents a substituent.
B 1 , B 2 , B 3 and B 4 represent k + 1 valent, l + 1 valent, m + 1 valent and n + 1 valent organic groups, respectively, and at least one of them may have a substituent k + 1. Represents a valent, l + 1 valent, m + 1 valent, or n + 1 valent aromatic ring group.
L represents a divalent organic group.
k, l, m, and n each independently represent an integer of 0 or more.
when k is 2 or more, X 1 to the k present, may each be the same or different.
when l is 2 or more, X 2 of the l present, may each be the same or different.
when m is 2 or more, X 3 and m pieces present, may each be the same or different.
when n is 2 or more, X 4 n number present, may each be the same or different.
Further, the total of k, l, m, and n is 2 or more.
Each of X 1 to X 4 independently represents a group represented by the general formula (2).
D 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
A 1 represents an aromatic ring group which may have a substituent or an aliphatic ring group which may have a substituent.
Q and Y 1 are independently selected from the group consisting of a monovalent group having a hydroxyl group and an epoxy group, an amino group, a thiol group, a carboxylic acid group, an isocyanate group, and a monovalent group having an oxetanyl group. Represents a specific functional group.
p represents an integer greater than or equal to 0.
q represents an integer of 0 to 2.
In the general formula (2), if D 1 there are a plurality, D 1 there are a plurality, may each be the same or different. If the A 1 there are plural, A 1 there are a plurality, they may each be the same or different. When there are a plurality of Qs, the plurality of Qs may be the same or different.
r is an integer of 1 or more.
[2] L in the above general formula (1) is a divalent aromatic ring group which may have a substituent, a divalent aliphatic ring group which may have a substituent, and carbon. The composition for forming a heat conductive material according to [1], which is a divalent organic group having at least one selected from the group consisting of alkylene groups which may have several or more branches.
[3] The heat according to [1] or [2], wherein L in the general formula (1) is a divalent organic group having a divalent aromatic ring group which may have a substituent. Composition for forming a conductive material.
[4] The composition for forming a heat conductive material according to any one of [1] to [3], wherein the Hansen solubility parameter value of the compound represented by the general formula (1) is 28 MPa 0.5 or less.
[5] The composition for forming a heat conductive material according to any one of [1] to [4], wherein the Hansen solubility parameter value of the compound represented by the general formula (1) is 26 MPa 0.5 or less.
[6] The composition for forming a heat conductive material according to any one of [1] to [5], further containing a curing accelerator.
[7] The composition for forming a heat conductive material according to any one of [1] to [6], wherein the inorganic particles are inorganic nitrides.
[8] The composition for forming a heat conductive material according to any one of [1] to [7], wherein the inorganic particles are boron nitride.
[9] Of [1] to [8], the content of the compound represented by the general formula (1) is 3 to 40% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition for forming a heat conductive material. The composition for forming a heat conductive material according to any one.
[10] A heat conductive sheet formed by curing the composition for forming a heat conductive material according to any one of [1] to [9].
[11] The heat conductive sheet according to [10] and
A heat conductive multilayer sheet having an adhesive layer or an adhesive layer provided on one side or both sides of the heat conductive sheet.
[12] With the device
A device with a heat conductive layer, comprising a heat conductive sheet according to [10] or a heat conductive layer including the heat conductive multilayer sheet according to [11], which is arranged on the device.
本発明によれば、熱伝導性に優れる熱伝導材料を形成するための組成物を提供することができる。
また、本発明によれば、上記組成物により形成される熱伝導シート、熱伝導性多層シート、及び、熱伝導層付きデバイスを提供することができる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a composition for forming a heat conductive material having excellent heat conductivity.
Further, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a heat conductive sheet, a heat conductive multilayer sheet, and a device with a heat conductive layer formed by the above composition.
また、本発明によれば、上記組成物により形成される熱伝導シート、熱伝導性多層シート、及び、熱伝導層付きデバイスを提供することができる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a composition for forming a heat conductive material having excellent heat conductivity.
Further, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a heat conductive sheet, a heat conductive multilayer sheet, and a device with a heat conductive layer formed by the above composition.
以下、本発明の熱伝導材料形成用組成物、熱伝導シート、熱伝導性多層シート、及び、熱伝導層付きデバイスについて詳細に説明する。
以下に記載する構成要件の説明は、本発明の代表的な実施態様に基づいてなされる場合があるが、本発明はそのような実施態様に制限されない。
なお、本明細書において、「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
また、本明細書において、エポキシ基は、オキシラニル基とも呼ばれる官能基であり、例えば、飽和炭化水素環基の隣接する炭素原子2個がオキソ基(-O-)により結合してオキシラン環を形成している基等もエポキシ基に含む。エポキシ基は、可能な場合、置換基(メチル基等)を有していてもよいし有していなくてもよい。 Hereinafter, the composition for forming a heat conductive material, the heat conductive sheet, the heat conductive multilayer sheet, and the device with the heat conductive layer of the present invention will be described in detail.
The description of the constituent elements described below may be based on a representative embodiment of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment.
In the present specification, the numerical range represented by using "-" means a range including the numerical values before and after "-" as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
Further, in the present specification, the epoxy group is a functional group also called an oxylanyl group. For example, two adjacent carbon atoms of a saturated hydrocarbon ring group are bonded by an oxo group (—O—) to form an oxylan ring. Epoxide groups include the groups that are used. The epoxy group may or may not have a substituent (such as a methyl group), if possible.
以下に記載する構成要件の説明は、本発明の代表的な実施態様に基づいてなされる場合があるが、本発明はそのような実施態様に制限されない。
なお、本明細書において、「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
また、本明細書において、エポキシ基は、オキシラニル基とも呼ばれる官能基であり、例えば、飽和炭化水素環基の隣接する炭素原子2個がオキソ基(-O-)により結合してオキシラン環を形成している基等もエポキシ基に含む。エポキシ基は、可能な場合、置換基(メチル基等)を有していてもよいし有していなくてもよい。 Hereinafter, the composition for forming a heat conductive material, the heat conductive sheet, the heat conductive multilayer sheet, and the device with the heat conductive layer of the present invention will be described in detail.
The description of the constituent elements described below may be based on a representative embodiment of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment.
In the present specification, the numerical range represented by using "-" means a range including the numerical values before and after "-" as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
Further, in the present specification, the epoxy group is a functional group also called an oxylanyl group. For example, two adjacent carbon atoms of a saturated hydrocarbon ring group are bonded by an oxo group (—O—) to form an oxylan ring. Epoxide groups include the groups that are used. The epoxy group may or may not have a substituent (such as a methyl group), if possible.
本明細書において、酸無水物基は、特段の記載が無い場合、1価の基であってもよく、2価の基であってもよい。なお、酸無水物基が1価の基を表す場合、無水マレイン酸、無水フタル酸、無水ピロメリット酸、及び、無水トリメリット酸等の酸無水物から任意の水素原子を除いて得られる置換基が挙げられる。また、酸無水物基が2価の基を表す場合、*-CO-O-CO-*で表される基を意図する(*は結合位置を表す)。
In the present specification, the acid anhydride group may be a monovalent group or a divalent group unless otherwise specified. When the acid anhydride group represents a monovalent group, a substitution obtained by removing an arbitrary hydrogen atom from an acid anhydride such as maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, pyromellitic anhydride, and trimellitic anhydride. The group is mentioned. When the acid anhydride group represents a divalent group, the group represented by * -CO-O-CO- * is intended (* represents a bond position).
なお、本明細書において、置換又は無置換を明記していない置換基等については、可能な場合、目的とする効果を損なわない範囲で、その基に更に置換基(例えば、後述する置換基群Y)を有していてもよい。例えば、「アルキル基」という表記は、目的とする効果を損なわない範囲で、置換又は無置換のアルキル基を意味する。
なお、本明細書において「してもよい」、及び、「していてもよい」等といった表現は、「してもよい」、及び、「していてもよい」とされた条件を満たしてもよく、満たさなくてもよいことを意図する。例えば、「置換基を有していてもよい」とは、「置換基を有さなくてもよい」ことをも含む。
また、本明細書において、「置換基を有していてもよい」という場合の置換基の種類、置換基の位置、及び置換基の数は特に制限されない。置換基の数は例えば、1個、又は、2個以上が挙げられる。置換基の例としては水素原子を除く1価の非金属原子団が挙げられ、例えば、以下の置換基群Yから選択できる。
本明細書において、ハロゲン原子としては、例えば、塩素原子、フッ素原子、臭素原子、及び、ヨウ素原子が挙げられる。 In the present specification, for substituents and the like for which substitution or non-substitution is not specified, if possible, a substituent (for example, a substituent group described later) may be further added to the group as long as the desired effect is not impaired. Y) may be possessed. For example, the notation "alkyl group" means a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group as long as the desired effect is not impaired.
In this specification, expressions such as "may" and "may" satisfy the conditions of "may" and "may". It is intended that it does not have to be satisfied. For example, "may have a substituent" also includes "may not have a substituent".
Further, in the present specification, the type of the substituent, the position of the substituent, and the number of the substituents in the case of "may have a substituent" are not particularly limited. The number of substituents may be, for example, one or two or more. Examples of the substituent include a monovalent non-metal atomic group excluding a hydrogen atom, and for example, it can be selected from the following substituent group Y.
In the present specification, examples of the halogen atom include a chlorine atom, a fluorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
なお、本明細書において「してもよい」、及び、「していてもよい」等といった表現は、「してもよい」、及び、「していてもよい」とされた条件を満たしてもよく、満たさなくてもよいことを意図する。例えば、「置換基を有していてもよい」とは、「置換基を有さなくてもよい」ことをも含む。
また、本明細書において、「置換基を有していてもよい」という場合の置換基の種類、置換基の位置、及び置換基の数は特に制限されない。置換基の数は例えば、1個、又は、2個以上が挙げられる。置換基の例としては水素原子を除く1価の非金属原子団が挙げられ、例えば、以下の置換基群Yから選択できる。
本明細書において、ハロゲン原子としては、例えば、塩素原子、フッ素原子、臭素原子、及び、ヨウ素原子が挙げられる。 In the present specification, for substituents and the like for which substitution or non-substitution is not specified, if possible, a substituent (for example, a substituent group described later) may be further added to the group as long as the desired effect is not impaired. Y) may be possessed. For example, the notation "alkyl group" means a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group as long as the desired effect is not impaired.
In this specification, expressions such as "may" and "may" satisfy the conditions of "may" and "may". It is intended that it does not have to be satisfied. For example, "may have a substituent" also includes "may not have a substituent".
Further, in the present specification, the type of the substituent, the position of the substituent, and the number of the substituents in the case of "may have a substituent" are not particularly limited. The number of substituents may be, for example, one or two or more. Examples of the substituent include a monovalent non-metal atomic group excluding a hydrogen atom, and for example, it can be selected from the following substituent group Y.
In the present specification, examples of the halogen atom include a chlorine atom, a fluorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
置換基群Y:
ハロゲン原子(-F、-Br、-Cl、-I等)、水酸基、アミノ基、カルボン酸基及びその共役塩基基、無水カルボン酸基、シアネートエステル基、不飽和重合性基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、アジリジニル基、チオール基、イソシアネート基、チオイソシアネート基、アルデヒド基、アルコキシ基、アリーロキシ基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、アルキルジチオ基、アリールジチオ基、N-アルキルアミノ基、N,N-ジアルキルアミノ基、N-アリールアミノ基、N,N-ジアリールアミノ基、N-アルキル-N-アリールアミノ基、アシルオキシ基、カルバモイルオキシ基、N-アルキルカルバモイルオキシ基、N-アリールカルバモイルオキシ基、N,N-ジアルキルカルバモイルオキシ基、N,N-ジアリールカルバモイルオキシ基、N-アルキル-N-アリールカルバモイルオキシ基、アルキルスルホキシ基、アリールスルホキシ基、アシルチオ基、アシルアミノ基、N-アルキルアシルアミノ基、N-アリールアシルアミノ基、ウレイド基、N’-アルキルウレイド基、N’,N’-ジアルキルウレイド基、N’-アリールウレイド基、N’,N’-ジアリールウレイド基、N’-アルキル-N’-アリールウレイド基、N-アルキルウレイド基、N-アリールウレイド基、N’-アルキル-N-アルキルウレイド基、N’-アルキル-N-アリールウレイド基、N’,N’-ジアルキル-N-アルキルウレイド基、N’,N’-ジアルキル-N-アリールウレイド基、N’-アリール-N-アルキルウレイド基、N’-アリール-N-アリールウレイド基、N’,N’-ジアリール-N-アルキルウレイド基、N’,N’-ジアリール-N-アリールウレイド基、N’-アルキル-N’-アリール-N-アルキルウレイド基、N’-アルキル-N’-アリール-N-アリールウレイド基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、アリーロキシカルボニルアミノ基、N-アルキル-N-アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、N-アルキル-N-アリーロキシカルボニルアミノ基、N-アリール-N-アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、N-アリール-N-アリーロキシカルボニルアミノ基、ホルミル基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリーロキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、N-アルキルカルバモイル基、N,N-ジアルキルカルバモイル基、N-アリールカルバモイル基、N,N-ジアリールカルバモイル基、N-アルキル-N-アリールカルバモイル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、スルホ基(-SO3H)及びその共役塩基基、アルコキシスルホニル基、アリーロキシスルホニル基、スルフィナモイル基、N-アルキルスルフィナモイル基、N,N-ジアルキルスルフィナモイル基、N-アリールスルフィナモイル基、N,N-ジアリールスルフィナモイル基、N-アルキル-N-アリールスルフィナモイル基、スルファモイル基、N-アルキルスルファモイル基、N,N-ジアルキルスルファモイル基、N-アリールスルファモイル基、N,N-ジアリールスルファモイル基、N-アルキル-N-アリールスルファモイル基、N-アシルスルファモイル基及びその共役塩基基、N-アルキルスルホニルスルファモイル基(-SO2NHSO2(alkyl))及びその共役塩基基、N-アリールスルホニルスルファモイル基(-SO2NHSO2(aryl))及びその共役塩基基、N-アルキルスルホニルカルバモイル基(-CONHSO2(alkyl))及びその共役塩基基、N-アリールスルホニルカルバモイル基(-CONHSO2(aryl))及びその共役塩基基、アルコキシシリル基(-Si(Oalkyl)3)、アリーロキシシリル基(-Si(Oaryl)3)、ヒドロキシシリル基(-Si(OH)3)及びその共役塩基基、ホスホノ基(-PO3H2)及びその共役塩基基、ジアルキルホスホノ基(-PO3(alkyl)2)、ジアリールホスホノ基(-PO3(aryl)2)、アルキルアリールホスホノ基(-PO3(alkyl)(aryl))、モノアルキルホスホノ基(-PO3H(alkyl))及びその共役塩基基、モノアリールホスホノ基(-PO3H(aryl))及びその共役塩基基、ホスホノオキシ基(-OPO3H2)及びその共役塩基基、ジアルキルホスホノオキシ基(-OPO3(alkyl)2)、ジアリールホスホノオキシ基(-OPO3(aryl)2)、アルキルアリールホスホノオキシ基(-OPO3(alkyl)(aryl))、モノアルキルホスホノオキシ基(-OPO3H(alkyl))及びその共役塩基基、モノアリールホスホノオキシ基(-OPO3H(aryl))及びその共役塩基基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アリール基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、及びアルキル基。
また、これらの置換基は、可能であるならば置換基同士、又は置換している基と結合して環を形成してもよいし、していなくてもよい。
また、本明細書において、各成分は、各成分に該当する物質を1種単独でも用いても、2種以上を併用してもよい。ここで、各成分について2種以上の物質を併用する場合、その成分についての含有量とは、特段の断りが無い限り、併用した物質の合計の含有量を指す。 Substituent group Y:
Halogen atom (-F, -Br, -Cl, -I, etc.), hydroxyl group, amino group, carboxylic acid group and its conjugate base group, carboxylic acid anhydride group, cyanate ester group, unsaturated polymerizable group, epoxy group, oxetanyl Group, aziridinyl group, thiol group, isocyanate group, thioisocyanate group, aldehyde group, alkoxy group, allyloxy group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, alkyldithio group, aryldithio group, N-alkylamino group, N, N-dialkylamino Group, N-arylamino group, N, N-diarylamino group, N-alkyl-N-arylamino group, acyloxy group, carbamoyloxy group, N-alkylcarbamoyloxy group, N-arylcarbamoyloxy group, N, N -Dialkylcarbamoyloxy group, N, N-diarylcarbamoyloxy group, N-alkyl-N-arylcarbamoyloxy group, alkylsulfoxy group, arylsulfoxy group, acylthio group, acylamino group, N-alkylacylamino group, N -Arylacylacylamino group, carboxylicyl group, N'-alkylureid group, N', N'-dialkylureido group, N'-arylureido group, N', N'-diarylureido group, N'-alkyl-N' -Arylureide group, N-alkylureido group, N-arylureido group, N'-alkyl-N-alkylureido group, N'-alkyl-N-arylureido group, N', N'-dialkyl-N-alkyl Carbonyl group, N', N'-dialkyl-N-aryl carboxylic group, N'-aryl-N-alkyl carboxylic group, N'-aryl-N-aryl carbyl group, N', N'-diaryl-N-alkyl Carbonyl groups, N', N'-diaryl-N-aryl walide groups, N'-alkyl-N'-aryl-N-alkyl walide groups, N'-alkyl-N'-aryl-N-aryl ureido groups, alkoxy Carbonylamino Group, Allyloxycarbonylamino Group, N-alkyl-N-alkoxycarbonylamino Group, N-alkyl-N-Allyloxycarbonylamino Group, N-aryl-N-alkoxycarbonylamino Group, N-aryl-N- Allyloxycarbonylamino group, formyl group, acyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, allyloxycarbonyl group, carbamoyl group, N-alkylcarbamoyl group, N, N-dialkylcarbamoyl group, N-arylcarbamoyl group, N, N-diaryl Carbamoyl group, N- alkyl -N- arylcarbamoyl group, an alkylsulfinyl group, an arylsulfinyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, a sulfo group (-SO 3 H) and its conjugated base group, alkoxy sulfonyl group, aryloxy sulfonyl Group, sulfinamoyl group, N-alkylsulfinamoyl group, N, N-dialkylsulfinamoyl group, N-arylsulfinamoyl group, N, N-diarylsulfinamoyl group, N-alkyl-N-arylsulfina Moil group, sulfamoyl group, N-alkyl sulfamoyl group, N, N-dialkyl sulfamoyl group, N-aryl sulfamoyl group, N, N-diaryl sulfamoyl group, N-alkyl-N-arylsul Famoyl group, N-acylsulfamoyl group and its conjugate base group, N-alkylsulfonylsulfamoyl group (-SO 2 NHSO 2 (alkyl)) and its conjugate base group, N-arylsulfonylsulfamoyl group ( -SO 2 NHSO 2 (aryl)) and its conjugate base group, N-alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl group (-CONHSO 2 (alkyl)) and its conjugate base group, N-arylsulfonylcarbamoyl group (-CONHSO 2 (aryl)) and Its conjugated base group, alkoxysilyl group (-Si (Oalkyl) 3 ), aryloxysilyl group (-Si (Oaryl) 3 ), hydroxysilyl group (-Si (OH) 3 ) and its conjugated base group, phosphono group ( -PO 3 H 2 ) and its conjugate base group, dialkylphosphono group (-PO 3 (alkyl) 2 ), diarylphosphono group (-PO 3 (aryl) 2 ), alkylarylphosphono group (-PO 3 (-PO 3) Alkyl)), monoalkylphosphono group (-PO 3 H (alkyl)) and its conjugate base group, monoarylphosphono group (-PO 3 H (aryl)) and its conjugate base group, phosphonooxy group (alkyl)) -OPO 3 H 2 ) and its conjugate base group, dialkylphosphonooxy group (-OPO 3 (alkyl) 2 ), diarylphosphonooxy group (-OPO 3 (aryl) 2 ), alkylarylphosphonooxy group (-. OPO 3 (alkyl) (aryl) ), monoalkyl phosphono group (-OPO 3 H (alkyl)) and its conjugated base group, monoaryl phosphonate Nookishi group (-OPO 3 H (aryl)) and its conjugated base group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group and an alkyl group.
Further, these substituents may or may not form a ring by combining the substituents with each other or with the substitutable group, if possible.
Further, in the present specification, as each component, a substance corresponding to each component may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Here, when two or more kinds of substances are used in combination for each component, the content of the component means the total content of the substances used in combination unless otherwise specified.
ハロゲン原子(-F、-Br、-Cl、-I等)、水酸基、アミノ基、カルボン酸基及びその共役塩基基、無水カルボン酸基、シアネートエステル基、不飽和重合性基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、アジリジニル基、チオール基、イソシアネート基、チオイソシアネート基、アルデヒド基、アルコキシ基、アリーロキシ基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、アルキルジチオ基、アリールジチオ基、N-アルキルアミノ基、N,N-ジアルキルアミノ基、N-アリールアミノ基、N,N-ジアリールアミノ基、N-アルキル-N-アリールアミノ基、アシルオキシ基、カルバモイルオキシ基、N-アルキルカルバモイルオキシ基、N-アリールカルバモイルオキシ基、N,N-ジアルキルカルバモイルオキシ基、N,N-ジアリールカルバモイルオキシ基、N-アルキル-N-アリールカルバモイルオキシ基、アルキルスルホキシ基、アリールスルホキシ基、アシルチオ基、アシルアミノ基、N-アルキルアシルアミノ基、N-アリールアシルアミノ基、ウレイド基、N’-アルキルウレイド基、N’,N’-ジアルキルウレイド基、N’-アリールウレイド基、N’,N’-ジアリールウレイド基、N’-アルキル-N’-アリールウレイド基、N-アルキルウレイド基、N-アリールウレイド基、N’-アルキル-N-アルキルウレイド基、N’-アルキル-N-アリールウレイド基、N’,N’-ジアルキル-N-アルキルウレイド基、N’,N’-ジアルキル-N-アリールウレイド基、N’-アリール-N-アルキルウレイド基、N’-アリール-N-アリールウレイド基、N’,N’-ジアリール-N-アルキルウレイド基、N’,N’-ジアリール-N-アリールウレイド基、N’-アルキル-N’-アリール-N-アルキルウレイド基、N’-アルキル-N’-アリール-N-アリールウレイド基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、アリーロキシカルボニルアミノ基、N-アルキル-N-アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、N-アルキル-N-アリーロキシカルボニルアミノ基、N-アリール-N-アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、N-アリール-N-アリーロキシカルボニルアミノ基、ホルミル基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリーロキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、N-アルキルカルバモイル基、N,N-ジアルキルカルバモイル基、N-アリールカルバモイル基、N,N-ジアリールカルバモイル基、N-アルキル-N-アリールカルバモイル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、スルホ基(-SO3H)及びその共役塩基基、アルコキシスルホニル基、アリーロキシスルホニル基、スルフィナモイル基、N-アルキルスルフィナモイル基、N,N-ジアルキルスルフィナモイル基、N-アリールスルフィナモイル基、N,N-ジアリールスルフィナモイル基、N-アルキル-N-アリールスルフィナモイル基、スルファモイル基、N-アルキルスルファモイル基、N,N-ジアルキルスルファモイル基、N-アリールスルファモイル基、N,N-ジアリールスルファモイル基、N-アルキル-N-アリールスルファモイル基、N-アシルスルファモイル基及びその共役塩基基、N-アルキルスルホニルスルファモイル基(-SO2NHSO2(alkyl))及びその共役塩基基、N-アリールスルホニルスルファモイル基(-SO2NHSO2(aryl))及びその共役塩基基、N-アルキルスルホニルカルバモイル基(-CONHSO2(alkyl))及びその共役塩基基、N-アリールスルホニルカルバモイル基(-CONHSO2(aryl))及びその共役塩基基、アルコキシシリル基(-Si(Oalkyl)3)、アリーロキシシリル基(-Si(Oaryl)3)、ヒドロキシシリル基(-Si(OH)3)及びその共役塩基基、ホスホノ基(-PO3H2)及びその共役塩基基、ジアルキルホスホノ基(-PO3(alkyl)2)、ジアリールホスホノ基(-PO3(aryl)2)、アルキルアリールホスホノ基(-PO3(alkyl)(aryl))、モノアルキルホスホノ基(-PO3H(alkyl))及びその共役塩基基、モノアリールホスホノ基(-PO3H(aryl))及びその共役塩基基、ホスホノオキシ基(-OPO3H2)及びその共役塩基基、ジアルキルホスホノオキシ基(-OPO3(alkyl)2)、ジアリールホスホノオキシ基(-OPO3(aryl)2)、アルキルアリールホスホノオキシ基(-OPO3(alkyl)(aryl))、モノアルキルホスホノオキシ基(-OPO3H(alkyl))及びその共役塩基基、モノアリールホスホノオキシ基(-OPO3H(aryl))及びその共役塩基基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アリール基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、及びアルキル基。
また、これらの置換基は、可能であるならば置換基同士、又は置換している基と結合して環を形成してもよいし、していなくてもよい。
また、本明細書において、各成分は、各成分に該当する物質を1種単独でも用いても、2種以上を併用してもよい。ここで、各成分について2種以上の物質を併用する場合、その成分についての含有量とは、特段の断りが無い限り、併用した物質の合計の含有量を指す。 Substituent group Y:
Halogen atom (-F, -Br, -Cl, -I, etc.), hydroxyl group, amino group, carboxylic acid group and its conjugate base group, carboxylic acid anhydride group, cyanate ester group, unsaturated polymerizable group, epoxy group, oxetanyl Group, aziridinyl group, thiol group, isocyanate group, thioisocyanate group, aldehyde group, alkoxy group, allyloxy group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, alkyldithio group, aryldithio group, N-alkylamino group, N, N-dialkylamino Group, N-arylamino group, N, N-diarylamino group, N-alkyl-N-arylamino group, acyloxy group, carbamoyloxy group, N-alkylcarbamoyloxy group, N-arylcarbamoyloxy group, N, N -Dialkylcarbamoyloxy group, N, N-diarylcarbamoyloxy group, N-alkyl-N-arylcarbamoyloxy group, alkylsulfoxy group, arylsulfoxy group, acylthio group, acylamino group, N-alkylacylamino group, N -Arylacylacylamino group, carboxylicyl group, N'-alkylureid group, N', N'-dialkylureido group, N'-arylureido group, N', N'-diarylureido group, N'-alkyl-N' -Arylureide group, N-alkylureido group, N-arylureido group, N'-alkyl-N-alkylureido group, N'-alkyl-N-arylureido group, N', N'-dialkyl-N-alkyl Carbonyl group, N', N'-dialkyl-N-aryl carboxylic group, N'-aryl-N-alkyl carboxylic group, N'-aryl-N-aryl carbyl group, N', N'-diaryl-N-alkyl Carbonyl groups, N', N'-diaryl-N-aryl walide groups, N'-alkyl-N'-aryl-N-alkyl walide groups, N'-alkyl-N'-aryl-N-aryl ureido groups, alkoxy Carbonylamino Group, Allyloxycarbonylamino Group, N-alkyl-N-alkoxycarbonylamino Group, N-alkyl-N-Allyloxycarbonylamino Group, N-aryl-N-alkoxycarbonylamino Group, N-aryl-N- Allyloxycarbonylamino group, formyl group, acyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, allyloxycarbonyl group, carbamoyl group, N-alkylcarbamoyl group, N, N-dialkylcarbamoyl group, N-arylcarbamoyl group, N, N-diaryl Carbamoyl group, N- alkyl -N- arylcarbamoyl group, an alkylsulfinyl group, an arylsulfinyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, a sulfo group (-SO 3 H) and its conjugated base group, alkoxy sulfonyl group, aryloxy sulfonyl Group, sulfinamoyl group, N-alkylsulfinamoyl group, N, N-dialkylsulfinamoyl group, N-arylsulfinamoyl group, N, N-diarylsulfinamoyl group, N-alkyl-N-arylsulfina Moil group, sulfamoyl group, N-alkyl sulfamoyl group, N, N-dialkyl sulfamoyl group, N-aryl sulfamoyl group, N, N-diaryl sulfamoyl group, N-alkyl-N-arylsul Famoyl group, N-acylsulfamoyl group and its conjugate base group, N-alkylsulfonylsulfamoyl group (-SO 2 NHSO 2 (alkyl)) and its conjugate base group, N-arylsulfonylsulfamoyl group ( -SO 2 NHSO 2 (aryl)) and its conjugate base group, N-alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl group (-CONHSO 2 (alkyl)) and its conjugate base group, N-arylsulfonylcarbamoyl group (-CONHSO 2 (aryl)) and Its conjugated base group, alkoxysilyl group (-Si (Oalkyl) 3 ), aryloxysilyl group (-Si (Oaryl) 3 ), hydroxysilyl group (-Si (OH) 3 ) and its conjugated base group, phosphono group ( -PO 3 H 2 ) and its conjugate base group, dialkylphosphono group (-PO 3 (alkyl) 2 ), diarylphosphono group (-PO 3 (aryl) 2 ), alkylarylphosphono group (-PO 3 (-PO 3) Alkyl)), monoalkylphosphono group (-PO 3 H (alkyl)) and its conjugate base group, monoarylphosphono group (-PO 3 H (aryl)) and its conjugate base group, phosphonooxy group (alkyl)) -OPO 3 H 2 ) and its conjugate base group, dialkylphosphonooxy group (-OPO 3 (alkyl) 2 ), diarylphosphonooxy group (-OPO 3 (aryl) 2 ), alkylarylphosphonooxy group (-. OPO 3 (alkyl) (aryl) ), monoalkyl phosphono group (-OPO 3 H (alkyl)) and its conjugated base group, monoaryl phosphonate Nookishi group (-OPO 3 H (aryl)) and its conjugated base group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group and an alkyl group.
Further, these substituents may or may not form a ring by combining the substituents with each other or with the substitutable group, if possible.
Further, in the present specification, as each component, a substance corresponding to each component may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Here, when two or more kinds of substances are used in combination for each component, the content of the component means the total content of the substances used in combination unless otherwise specified.
[熱伝導材料形成用組成物]
本発明の熱伝導材料形成用組成物(以下、「本発明の組成物」とも略す。)は、無機粒子と後述する一般式(1)で表される化合物(以下、「特定化合物」とも略す。)とを含む。 [Composition for forming a heat conductive material]
The composition for forming a heat conductive material of the present invention (hereinafter, also abbreviated as “composition of the present invention”) is an inorganic particle and a compound represented by the general formula (1) described later (hereinafter, also abbreviated as “specific compound”). .) Including.
本発明の熱伝導材料形成用組成物(以下、「本発明の組成物」とも略す。)は、無機粒子と後述する一般式(1)で表される化合物(以下、「特定化合物」とも略す。)とを含む。 [Composition for forming a heat conductive material]
The composition for forming a heat conductive material of the present invention (hereinafter, also abbreviated as “composition of the present invention”) is an inorganic particle and a compound represented by the general formula (1) described later (hereinafter, also abbreviated as “specific compound”). .) Including.
このような構成を有する本発明の熱伝導材料形成用組成物は、熱伝導性に優れた熱伝導材料を形成することができる。
これは、詳細には明らかではないが、本発明者らは以下のように推測している。
すなわち、特定化合物は、トリアジン環を2つ以上有する化合物であるため、無機粒子との親和性が高いと考えられる。
また、特定化合物は、所定の基(特定官能基)を少なくとも2個有しているため、親和性の高い無機粒子との間だけでなく、特定化合物同士の間、特定化合物と所望に応じて加えるその他の成分(例えば、フェノール化合物及び/又はエポキシ化合物)との間などでも相互作用が生じていると考えられる。
そのため、特定化合物の特定官能基を介した相互作用によって特定化合物を介した熱伝導のパスが形成されるため、本発明の組成物を用いて形成される熱伝導材料の熱伝導性が向上している、と本発明者らは推測している。 The composition for forming a heat conductive material of the present invention having such a structure can form a heat conductive material having excellent heat conductivity.
This is not clear in detail, but the present inventors speculate as follows.
That is, since the specific compound is a compound having two or more triazine rings, it is considered that the specific compound has a high affinity with inorganic particles.
Further, since the specific compound has at least two predetermined groups (specific functional groups), not only between the inorganic particles having a high affinity but also between the specific compounds, the specific compound and the specific compound as desired. It is considered that an interaction occurs with other components to be added (for example, a phenol compound and / or an epoxy compound).
Therefore, the heat conduction path through the specific compound is formed by the interaction of the specific compound via the specific functional group, so that the heat conductivity of the heat conductive material formed by using the composition of the present invention is improved. The inventors speculate that this is the case.
これは、詳細には明らかではないが、本発明者らは以下のように推測している。
すなわち、特定化合物は、トリアジン環を2つ以上有する化合物であるため、無機粒子との親和性が高いと考えられる。
また、特定化合物は、所定の基(特定官能基)を少なくとも2個有しているため、親和性の高い無機粒子との間だけでなく、特定化合物同士の間、特定化合物と所望に応じて加えるその他の成分(例えば、フェノール化合物及び/又はエポキシ化合物)との間などでも相互作用が生じていると考えられる。
そのため、特定化合物の特定官能基を介した相互作用によって特定化合物を介した熱伝導のパスが形成されるため、本発明の組成物を用いて形成される熱伝導材料の熱伝導性が向上している、と本発明者らは推測している。 The composition for forming a heat conductive material of the present invention having such a structure can form a heat conductive material having excellent heat conductivity.
This is not clear in detail, but the present inventors speculate as follows.
That is, since the specific compound is a compound having two or more triazine rings, it is considered that the specific compound has a high affinity with inorganic particles.
Further, since the specific compound has at least two predetermined groups (specific functional groups), not only between the inorganic particles having a high affinity but also between the specific compounds, the specific compound and the specific compound as desired. It is considered that an interaction occurs with other components to be added (for example, a phenol compound and / or an epoxy compound).
Therefore, the heat conduction path through the specific compound is formed by the interaction of the specific compound via the specific functional group, so that the heat conductivity of the heat conductive material formed by using the composition of the present invention is improved. The inventors speculate that this is the case.
以下、組成物に含まれる成分について詳述する。
Hereinafter, the components contained in the composition will be described in detail.
〔特定化合物〕
本発明の熱伝導材料形成用組成物は特定化合物を含む。
特定化合物は、一般式(1)で表される化合物である。
[Specific compound]
The composition for forming a heat conductive material of the present invention contains a specific compound.
The specific compound is a compound represented by the general formula (1).
本発明の熱伝導材料形成用組成物は特定化合物を含む。
特定化合物は、一般式(1)で表される化合物である。
The composition for forming a heat conductive material of the present invention contains a specific compound.
The specific compound is a compound represented by the general formula (1).
一般式(1)中、E1~E6は、それぞれ独立に、単結合、-NH-、又は、-NR-を表す。
Rは、置換基を表す。Rの表す置換基としては、例えば、炭素数1~5の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基などが挙げられる。E1~E6のうちに-NR-が複数存在する場合、複数存在するRはそれぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
中でも、一般式(1)中、得られる熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる点から、E1~E6は、それぞれ独立に、-NH-、又は、-NR-が好ましく、-NH-がより好ましい。 In the general formula (1), E 1 to E 6 independently represent a single bond, -NH-, or -NR-.
R represents a substituent. Examples of the substituent represented by R include a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. When a plurality of -NR- are present in E 1 to E 6 , the plurality of Rs may be the same or different.
Among them, in the general formula (1), from the viewpoint of thermal conductivity of the resulting thermally conductive material is more excellent, E 1 ~ E 6 are each independently, -NH-, or, -NR- is preferably, -NH- Is more preferable.
Rは、置換基を表す。Rの表す置換基としては、例えば、炭素数1~5の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基などが挙げられる。E1~E6のうちに-NR-が複数存在する場合、複数存在するRはそれぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
中でも、一般式(1)中、得られる熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる点から、E1~E6は、それぞれ独立に、-NH-、又は、-NR-が好ましく、-NH-がより好ましい。 In the general formula (1), E 1 to E 6 independently represent a single bond, -NH-, or -NR-.
R represents a substituent. Examples of the substituent represented by R include a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. When a plurality of -NR- are present in E 1 to E 6 , the plurality of Rs may be the same or different.
Among them, in the general formula (1), from the viewpoint of thermal conductivity of the resulting thermally conductive material is more excellent, E 1 ~ E 6 are each independently, -NH-, or, -NR- is preferably, -NH- Is more preferable.
一般式(1)中、B1、B2、B3、及びB4は、それぞれ、k+1価、l+1価、m+1価、及びn+1価の有機基を表し、それらの少なくとも1つが、置換基を有していてもよいk+1価、l+1価、m+1価、又は、n+1価の芳香環基を表す。
In the general formula (1), B 1 , B 2 , B 3 and B 4 represent k + 1 valent, l + 1 valent, m + 1 valent and n + 1 valent organic groups, respectively, and at least one of them comprises a substituent. It represents a k + 1 valent, l + 1 valent, m + 1 valent, or n + 1 valent aromatic ring group that may have.
B1~B4が表す有機基としては、例えば、炭素数1~20のヘテロ原子を有していてもよい炭化水素基からj個の水素原子を除いた基などが挙げられる。なお、j個とは、k+1個、l+1個、m+1個、又は、n+1個のことをいう。
ここで、j個の水素原子を除く前の炭化水素基としては、例えば、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の脂肪族炭化水素基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数3~20の脂肪族環基、及び、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数3~20の芳香環基などが挙げられる。
炭素数1~20の脂肪族炭化水素基としては、例えば、メタン、エタン、プロパン、ブタン、ペンタン、ヘキサン、及び、ヘプタンなどが挙げられる。
炭素数3~20の脂肪族環基としては、例えば、シクロヘキサン環基、シクロヘプタン環基、ノルボルナン環基、及び、アダマンタン環基などが挙げられる。
炭素数3~20の芳香環基としては、例えば、炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素基、及び、炭素数3~20の芳香族複素環基などが挙げられる。
炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素基としては、例えば、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環、アントラセン環などが挙げられ、炭素数3~20の芳香族複素環基としては、例えば、フラン環、ピロール環、チオフェン環、ピリジン環、チアゾール環、カルバゾール環、インドール環、及び、ベンゾチアゾール環などが挙げられる。 Examples of the organic group represented by B 1 to B 4 include a group obtained by removing j hydrogen atoms from a hydrocarbon group which may have a hetero atom having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. In addition, j means k + 1, l + 1, m + 1, or n + 1.
Here, the hydrocarbon group before removing j hydrogen atoms may have, for example, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms and a substituent which may have a substituent. Examples thereof include an aliphatic ring group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms and an aromatic ring group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
Examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms include methane, ethane, propane, butane, pentane, hexane, and heptane.
Examples of the aliphatic ring group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms include a cyclohexane ring group, a cycloheptane ring group, a norbornane ring group, and an adamantane ring group.
Examples of the aromatic ring group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms include an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms and an aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms.
Examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring and an anthracene ring, and examples of the aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms include a furan ring and a pyrrole ring. , Thiophene ring, pyridine ring, thiazole ring, carbazole ring, indole ring, benzothiazole ring and the like.
ここで、j個の水素原子を除く前の炭化水素基としては、例えば、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の脂肪族炭化水素基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数3~20の脂肪族環基、及び、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数3~20の芳香環基などが挙げられる。
炭素数1~20の脂肪族炭化水素基としては、例えば、メタン、エタン、プロパン、ブタン、ペンタン、ヘキサン、及び、ヘプタンなどが挙げられる。
炭素数3~20の脂肪族環基としては、例えば、シクロヘキサン環基、シクロヘプタン環基、ノルボルナン環基、及び、アダマンタン環基などが挙げられる。
炭素数3~20の芳香環基としては、例えば、炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素基、及び、炭素数3~20の芳香族複素環基などが挙げられる。
炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素基としては、例えば、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環、アントラセン環などが挙げられ、炭素数3~20の芳香族複素環基としては、例えば、フラン環、ピロール環、チオフェン環、ピリジン環、チアゾール環、カルバゾール環、インドール環、及び、ベンゾチアゾール環などが挙げられる。 Examples of the organic group represented by B 1 to B 4 include a group obtained by removing j hydrogen atoms from a hydrocarbon group which may have a hetero atom having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. In addition, j means k + 1, l + 1, m + 1, or n + 1.
Here, the hydrocarbon group before removing j hydrogen atoms may have, for example, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms and a substituent which may have a substituent. Examples thereof include an aliphatic ring group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms and an aromatic ring group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
Examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms include methane, ethane, propane, butane, pentane, hexane, and heptane.
Examples of the aliphatic ring group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms include a cyclohexane ring group, a cycloheptane ring group, a norbornane ring group, and an adamantane ring group.
Examples of the aromatic ring group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms include an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms and an aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms.
Examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring and an anthracene ring, and examples of the aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms include a furan ring and a pyrrole ring. , Thiophene ring, pyridine ring, thiazole ring, carbazole ring, indole ring, benzothiazole ring and the like.
これらのうち、B1~B4が表す有機基としては、熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる点から、置換基を有していてもよい芳香環基からj個の水素原子を除いた基であることが好ましく、ベンゼン環からj個の水素原子を除いた基であることがより好ましい。
Of these, as the organic group represented by B 1 to B 4, j hydrogen atoms were removed from the aromatic ring group which may have a substituent because the heat conductivity of the heat conductive material is more excellent. It is preferably a group, and more preferably a group obtained by removing j hydrogen atoms from the benzene ring.
一般式(1)中、k、l、m、及び、nは、それぞれ独立に、0以上の整数を表す。ただし、k、l、m、及び、nの合計は2以上である。
l、m、及び、nは、それぞれ独立に、0~5が好ましく、1~2がより好ましい。
なお、kが0の場合、B1はX1を有さない。lが0の場合、B2はX2を有さない。mが0の場合、B3はX3を有さない。nが0の場合、B4はX4を有さない。 In the general formula (1), k, l, m, and n each independently represent an integer of 0 or more. However, the total of k, l, m, and n is 2 or more.
For l, m, and n, 0 to 5 is preferable, and 1 to 2 is more preferable, respectively.
When k is 0, B 1 does not have X 1. When l is 0, B 2 does not have X 2. If m is 0, then B 3 does not have X 3. If n is 0, then B 4 does not have X 4.
l、m、及び、nは、それぞれ独立に、0~5が好ましく、1~2がより好ましい。
なお、kが0の場合、B1はX1を有さない。lが0の場合、B2はX2を有さない。mが0の場合、B3はX3を有さない。nが0の場合、B4はX4を有さない。 In the general formula (1), k, l, m, and n each independently represent an integer of 0 or more. However, the total of k, l, m, and n is 2 or more.
For l, m, and n, 0 to 5 is preferable, and 1 to 2 is more preferable, respectively.
When k is 0, B 1 does not have X 1. When l is 0, B 2 does not have X 2. If m is 0, then B 3 does not have X 3. If n is 0, then B 4 does not have X 4.
kが2以上の場合(つまり、X1が複数存在する場合)、複数(k個)存在するX1は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。lが2以上の場合(つまり、X2が複数存在する場合)、複数(l個)存在するX2は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。mが2以上の場合(つまり、X3が複数存在する場合)、複数(m個)存在するX3は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。nが2以上の場合(つまり、X4が複数存在する場合)、複数(n個)存在するX4は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
when k is 2 or more (that is, if X 1 there are a plurality), X 1 present a plurality (k number) may each be the same or different. when l is 2 or more (that is, if X 2 there are a plurality), X 2 that there are a plurality of (l number) may each be the same or different. when m is 2 or more (that is, if X 3 there are a plurality), X 3 present a plurality (m pieces) may each be the same or different. when n is 2 or more (that is, if X 4 there are a plurality), X 4 present more of (n) may each be the same or different.
一般式(1)中、k、l、m、及び、nの合計数は、2以上であり、2~12の整数であることが好ましく、4~8の整数であることがより好ましい。
言い換えると、それぞれ複数存在してもよいX1~X4の合計数は2以上であり、2~12の整数であることが好ましく、4~8の整数であることがより好ましい。 In the general formula (1), the total number of k, l, m, and n is 2 or more, preferably an integer of 2 to 12, and more preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
In other words, the total number of X 1 to X 4 which may exist in a plurality of each is 2 or more, preferably an integer of 2 to 12, and more preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
言い換えると、それぞれ複数存在してもよいX1~X4の合計数は2以上であり、2~12の整数であることが好ましく、4~8の整数であることがより好ましい。 In the general formula (1), the total number of k, l, m, and n is 2 or more, preferably an integer of 2 to 12, and more preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
In other words, the total number of X 1 to X 4 which may exist in a plurality of each is 2 or more, preferably an integer of 2 to 12, and more preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
例えば、kが1以上(より好ましくは1~2)であるのが好ましく、lが1以上(より好ましくは1~2)であるのが好ましく、mが1以上(より好ましくは1~2)であるのが好ましく、nが1以上(より好ましくは1~2)であるのが好ましい。
つまり、B1が、X1を1個以上(より好ましくは1~2個)有するのが好ましく、B2が、X2を1個以上(好ましくは1~2個)有するのが好ましく、B3が、X3を1個以上(好ましくは1~2個)有するのが好ましい。 For example, k is preferably 1 or more (more preferably 1 to 2), l is preferably 1 or more (more preferably 1 to 2), and m is 1 or more (more preferably 1 to 2). It is preferable that n is 1 or more (more preferably 1 to 2).
That is, B 1 preferably has 1 or more (preferably 1 to 2) X 1 and B 2 preferably has 1 or more (preferably 1 to 2) X 2. 3 preferably has one or more (preferably one or two) X 3.
つまり、B1が、X1を1個以上(より好ましくは1~2個)有するのが好ましく、B2が、X2を1個以上(好ましくは1~2個)有するのが好ましく、B3が、X3を1個以上(好ましくは1~2個)有するのが好ましい。 For example, k is preferably 1 or more (more preferably 1 to 2), l is preferably 1 or more (more preferably 1 to 2), and m is 1 or more (more preferably 1 to 2). It is preferable that n is 1 or more (more preferably 1 to 2).
That is, B 1 preferably has 1 or more (preferably 1 to 2) X 1 and B 2 preferably has 1 or more (preferably 1 to 2) X 2. 3 preferably has one or more (preferably one or two) X 3.
Lは、2価の有機基を表す。
有機基としては、例えば、置換基を有していてもよい芳香環基、置換基を有していてもよい脂肪族炭化水素基、置換基を有していてもよい脂肪族環基、-O-、-S-、-N(RN)-若しくは-C(=O)-、又は、これらを組み合わせた基が挙げられる。
RNは、置換基を表す。RNの表す置換基としては、例えば、炭素数1~5の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基などが挙げられる。
また、芳香環基、脂肪族炭化水素基、及び、脂肪族環基が有していてもよい置換基としては、例えば、炭素数1~5の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基などが挙げられる。 L represents a divalent organic group.
Examples of the organic group include an aromatic ring group which may have a substituent, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent, an aliphatic ring group which may have a substituent, and-. Examples thereof include O-, -S-, -N ( RN )-or -C (= O)-, or a group in which these are combined.
R N represents a substituent. The substituents represented by R N, e.g., like a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
Further, examples of the aromatic ring group, the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and the substituent that the aliphatic ring group may have include a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. Can be mentioned.
有機基としては、例えば、置換基を有していてもよい芳香環基、置換基を有していてもよい脂肪族炭化水素基、置換基を有していてもよい脂肪族環基、-O-、-S-、-N(RN)-若しくは-C(=O)-、又は、これらを組み合わせた基が挙げられる。
RNは、置換基を表す。RNの表す置換基としては、例えば、炭素数1~5の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基などが挙げられる。
また、芳香環基、脂肪族炭化水素基、及び、脂肪族環基が有していてもよい置換基としては、例えば、炭素数1~5の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基などが挙げられる。 L represents a divalent organic group.
Examples of the organic group include an aromatic ring group which may have a substituent, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent, an aliphatic ring group which may have a substituent, and-. Examples thereof include O-, -S-, -N ( RN )-or -C (= O)-, or a group in which these are combined.
R N represents a substituent. The substituents represented by R N, e.g., like a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
Further, examples of the aromatic ring group, the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and the substituent that the aliphatic ring group may have include a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. Can be mentioned.
芳香環基としては、例えば、炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素基、及び、炭素数3~20の芳香族複素環基などが挙げられる。
炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素基としては、例えば、ベンゼン環などの単環式芳香環基;ナフタレン環、及び、アントラセン環などの多環式芳香環基;などが挙げられ、炭素数3~20の芳香族複素環基としては、例えば、フラン環、ピロール環、チオフェン環、ピリジン環、及び、チアゾール環などの単環式芳香環基;ベンゾチアゾール環、カルバゾール環、及び、インドール環などの多環式芳香環基;などが挙げられる。
なお、Lとしての芳香環基は、上記例示から2個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられる。 Examples of the aromatic ring group include an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms and an aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms.
Examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms include a monocyclic aromatic ring group such as a benzene ring; a polycyclic aromatic ring group such as a naphthalene ring and an anthracene ring; and the like. Examples of the 3 to 20 aromatic heterocyclic groups include monocyclic aromatic ring groups such as a furan ring, a pyrrole ring, a thiophene ring, a pyridine ring, and a thiazole ring; a benzothiazole ring, a carbazole ring, and an indole ring. Polycyclic aromatic ring groups such as;
Examples of the aromatic ring group as L include a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the above example.
炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素基としては、例えば、ベンゼン環などの単環式芳香環基;ナフタレン環、及び、アントラセン環などの多環式芳香環基;などが挙げられ、炭素数3~20の芳香族複素環基としては、例えば、フラン環、ピロール環、チオフェン環、ピリジン環、及び、チアゾール環などの単環式芳香環基;ベンゾチアゾール環、カルバゾール環、及び、インドール環などの多環式芳香環基;などが挙げられる。
なお、Lとしての芳香環基は、上記例示から2個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられる。 Examples of the aromatic ring group include an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms and an aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms.
Examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms include a monocyclic aromatic ring group such as a benzene ring; a polycyclic aromatic ring group such as a naphthalene ring and an anthracene ring; and the like. Examples of the 3 to 20 aromatic heterocyclic groups include monocyclic aromatic ring groups such as a furan ring, a pyrrole ring, a thiophene ring, a pyridine ring, and a thiazole ring; a benzothiazole ring, a carbazole ring, and an indole ring. Polycyclic aromatic ring groups such as;
Examples of the aromatic ring group as L include a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the above example.
脂肪族炭化水素基としては、例えば、炭素数1~12のアルキレン基などが挙げられ、具体的には、メチレン基、エチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基、ペンチレン基、ヘキシレン基、メチルヘキシレン基、および、へプチレン基などが挙げられる。
Examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group include an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and specifically, a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, a pentylene group, a hexylene group and a methylhexylene group. , And a heptylene group and the like.
脂肪族環基としては、例えば、シクロヘキサン環基、シクロヘプタン環基、ノルボルナン環基、及び、アダマンタン環基などが挙げられる。
なお、Lとしての脂肪族環基は、上記例示から2個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられる。 Examples of the aliphatic ring group include a cyclohexane ring group, a cycloheptane ring group, a norbornane ring group, and an adamantane ring group.
As the aliphatic ring group as L, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the above example can be mentioned.
なお、Lとしての脂肪族環基は、上記例示から2個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられる。 Examples of the aliphatic ring group include a cyclohexane ring group, a cycloheptane ring group, a norbornane ring group, and an adamantane ring group.
As the aliphatic ring group as L, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the above example can be mentioned.
置換基を有していてもよい芳香環基、置換基を有していてもよい脂肪族炭化水素基、置換基を有していてもよい脂肪族環基、又は、-O-、-S-、-N(RN)-若しくは-C(=O)-を組み合わせた基としては、これらの2つ以上の組み合わせからなる2価の連結基だけでなく、同種の基(例えば、芳香環基)を単結合を介して2つ以上組み合わせた2価の連結基であってもよい。
Aromatic ring group which may have a substituent, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent, an aliphatic ring group which may have a substituent, or -O-, -S. The group in which -, -N ( RN )-or -C (= O)-is combined is not only a divalent linking group consisting of two or more of these, but also a group of the same type (for example, an aromatic ring). It may be a divalent linking group in which two or more groups) are combined via a single bond.
本発明においては、熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる点から、Lの両末端が炭素原子であることが好ましい。末端の炭素原子は環状構造の一部でもよい。
また、本発明においては、熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる点から、上記一般式(1)中のLが、置換基を有していてもよい2価の芳香環基、置換基を有していてもよい2価の脂肪族環基、及び、炭素数2以上の分岐を有していてもよいアルキレン基からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を有する2価の有機基であることが好ましく、熱伝導性がより優れるとの理由から置換基を有していてもよい2価の芳香環基を有する2価の有機基がより好ましい。 In the present invention, it is preferable that both ends of L are carbon atoms from the viewpoint that the heat conductive material is more excellent in heat conductivity. The terminal carbon atom may be a part of the cyclic structure.
Further, in the present invention, from the viewpoint that the thermal conductivity of the heat conductive material is more excellent, L in the above general formula (1) may have a divalent aromatic ring group or a substituent which may have a substituent. It is a divalent organic group having at least one selected from the group consisting of a divalent aliphatic ring group which may have and an alkylene group which may have a branch having 2 or more carbon atoms. It is preferable, and a divalent organic group having a divalent aromatic ring group which may have a substituent may be more preferable because the thermal conductivity is more excellent.
また、本発明においては、熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる点から、上記一般式(1)中のLが、置換基を有していてもよい2価の芳香環基、置換基を有していてもよい2価の脂肪族環基、及び、炭素数2以上の分岐を有していてもよいアルキレン基からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を有する2価の有機基であることが好ましく、熱伝導性がより優れるとの理由から置換基を有していてもよい2価の芳香環基を有する2価の有機基がより好ましい。 In the present invention, it is preferable that both ends of L are carbon atoms from the viewpoint that the heat conductive material is more excellent in heat conductivity. The terminal carbon atom may be a part of the cyclic structure.
Further, in the present invention, from the viewpoint that the thermal conductivity of the heat conductive material is more excellent, L in the above general formula (1) may have a divalent aromatic ring group or a substituent which may have a substituent. It is a divalent organic group having at least one selected from the group consisting of a divalent aliphatic ring group which may have and an alkylene group which may have a branch having 2 or more carbon atoms. It is preferable, and a divalent organic group having a divalent aromatic ring group which may have a substituent may be more preferable because the thermal conductivity is more excellent.
一般式(1)中、rは1以上の整数である。
rは1~20の整数であることが好ましく、1~10の整数であることがより好ましい。 In the general formula (1), r is an integer of 1 or more.
r is preferably an integer of 1 to 20, and more preferably an integer of 1 to 10.
rは1~20の整数であることが好ましく、1~10の整数であることがより好ましい。 In the general formula (1), r is an integer of 1 or more.
r is preferably an integer of 1 to 20, and more preferably an integer of 1 to 10.
一般式(1)中、X1~X4は、それぞれ独立に、一般式(2)で表される基を表す。
In the general formula (1), X 1 to X 4 independently represent the groups represented by the general formula (2).
上記一般式(2)中、*は、B1~B4のいずれかとの結合位置を表す。
In the above general formula (2), * represents a bonding position with any of B 1 to B 4.
上記一般式(2)中、D1は、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
上記2価の連結基としては、例えば、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-NRN-、-SO2-、アルキレン基、又は、これらの組み合わせからなる基が挙げられる。-NRN-におけるRNは、水素原子又は置換基を表す。上記アルキレン基は、炭素数1~8の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキレン基が好ましい。
中でも、D1は、「単結合」又は「-O-、-CO-、及び、アルキレン基からなる群から選択される組み合わせからなる基」が好ましく、単結合、*A-アルキレン基-O-CO-*B、*A-CO-O-アルキレン基-*B、*A-O-アルキレン基-O-*B、*A-CO-O-アルキレン基-O-CO-*B、*A-CO-O-アルキレン基-O-*B、又は、*A-O-アルキレン基-O-CO-*Bがより好ましい。
*Aは、A1とは反対側の結合位置であり、*Bは、A1との結合位置である。 In the above general formula (2), D 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Examples of the divalent linking group include -O-, -S-, -CO-, -NR N- , -SO 2- , an alkylene group, or a group composed of a combination thereof. -NR N - in R N represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. The alkylene group is preferably a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
Among them, D 1 is preferably "single bond" or "a group consisting of a combination selected from the group consisting of -O-, -CO-, and an alkylene group", and is preferably a single bond, * A -alkylene group-O-. CO- * B , * A- CO-O-alkylene group-* B , * A- O-alkylene group-O- * B , * A- CO-O-alkylene group-O-CO- * B , * A -CO-O-alkylene group-O- * B or * A- O-alkylene group-O-CO- * B is more preferable.
* A represents a a bond position opposite to the A 1, * B is the bonding position to A 1.
上記2価の連結基としては、例えば、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-NRN-、-SO2-、アルキレン基、又は、これらの組み合わせからなる基が挙げられる。-NRN-におけるRNは、水素原子又は置換基を表す。上記アルキレン基は、炭素数1~8の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキレン基が好ましい。
中でも、D1は、「単結合」又は「-O-、-CO-、及び、アルキレン基からなる群から選択される組み合わせからなる基」が好ましく、単結合、*A-アルキレン基-O-CO-*B、*A-CO-O-アルキレン基-*B、*A-O-アルキレン基-O-*B、*A-CO-O-アルキレン基-O-CO-*B、*A-CO-O-アルキレン基-O-*B、又は、*A-O-アルキレン基-O-CO-*Bがより好ましい。
*Aは、A1とは反対側の結合位置であり、*Bは、A1との結合位置である。 In the above general formula (2), D 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Examples of the divalent linking group include -O-, -S-, -CO-, -NR N- , -SO 2- , an alkylene group, or a group composed of a combination thereof. -NR N - in R N represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. The alkylene group is preferably a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
Among them, D 1 is preferably "single bond" or "a group consisting of a combination selected from the group consisting of -O-, -CO-, and an alkylene group", and is preferably a single bond, * A -alkylene group-O-. CO- * B , * A- CO-O-alkylene group-* B , * A- O-alkylene group-O- * B , * A- CO-O-alkylene group-O-CO- * B , * A -CO-O-alkylene group-O- * B or * A- O-alkylene group-O-CO- * B is more preferable.
* A represents a a bond position opposite to the A 1, * B is the bonding position to A 1.
上記一般式(2)中、A1は、置換基を有していてもよい芳香環基、又は、置換基を有していてもよい脂肪族環基を表す。
なお、A1は、D1、Y1、及び、Qに対して、上記芳香環基又は上記脂肪族環基を構成する原子で結合する。 In the above general formula (2), A 1 represents an aromatic ring group which may have a substituent or an aliphatic ring group which may have a substituent.
In addition, A 1 is bonded to D 1 , Y 1 , and Q with an atom constituting the aromatic ring group or the aliphatic ring group.
なお、A1は、D1、Y1、及び、Qに対して、上記芳香環基又は上記脂肪族環基を構成する原子で結合する。 In the above general formula (2), A 1 represents an aromatic ring group which may have a substituent or an aliphatic ring group which may have a substituent.
In addition, A 1 is bonded to D 1 , Y 1 , and Q with an atom constituting the aromatic ring group or the aliphatic ring group.
A1の一態様である、置換基を有していてもよい芳香環基は、単環式芳香環基でも多環式芳香環基でもよい。
上記単環式芳香環基の員環数は6~10が好ましい。
上記多環式芳香環基を構成する環の数は2~4が好ましく、2がより好ましい。上記多環式芳香環基を構成する環の員環数は、それぞれ独立に、5~10が好ましい。
上記芳香環基は、芳香族炭化水素環基でも芳香族複素環基でもよい。
上記芳香族複素環基が有するヘテロ原子の数は、1~5が好ましい。ヘテロ原子としては、例えば、窒素原子、硫黄原子、酸素原子、セレン原子、テルル原子、リン原子、ケイ素原子、及び、ホウ素原子が挙げられる。中でも、窒素原子、硫黄原子、又は、酸素原子が好ましい。
上記芳香環基としては、例えば、ベンゼン環基、ナフタレン環基、アントラセン環基、ベンゾチアゾール環基、カルバゾール環基、及び、インドール環基等が挙げられる。 Which is one embodiment of the A 1, good aromatic ring which may have a substituent group may be either a monocyclic aromatic ring group polycyclic aromatic ring group.
The number of membered rings of the monocyclic aromatic ring group is preferably 6 to 10.
The number of rings constituting the polycyclic aromatic ring group is preferably 2 to 4, more preferably 2. The number of membered rings of the rings constituting the polycyclic aromatic ring group is preferably 5 to 10 independently.
The aromatic ring group may be an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group or an aromatic heterocyclic group.
The number of heteroatoms contained in the aromatic heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 5. Examples of the hetero atom include a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, an oxygen atom, a selenium atom, a tellurium atom, a phosphorus atom, a silicon atom, and a boron atom. Of these, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, or an oxygen atom is preferable.
Examples of the aromatic ring group include a benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, an anthracene ring group, a benzothiazole ring group, a carbazole ring group, an indole ring group and the like.
上記単環式芳香環基の員環数は6~10が好ましい。
上記多環式芳香環基を構成する環の数は2~4が好ましく、2がより好ましい。上記多環式芳香環基を構成する環の員環数は、それぞれ独立に、5~10が好ましい。
上記芳香環基は、芳香族炭化水素環基でも芳香族複素環基でもよい。
上記芳香族複素環基が有するヘテロ原子の数は、1~5が好ましい。ヘテロ原子としては、例えば、窒素原子、硫黄原子、酸素原子、セレン原子、テルル原子、リン原子、ケイ素原子、及び、ホウ素原子が挙げられる。中でも、窒素原子、硫黄原子、又は、酸素原子が好ましい。
上記芳香環基としては、例えば、ベンゼン環基、ナフタレン環基、アントラセン環基、ベンゾチアゾール環基、カルバゾール環基、及び、インドール環基等が挙げられる。 Which is one embodiment of the A 1, good aromatic ring which may have a substituent group may be either a monocyclic aromatic ring group polycyclic aromatic ring group.
The number of membered rings of the monocyclic aromatic ring group is preferably 6 to 10.
The number of rings constituting the polycyclic aromatic ring group is preferably 2 to 4, more preferably 2. The number of membered rings of the rings constituting the polycyclic aromatic ring group is preferably 5 to 10 independently.
The aromatic ring group may be an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group or an aromatic heterocyclic group.
The number of heteroatoms contained in the aromatic heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 5. Examples of the hetero atom include a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, an oxygen atom, a selenium atom, a tellurium atom, a phosphorus atom, a silicon atom, and a boron atom. Of these, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, or an oxygen atom is preferable.
Examples of the aromatic ring group include a benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, an anthracene ring group, a benzothiazole ring group, a carbazole ring group, an indole ring group and the like.
A1の一態様である、置換基を有していてもよい脂肪族環基は、単環でも、多環でもよい。
上記単環の脂肪族環基の員環数は6~10が好ましい。
上記多環の脂肪族環基を構成する環の数は2~4が好ましく、2がより好ましい。上記多環のシクロアルカン環基を構成する環の員環数は、それぞれ独立に、5~10が好ましい。
上記脂肪族環基の、環員原子である炭素原子の数は6以上が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。上記環員原子である炭素原子の数とは、脂肪族環を構成する環員原子である炭素原子の数を意図する。
上記脂肪族環基としては、例えば、シクロヘキサン環基、シクロヘプタン環基、ノルボルナン環基、及び、アダマンタン環基が挙げられる。 Which is one embodiment of the A 1, an aliphatic ring group which may have a substituent, may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
The number of membered rings of the monocyclic aliphatic ring group is preferably 6 to 10.
The number of rings constituting the polycyclic aliphatic ring group is preferably 2 to 4, more preferably 2. The number of membered rings of the rings constituting the polycyclic cycloalkane ring group is preferably 5 to 10 independently.
The number of carbon atoms as ring member atoms in the aliphatic ring group is preferably 6 or more, more preferably 6 to 12. The number of carbon atoms which are ring-membered atoms is intended to be the number of carbon atoms which are ring-membered atoms constituting the aliphatic ring.
Examples of the aliphatic ring group include a cyclohexane ring group, a cycloheptane ring group, a norbornane ring group, and an adamantane ring group.
上記単環の脂肪族環基の員環数は6~10が好ましい。
上記多環の脂肪族環基を構成する環の数は2~4が好ましく、2がより好ましい。上記多環のシクロアルカン環基を構成する環の員環数は、それぞれ独立に、5~10が好ましい。
上記脂肪族環基の、環員原子である炭素原子の数は6以上が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。上記環員原子である炭素原子の数とは、脂肪族環を構成する環員原子である炭素原子の数を意図する。
上記脂肪族環基としては、例えば、シクロヘキサン環基、シクロヘプタン環基、ノルボルナン環基、及び、アダマンタン環基が挙げられる。 Which is one embodiment of the A 1, an aliphatic ring group which may have a substituent, may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
The number of membered rings of the monocyclic aliphatic ring group is preferably 6 to 10.
The number of rings constituting the polycyclic aliphatic ring group is preferably 2 to 4, more preferably 2. The number of membered rings of the rings constituting the polycyclic cycloalkane ring group is preferably 5 to 10 independently.
The number of carbon atoms as ring member atoms in the aliphatic ring group is preferably 6 or more, more preferably 6 to 12. The number of carbon atoms which are ring-membered atoms is intended to be the number of carbon atoms which are ring-membered atoms constituting the aliphatic ring.
Examples of the aliphatic ring group include a cyclohexane ring group, a cycloheptane ring group, a norbornane ring group, and an adamantane ring group.
上記一般式(2)中、Q及びY1は、それぞれ独立に、水酸基(-OH)、エポキシ基を有する1価の基、アミノ基、チオール基(-SH)、カルボン酸基(-COOH)、イソシアネート基(-NCO)、及び、オキセタニル基を有する1価の基からなる群から選択される特定官能基を表す。
つまり、一般式(2)で表される基は、少なくとも1個の特定官能基を有する基である。ここで、一般式(2)で表される基が「特定官能基を有する基である」とは、一般式(2)で表される基が一部分として特定官能基を含む基であってもよく、一般式(2)で表される基が特定官能基そのものであってもよい。 In the above general formula (2), Q and Y 1 are independently a hydroxyl group (-OH), a monovalent group having an epoxy group, an amino group, a thiol group (-SH), and a carboxylic acid group (-COOH). Represents a specific functional group selected from the group consisting of a monovalent group having an isocyanate group (-NCO) and an oxetanyl group.
That is, the group represented by the general formula (2) is a group having at least one specific functional group. Here, the group represented by the general formula (2) is "a group having a specific functional group" even if the group represented by the general formula (2) is a group containing a specific functional group as a part. Often, the group represented by the general formula (2) may be the specific functional group itself.
つまり、一般式(2)で表される基は、少なくとも1個の特定官能基を有する基である。ここで、一般式(2)で表される基が「特定官能基を有する基である」とは、一般式(2)で表される基が一部分として特定官能基を含む基であってもよく、一般式(2)で表される基が特定官能基そのものであってもよい。 In the above general formula (2), Q and Y 1 are independently a hydroxyl group (-OH), a monovalent group having an epoxy group, an amino group, a thiol group (-SH), and a carboxylic acid group (-COOH). Represents a specific functional group selected from the group consisting of a monovalent group having an isocyanate group (-NCO) and an oxetanyl group.
That is, the group represented by the general formula (2) is a group having at least one specific functional group. Here, the group represented by the general formula (2) is "a group having a specific functional group" even if the group represented by the general formula (2) is a group containing a specific functional group as a part. Often, the group represented by the general formula (2) may be the specific functional group itself.
上記特定官能基としての、エポキシ基を有する1価の基は、例えば、「-Leo-エポキシ基」で表される基が好ましい。Leoは、単結合又は2価の連結基であり、酸素原子、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~6の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキレン基)、又は、これらの組み合わせからなる基が好ましい。
中でも、上記エポキシ基を有する1価の基は、「-O-アルキレン基-エポキシ基」が好ましい。
なお、エポキシ基が有していてもよい置換基としては、炭素数1~6の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基が好ましい。 As the monovalent group having an epoxy group as the specific functional group, for example, a group represented by "-Leo -epoxy group" is preferable. Leo is a single bond or divalent linking group, and an oxygen atom, an alkylene group (preferably a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), or a group composed of a combination thereof. preferable.
Among them, the monovalent group having the epoxy group is preferably "-O-alkylene group-epoxy group".
As the substituent that the epoxy group may have, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is preferable.
中でも、上記エポキシ基を有する1価の基は、「-O-アルキレン基-エポキシ基」が好ましい。
なお、エポキシ基が有していてもよい置換基としては、炭素数1~6の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基が好ましい。 As the monovalent group having an epoxy group as the specific functional group, for example, a group represented by "-Leo -epoxy group" is preferable. Leo is a single bond or divalent linking group, and an oxygen atom, an alkylene group (preferably a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), or a group composed of a combination thereof. preferable.
Among them, the monovalent group having the epoxy group is preferably "-O-alkylene group-epoxy group".
As the substituent that the epoxy group may have, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is preferable.
上記特定官能基としての、アミノ基としては特に限定されず、1級、2級、及び、3級のいずれであってもよい。例えば、-N(RE)2(REは、それぞれ独立して、水素原子又はアルキル基(直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい))が挙げられる。アルキル基中の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~3が更に好ましい。なお、アルキル基は、更に置換基を有していてもよい。
The amino group as the specific functional group is not particularly limited, and may be any of primary, secondary, and tertiary. For example, -N ( RE ) 2 ( RE may be a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group (which may be linear or branched) independently of each other). The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 3. The alkyl group may further have a substituent.
上記特定官能基としての、オキセタニル基を有する1価の基は、例えば、「-Leo-オキセタニル基」で表される基が好ましい。Leoは、単結合又は2価の連結基であり、酸素原子、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~6の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキレン基)、又は、これらの組み合わせからなる基が好ましい。
中でも、上記オキセタニル基を有する1価の基は、「-O-アルキレン基-オキセタニル基」が好ましい。
なお、オキセタニル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、炭素数1~6の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基が好ましい。 As the specific functional group, monovalent group having an oxetanyl group is, for example, groups represented by "- - L eo oxetanyl group" are preferred. Leo is a single bond or divalent linking group, and an oxygen atom, an alkylene group (preferably a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), or a group composed of a combination thereof. preferable.
Among them, the monovalent group having an oxetanyl group is preferably "-O-alkylene group-oxetanyl group".
As the substituent that the oxetanyl group may have, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is preferable.
中でも、上記オキセタニル基を有する1価の基は、「-O-アルキレン基-オキセタニル基」が好ましい。
なお、オキセタニル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、炭素数1~6の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基が好ましい。 As the specific functional group, monovalent group having an oxetanyl group is, for example, groups represented by "- - L eo oxetanyl group" are preferred. Leo is a single bond or divalent linking group, and an oxygen atom, an alkylene group (preferably a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), or a group composed of a combination thereof. preferable.
Among them, the monovalent group having an oxetanyl group is preferably "-O-alkylene group-oxetanyl group".
As the substituent that the oxetanyl group may have, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is preferable.
中でも、特定官能基は、水酸基、又は、エポキシ基を有する1価の基が好ましい。
Among them, the specific functional group is preferably a monovalent group having a hydroxyl group or an epoxy group.
上記一般式(2)中、pは、0以上の整数を表す。
中でも、pは、0~5が好ましく、0~1がより好ましい。
pが0である場合、Y1は、B1~B4のいずれかと直接結合する。つまり、X1~X4は、特定官能基そのものであってもよい。 In the above general formula (2), p represents an integer of 0 or more.
Among them, p is preferably 0 to 5, more preferably 0 to 1.
When p is 0, Y 1 binds directly to any of B 1 to B 4. That is, X 1 to X 4 may be the specific functional group itself.
中でも、pは、0~5が好ましく、0~1がより好ましい。
pが0である場合、Y1は、B1~B4のいずれかと直接結合する。つまり、X1~X4は、特定官能基そのものであってもよい。 In the above general formula (2), p represents an integer of 0 or more.
Among them, p is preferably 0 to 5, more preferably 0 to 1.
When p is 0, Y 1 binds directly to any of B 1 to B 4. That is, X 1 to X 4 may be the specific functional group itself.
上記一般式(2)中、qは、0~2の整数を表す。
中でも、qは、0~1が好ましい。 In the above general formula (2), q represents an integer of 0 to 2.
Among them, q is preferably 0 to 1.
中でも、qは、0~1が好ましい。 In the above general formula (2), q represents an integer of 0 to 2.
Among them, q is preferably 0 to 1.
なお、特定化合物中に、一般式(2)で表される基が複数存在する場合、複数の一般式(2)で表される基は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
例えば、一般式(2)中、D1が複数存在する場合、複数存在するD1は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。A1が複数存在する場合、複数存在するA1は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。Qが複数存在する場合、複数存在するQは、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 When a plurality of groups represented by the general formula (2) are present in the specific compound, the groups represented by the plurality of general formulas (2) may be the same or different.
For example, in the general formula (2), if D 1 there are a plurality, D 1 there are a plurality, they may each be the same or different. If the A 1 there are plural, A 1 there are a plurality, they may each be the same or different. When there are a plurality of Qs, the plurality of Qs may be the same or different.
例えば、一般式(2)中、D1が複数存在する場合、複数存在するD1は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。A1が複数存在する場合、複数存在するA1は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。Qが複数存在する場合、複数存在するQは、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 When a plurality of groups represented by the general formula (2) are present in the specific compound, the groups represented by the plurality of general formulas (2) may be the same or different.
For example, in the general formula (2), if D 1 there are a plurality, D 1 there are a plurality, they may each be the same or different. If the A 1 there are plural, A 1 there are a plurality, they may each be the same or different. When there are a plurality of Qs, the plurality of Qs may be the same or different.
特定化合物は一般式(2)で表される基を1種単独で有していてもよく、2種以上有していてもよい。
中でも、特定化合物は、「特定官能基として水酸基のみを有する化合物」、又は「特定官能基としてエポキシ基を有する1価の基のみを有する化合物」であるのが好ましい。 The specific compound may have one group represented by the general formula (2) alone, or may have two or more groups.
Among them, the specific compound is preferably "a compound having only a hydroxyl group as a specific functional group" or "a compound having only a monovalent group having an epoxy group as a specific functional group".
中でも、特定化合物は、「特定官能基として水酸基のみを有する化合物」、又は「特定官能基としてエポキシ基を有する1価の基のみを有する化合物」であるのが好ましい。 The specific compound may have one group represented by the general formula (2) alone, or may have two or more groups.
Among them, the specific compound is preferably "a compound having only a hydroxyl group as a specific functional group" or "a compound having only a monovalent group having an epoxy group as a specific functional group".
本発明においては、耐水性が向上するとの理由から、一般式(1)で表される化合物のハンセン溶解度パラメーター(以下、「HSP」とも略す。)値が28MPa0.5以下であることが好ましく、26MPa0.5以下であることがより好ましい。特定化合物のHSP値の下限は制限されず、例えば、10MPa0.5以上が好ましい。
特定化合物のHSP値は、下記式から計算した値を採用する。
HSP値=(HSPd 2+HSPp 2+HSPh 2)0.5
HSPd、HSPp、HSPhは、それぞれ、HSP値の分散項、極性項、水素結合項を表わす(単位はそれぞれMPa0.5)
HSPd、HSPp、HSPhは、HSPiP(Hansen Solubility Paramet In the present invention, the Hansen solubility parameter (hereinafter, also abbreviated as "HSP") value of the compound represented by the general formula (1) is preferably 28 MPa 0.5 or less because the water resistance is improved. , 26 MPa 0.5 or less is more preferable. The lower limit of the HSP value of the specific compound is not limited, and for example, 10 MPa 0.5 or more is preferable.
As the HSP value of the specific compound, the value calculated from the following formula is adopted.
HSP value = (HSP d 2 + HSP p 2 + HSP h 2 ) 0.5
HSP d , HSP p , and HSP h represent the dispersion term, polarity term, and hydrogen bond term of HSP values, respectively (units are MPa 0.5 ).
HSP d , HSP p , HSP h are HSPiP (Hansen Solubility Parameter)
特定化合物のHSP値は、下記式から計算した値を採用する。
HSP値=(HSPd 2+HSPp 2+HSPh 2)0.5
HSPd、HSPp、HSPhは、それぞれ、HSP値の分散項、極性項、水素結合項を表わす(単位はそれぞれMPa0.5)
HSPd、HSPp、HSPhは、HSPiP(Hansen Solubility Paramet In the present invention, the Hansen solubility parameter (hereinafter, also abbreviated as "HSP") value of the compound represented by the general formula (1) is preferably 28 MPa 0.5 or less because the water resistance is improved. , 26 MPa 0.5 or less is more preferable. The lower limit of the HSP value of the specific compound is not limited, and for example, 10 MPa 0.5 or more is preferable.
As the HSP value of the specific compound, the value calculated from the following formula is adopted.
HSP value = (HSP d 2 + HSP p 2 + HSP h 2 ) 0.5
HSP d , HSP p , and HSP h represent the dispersion term, polarity term, and hydrogen bond term of HSP values, respectively (units are MPa 0.5 ).
HSP d , HSP p , HSP h are HSPiP (Hansen Solubility Parameter)
本発明の熱伝導材料形成用組成物において、熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる点から、特定化合物の含有量は組成物の全固形分に対して、3~40質量%が好ましく、8~25質量%がより好ましい。
In the composition for forming a heat conductive material of the present invention, the content of the specific compound is preferably 3 to 40% by mass, preferably 3 to 40% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition, from the viewpoint that the heat conductivity of the heat conductive material is more excellent. More preferably, it is ~ 25% by mass.
また、本発明の組成物中、特定化合物の含有量は、無機粒子の質量に対して、4~60質量%が好ましく、10~35質量%がより好ましく、12~30質量%が更に好ましい。
特定化合物は1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。 Further, in the composition of the present invention, the content of the specific compound is preferably 4 to 60% by mass, more preferably 10 to 35% by mass, still more preferably 12 to 30% by mass, based on the mass of the inorganic particles.
The specific compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
特定化合物は1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。 Further, in the composition of the present invention, the content of the specific compound is preferably 4 to 60% by mass, more preferably 10 to 35% by mass, still more preferably 12 to 30% by mass, based on the mass of the inorganic particles.
The specific compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
〔フェノール化合物〕
本発明の組成物は、更に、フェノール化合物を含んでもよい。
なお、フェノール化合物は、特定化合物以外の化合物である。例えば、特定化合物がフェノール性水酸基を有する場合でも、特定化合物は、フェノール化合物には該当しない。
得られる熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる点から、フェノール化合物としては、一般式(P1)で表される化合物、又は、一般式(P2)で表される化合物からなる群から選択される1種以上であるのが好ましい。 [Phenol compound]
The composition of the present invention may further contain a phenolic compound.
The phenol compound is a compound other than the specific compound. For example, even when the specific compound has a phenolic hydroxyl group, the specific compound does not correspond to the phenol compound.
The phenolic compound is selected from the group consisting of the compound represented by the general formula (P1) or the compound represented by the general formula (P2) because the obtained heat conductive material has more excellent thermal conductivity. It is preferably one or more.
本発明の組成物は、更に、フェノール化合物を含んでもよい。
なお、フェノール化合物は、特定化合物以外の化合物である。例えば、特定化合物がフェノール性水酸基を有する場合でも、特定化合物は、フェノール化合物には該当しない。
得られる熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる点から、フェノール化合物としては、一般式(P1)で表される化合物、又は、一般式(P2)で表される化合物からなる群から選択される1種以上であるのが好ましい。 [Phenol compound]
The composition of the present invention may further contain a phenolic compound.
The phenol compound is a compound other than the specific compound. For example, even when the specific compound has a phenolic hydroxyl group, the specific compound does not correspond to the phenol compound.
The phenolic compound is selected from the group consisting of the compound represented by the general formula (P1) or the compound represented by the general formula (P2) because the obtained heat conductive material has more excellent thermal conductivity. It is preferably one or more.
<一般式(P1)で表される化合物>
一般式(P1)を以下に示す。 <Compound represented by the general formula (P1)>
The general formula (P1) is shown below.
一般式(P1)を以下に示す。 <Compound represented by the general formula (P1)>
The general formula (P1) is shown below.
一般式(P1)中、m1は0以上の整数を表す。
m1は、0~10が好ましく、0~3がより好ましく、0又は1が更に好ましく、1が特に好ましい。 In the general formula (P1), m1 represents an integer of 0 or more.
m1 is preferably 0 to 10, more preferably 0 to 3, still more preferably 0 or 1, and particularly preferably 1.
m1は、0~10が好ましく、0~3がより好ましく、0又は1が更に好ましく、1が特に好ましい。 In the general formula (P1), m1 represents an integer of 0 or more.
m1 is preferably 0 to 10, more preferably 0 to 3, still more preferably 0 or 1, and particularly preferably 1.
一般式(P1)中、na及びncは、それぞれ独立に、1以上の整数を表す。
na及びncは、それぞれ独立に、1~4が好ましい。 In the general formula (P1), na and nc each independently represent an integer of 1 or more.
Na and nc are preferably 1 to 4 independently of each other.
na及びncは、それぞれ独立に、1~4が好ましい。 In the general formula (P1), na and nc each independently represent an integer of 1 or more.
Na and nc are preferably 1 to 4 independently of each other.
一般式(P1)中、R1及びR6は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、カルボン酸基、ボロン酸基、アルデヒド基、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、又は、アルコキシカルボニル基を表す。
上記アルキル基は、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。上記アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましい。上記アルキル基は、置換基を有していても有していなくてもよい。
上記アルコキシ基におけるアルキル基部分、及び、上記アルコキシカルボニル基におけるアルキル基部分は、上記アルキル基と同様である。
R1及びR6は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又はハロゲン原子が好ましく、水素原子又は塩素原子がより好ましく、水素原子が更に好ましい。 In the general formula (P1), R 1 and R 6 independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a carboxylic acid group, a boronic acid group, an aldehyde group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
The alkyl group may be linear or branched. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may or may not have a substituent.
The alkyl group portion of the alkoxy group and the alkyl group portion of the alkoxycarbonyl group are the same as those of the alkyl group.
Independently, R 1 and R 6 are preferably a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, more preferably a hydrogen atom or a chlorine atom, and even more preferably a hydrogen atom.
上記アルキル基は、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。上記アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましい。上記アルキル基は、置換基を有していても有していなくてもよい。
上記アルコキシ基におけるアルキル基部分、及び、上記アルコキシカルボニル基におけるアルキル基部分は、上記アルキル基と同様である。
R1及びR6は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又はハロゲン原子が好ましく、水素原子又は塩素原子がより好ましく、水素原子が更に好ましい。 In the general formula (P1), R 1 and R 6 independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a carboxylic acid group, a boronic acid group, an aldehyde group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
The alkyl group may be linear or branched. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may or may not have a substituent.
The alkyl group portion of the alkoxy group and the alkyl group portion of the alkoxycarbonyl group are the same as those of the alkyl group.
Independently, R 1 and R 6 are preferably a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, more preferably a hydrogen atom or a chlorine atom, and even more preferably a hydrogen atom.
一般式(P1)中、R7は、水素原子又は水酸基を表す。
R7が複数存在する場合、複数存在するR7は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
R7が複数存在する場合、複数存在するR7のうち、少なくとも1個のR7が水酸基を表すのも好ましい。 In the general formula (P1), R 7 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydroxyl group.
If R 7 there is a plurality, R 7 where there are a plurality, may each be the same or different.
If R 7 there are a plurality of R 7 there are a plurality, also preferably at least one R 7 is a hydroxyl group.
R7が複数存在する場合、複数存在するR7は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
R7が複数存在する場合、複数存在するR7のうち、少なくとも1個のR7が水酸基を表すのも好ましい。 In the general formula (P1), R 7 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydroxyl group.
If R 7 there is a plurality, R 7 where there are a plurality, may each be the same or different.
If R 7 there are a plurality of R 7 there are a plurality, also preferably at least one R 7 is a hydroxyl group.
一般式(P1)中、Lx1は、単結合、-C(R2)(R3)-、又は、-CO-を表し、-C(R2)(R3)-又は-CO-が好ましい。
Lx2は、単結合、-C(R4)(R5)-、又は、-CO-を表し、-C(R4)(R5)-、又は、-CO-が好ましい。
R2~R5は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換基を表す。
上記置換基は、それぞれ独立に、水酸基、フェニル基、ハロゲン原子、カルボン酸基、ボロン酸基、アルデヒド基、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、又は、アルコキシカルボニル基が好ましく、水酸基、ハロゲン原子、カルボン酸基、ボロン酸基、アルデヒド基、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、又は、アルコキシカルボニル基がより好ましい。
上記アルキル基は、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。上記アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましい。上記アルキル基は、置換基を有していても有していなくてもよい。
上記アルコキシ基におけるアルキル基部分、及び、上記アルコキシカルボニル基におけるアルキル基部分は、上記アルキル基と同様である。
上記フェニル基は、置換基を有していても有していなくてもよく、置換基を有する場合は1~3個の水酸基を有するのがより好ましい。
R2~R5は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は水酸基が好ましく、水素原子がより好ましい。
Lx1及びLx2は、それぞれ独立に、-CH2-、-CH(OH)-、-CO-、又は、
-CH(Ph)-が好ましい。
上記Phは置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基を表す。
なお、一般式(P1)中に、R4が複数存在する場合、複数存在するR4は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。R5が複数存在する場合、複数存在するR5は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the general formula (P1), L x1 represents a single bond, -C (R 2 ) (R 3 )-or-CO-, and -C (R 2 ) (R 3 )-or -CO- preferable.
L x2 represents a single bond, -C (R 4 ) (R 5 )-or-CO-, and -C (R 4 ) (R 5 )-or-CO- is preferable.
R 2 ~ R 5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
The above-mentioned substituents are preferably a hydroxyl group, a phenyl group, a halogen atom, a carboxylic acid group, a boronic acid group, an aldehyde group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group, and preferably a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, or a carboxylic acid group. , Boronic acid group, aldehyde group, alkyl group, alkoxy group, or alkoxycarbonyl group are more preferable.
The alkyl group may be linear or branched. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may or may not have a substituent.
The alkyl group portion of the alkoxy group and the alkyl group portion of the alkoxycarbonyl group are the same as those of the alkyl group.
The phenyl group may or may not have a substituent, and when it has a substituent, it more preferably has 1 to 3 hydroxyl groups.
Independently, R 2 to R 5 are preferably a hydrogen atom or a hydroxyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom.
L x1 and L x2 are independently -CH 2- , -CH (OH)-, -CO-, or, respectively.
-CH (Ph)-is preferable.
The Ph represents a phenyl group which may have a substituent.
Incidentally, in the general formula (P1), if R 4 there are a plurality, R 4 there are a plurality may each be the same or different. If R 5 there are a plurality, the plurality of R 5 may each be the same or different.
Lx2は、単結合、-C(R4)(R5)-、又は、-CO-を表し、-C(R4)(R5)-、又は、-CO-が好ましい。
R2~R5は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換基を表す。
上記置換基は、それぞれ独立に、水酸基、フェニル基、ハロゲン原子、カルボン酸基、ボロン酸基、アルデヒド基、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、又は、アルコキシカルボニル基が好ましく、水酸基、ハロゲン原子、カルボン酸基、ボロン酸基、アルデヒド基、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、又は、アルコキシカルボニル基がより好ましい。
上記アルキル基は、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。上記アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましい。上記アルキル基は、置換基を有していても有していなくてもよい。
上記アルコキシ基におけるアルキル基部分、及び、上記アルコキシカルボニル基におけるアルキル基部分は、上記アルキル基と同様である。
上記フェニル基は、置換基を有していても有していなくてもよく、置換基を有する場合は1~3個の水酸基を有するのがより好ましい。
R2~R5は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は水酸基が好ましく、水素原子がより好ましい。
Lx1及びLx2は、それぞれ独立に、-CH2-、-CH(OH)-、-CO-、又は、
-CH(Ph)-が好ましい。
上記Phは置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基を表す。
なお、一般式(P1)中に、R4が複数存在する場合、複数存在するR4は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。R5が複数存在する場合、複数存在するR5は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the general formula (P1), L x1 represents a single bond, -C (R 2 ) (R 3 )-or-CO-, and -C (R 2 ) (R 3 )-or -CO- preferable.
L x2 represents a single bond, -C (R 4 ) (R 5 )-or-CO-, and -C (R 4 ) (R 5 )-or-CO- is preferable.
R 2 ~ R 5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
The above-mentioned substituents are preferably a hydroxyl group, a phenyl group, a halogen atom, a carboxylic acid group, a boronic acid group, an aldehyde group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group, and preferably a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, or a carboxylic acid group. , Boronic acid group, aldehyde group, alkyl group, alkoxy group, or alkoxycarbonyl group are more preferable.
The alkyl group may be linear or branched. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may or may not have a substituent.
The alkyl group portion of the alkoxy group and the alkyl group portion of the alkoxycarbonyl group are the same as those of the alkyl group.
The phenyl group may or may not have a substituent, and when it has a substituent, it more preferably has 1 to 3 hydroxyl groups.
Independently, R 2 to R 5 are preferably a hydrogen atom or a hydroxyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom.
L x1 and L x2 are independently -CH 2- , -CH (OH)-, -CO-, or, respectively.
-CH (Ph)-is preferable.
The Ph represents a phenyl group which may have a substituent.
Incidentally, in the general formula (P1), if R 4 there are a plurality, R 4 there are a plurality may each be the same or different. If R 5 there are a plurality, the plurality of R 5 may each be the same or different.
一般式(P1)中、Ar1及びAr2は、それぞれ独立に、ベンゼン環基又はナフタレン環基を表す。
Ar1及びAr2は、それぞれ独立に、ベンゼン環基が好ましい。 In the general formula (P1), Ar 1 and Ar 2 independently represent a benzene ring group or a naphthalene ring group, respectively.
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are preferably benzene ring groups independently of each other.
Ar1及びAr2は、それぞれ独立に、ベンゼン環基が好ましい。 In the general formula (P1), Ar 1 and Ar 2 independently represent a benzene ring group or a naphthalene ring group, respectively.
Ar 1 and Ar 2 are preferably benzene ring groups independently of each other.
一般式(P1)中、Qaは、水素原子、アルキル基、フェニル基、ハロゲン原子、カルボン酸基、ボロン酸基、アルデヒド基、アルコキシ基、又は、アルコキシカルボニル基を表す。
上記アルキル基は、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。上記アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましい。上記アルキル基は、置換基を有していても有していなくてもよい。
上記アルコキシ基におけるアルキル基部分、及び、上記アルコキシカルボニル基におけるアルキル基部分は、上記アルキル基と同様である。
上記フェニル基は、置換基を有していても有していなくてもよい。
Qaは、Qaが結合するベンゼン環基が有していてもよい水酸基に対して、パラ位に結合するのが好ましい。
Qaは、水素原子又はアルキル基が好ましい。上記アルキル基はメチル基が好ましい。 In the general formula (P1), Q a is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a phenyl group, a halogen atom, a carboxylic acid group, a boronic acid group, aldehyde group, alkoxy group or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
The alkyl group may be linear or branched. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may or may not have a substituent.
The alkyl group portion of the alkoxy group and the alkyl group portion of the alkoxycarbonyl group are the same as those of the alkyl group.
The phenyl group may or may not have a substituent.
Q a is preferably bonded to the para position with respect to the hydroxyl group that the benzene ring group to which Q a is bonded may have.
Q a is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. The alkyl group is preferably a methyl group.
上記アルキル基は、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。上記アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましい。上記アルキル基は、置換基を有していても有していなくてもよい。
上記アルコキシ基におけるアルキル基部分、及び、上記アルコキシカルボニル基におけるアルキル基部分は、上記アルキル基と同様である。
上記フェニル基は、置換基を有していても有していなくてもよい。
Qaは、Qaが結合するベンゼン環基が有していてもよい水酸基に対して、パラ位に結合するのが好ましい。
Qaは、水素原子又はアルキル基が好ましい。上記アルキル基はメチル基が好ましい。 In the general formula (P1), Q a is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a phenyl group, a halogen atom, a carboxylic acid group, a boronic acid group, aldehyde group, alkoxy group or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
The alkyl group may be linear or branched. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may or may not have a substituent.
The alkyl group portion of the alkoxy group and the alkyl group portion of the alkoxycarbonyl group are the same as those of the alkyl group.
The phenyl group may or may not have a substituent.
Q a is preferably bonded to the para position with respect to the hydroxyl group that the benzene ring group to which Q a is bonded may have.
Q a is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. The alkyl group is preferably a methyl group.
なお、一般式(P1)中にR7、Lx2、及び/又は、Qaが複数存在する場合、複数存在するR7、Lx2、及び/又は、Qaは、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
When there are a plurality of R 7 , L x 2 , and / or Q a in the general formula (P1), the plurality of R 7 , L x 2 , and / or Q a are the same but different. May be good.
<一般式(P2)で表される化合物>
一般式(P2)を以下に示す。 <Compound represented by the general formula (P2)>
The general formula (P2) is shown below.
一般式(P2)を以下に示す。 <Compound represented by the general formula (P2)>
The general formula (P2) is shown below.
一般式(P2)中、m2は0以上の整数を表す。
m2は、0~10が好ましく、0~4がより好ましい。 In the general formula (P2), m2 represents an integer of 0 or more.
The m2 is preferably 0 to 10, more preferably 0 to 4.
m2は、0~10が好ましく、0~4がより好ましい。 In the general formula (P2), m2 represents an integer of 0 or more.
The m2 is preferably 0 to 10, more preferably 0 to 4.
一般式(P2)中、nxは、0~4の整数を表す。
nxは、1~2が好ましく、2がより好ましい。 In the general formula (P2), nx represents an integer of 0 to 4.
nx is preferably 1 to 2, and more preferably 2.
nxは、1~2が好ましく、2がより好ましい。 In the general formula (P2), nx represents an integer of 0 to 4.
nx is preferably 1 to 2, and more preferably 2.
一般式(P2)中、nyは、0~2の整数を表す。
nyが複数存在する場合、複数存在するnyは、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
複数存在してもよいnyのうち、少なくとも1個のnyは1を表すのが好ましい。例えば、m2が1を表す場合、1個存在するnyが1を表すのが好ましい。m2が4を表す場合、4個存在するnyの少なくとも1個のnyが1を表すのが好ましく、2個のnyが1を表すのがより好ましい。 In the general formula (P2), ny represents an integer of 0 to 2.
When there are a plurality of ny, the ny existing may be the same or different.
Of the nys that may exist in plurality, at least one ny preferably represents 1. For example, when m2 represents 1, it is preferable that one existing ny represents 1. When m2 represents 4, it is preferable that at least one ny of four existing ny represents 1, and more preferably two ny represent 1.
nyが複数存在する場合、複数存在するnyは、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
複数存在してもよいnyのうち、少なくとも1個のnyは1を表すのが好ましい。例えば、m2が1を表す場合、1個存在するnyが1を表すのが好ましい。m2が4を表す場合、4個存在するnyの少なくとも1個のnyが1を表すのが好ましく、2個のnyが1を表すのがより好ましい。 In the general formula (P2), ny represents an integer of 0 to 2.
When there are a plurality of ny, the ny existing may be the same or different.
Of the nys that may exist in plurality, at least one ny preferably represents 1. For example, when m2 represents 1, it is preferable that one existing ny represents 1. When m2 represents 4, it is preferable that at least one ny of four existing ny represents 1, and more preferably two ny represent 1.
一般式(P2)中、nzは、0~2の整数を表す。
nzは、1が好ましい。 In the general formula (P2), nz represents an integer of 0 to 2.
The nz is preferably 1.
nzは、1が好ましい。 In the general formula (P2), nz represents an integer of 0 to 2.
The nz is preferably 1.
一般式(P2)中で、nxと、複数存在し得るnyと、nzとの合計数は、2以上が好ましく、2~10がより好ましい。
In the general formula (P2), the total number of nx, ny that may exist in a plurality of ny, and nz is preferably 2 or more, and more preferably 2 to 10.
一般式(P2)中、R1及びR6は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、カルボン酸基、ボロン酸基、アルデヒド基、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、又は、アルコキシカルボニル基を表す。
一般式(P2)中のR1及びR6は、一般式(1)中のR1及びR6とそれぞれ同様である。
R1が複数存在する場合、複数存在するR1は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。R6が複数存在する場合、複数存在するR6は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the general formula (P2), R 1 and R 6 independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a carboxylic acid group, a boronic acid group, an aldehyde group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
R 1 and R 6 in the general formula (P2) is the general formula (1) and R 1 and R 6 in the same respectively.
If R 1 there are a plurality, R 1 existing in plural numbers may each be the same or different. If R 6 there are a plurality, R 6 existing in plural numbers may each be the same or different.
一般式(P2)中のR1及びR6は、一般式(1)中のR1及びR6とそれぞれ同様である。
R1が複数存在する場合、複数存在するR1は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。R6が複数存在する場合、複数存在するR6は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the general formula (P2), R 1 and R 6 independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a carboxylic acid group, a boronic acid group, an aldehyde group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
R 1 and R 6 in the general formula (P2) is the general formula (1) and R 1 and R 6 in the same respectively.
If R 1 there are a plurality, R 1 existing in plural numbers may each be the same or different. If R 6 there are a plurality, R 6 existing in plural numbers may each be the same or different.
一般式(P2)中、Qbは、水素原子、アルキル基、フェニル基、ハロゲン原子、カルボン酸基、ボロン酸基、アルデヒド基、アルコキシ基、又は、アルコキシカルボニル基を表す。
上記アルキル基は、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。上記アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましい。上記アルキル基は、置換基を有していても有していなくてもよい。
上記アルコキシ基におけるアルキル基部分、及び、上記アルコキシカルボニル基におけるアルキル基部分は、上記アルキル基と同様である。
上記フェニル基は、置換基を有していても有していなくてもよい。
Qbは、水素原子が好ましい。
Qbが複数存在する場合、複数存在するQbは、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the general formula (P2), Q b represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a phenyl group, a halogen atom, a carboxylic acid group, a boronic acid group, an aldehyde group, an alkoxy group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
The alkyl group may be linear or branched. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may or may not have a substituent.
The alkyl group portion of the alkoxy group and the alkyl group portion of the alkoxycarbonyl group are the same as those of the alkyl group.
The phenyl group may or may not have a substituent.
Q b is preferably a hydrogen atom.
When there are a plurality of Q bs , the plurality of Q bs may be the same or different.
上記アルキル基は、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。上記アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましい。上記アルキル基は、置換基を有していても有していなくてもよい。
上記アルコキシ基におけるアルキル基部分、及び、上記アルコキシカルボニル基におけるアルキル基部分は、上記アルキル基と同様である。
上記フェニル基は、置換基を有していても有していなくてもよい。
Qbは、水素原子が好ましい。
Qbが複数存在する場合、複数存在するQbは、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the general formula (P2), Q b represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a phenyl group, a halogen atom, a carboxylic acid group, a boronic acid group, an aldehyde group, an alkoxy group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
The alkyl group may be linear or branched. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may or may not have a substituent.
The alkyl group portion of the alkoxy group and the alkyl group portion of the alkoxycarbonyl group are the same as those of the alkyl group.
The phenyl group may or may not have a substituent.
Q b is preferably a hydrogen atom.
When there are a plurality of Q bs , the plurality of Q bs may be the same or different.
一般式(P2)で表される化合物の具体例としては、ベンゼントリオール(好ましくは1,3,5-ベンゼントリオール)が挙げられる。
Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (P2) include benzenetriol (preferably 1,3,5-benzenetriol).
その他のフェノール化合物としては、例えば、ビフェニルアラルキル型フェノール樹脂、フェノールノボラック樹脂、クレゾールノボラック樹脂、芳香族炭化水素ホルムアルデヒド樹脂変性フェノール樹脂、ジシクロペンタジエンフェノール付加型樹脂、フェノールアラルキル樹脂、多価ヒドロキシ化合物とホルムアルデヒドとから合成される多価フェノールノボラック樹脂、ナフトールアラルキル樹脂、トリメチロールメタン樹脂、テトラフェニロールエタン樹脂、ナフトールノボラック樹脂、ナフトールフェノール共縮ノボラック樹脂、ナフトールクレゾール共縮ノボラック樹脂、ビフェニル変性フェノール樹脂、ビフェニル変性ナフトール樹脂、アミノトリアジン変性フェノール樹脂、及び、アルコキシ基含有芳香環変性ノボラック樹脂などが好ましい。
Examples of other phenol compounds include biphenyl aralkyl type phenol resin, phenol novolac resin, cresol novolac resin, aromatic hydrocarbon formaldehyde resin modified phenol resin, dicyclopentadienephenol addition type resin, phenol aralkyl resin, and polyhydric hydroxy compound. Polyhydric phenol novolac resin synthesized from formaldehyde, naphthol aralkyl resin, trimethylol methane resin, tetraphenylol ethane resin, naphthol novolac resin, naphthol phenol co-shrink novolac resin, naphthol cresol co-shrink novolak resin, biphenyl-modified phenol resin, Biphenyl-modified naphthol resin, aminotriazine-modified phenol resin, alkoxy group-containing aromatic ring-modified novolak resin and the like are preferable.
フェノール化合物の水酸基含有量の下限値は、3.0mmol/g以上が好ましく、8.0mmol/g以上がより好ましく、11.0mmol/g以上が更に好ましく、12.0mmol/g以上が特に好ましく、13.0mmol/g以上が最も好ましい。上限値は、25.0mmol/g以下が好ましく、23.0mmol/g以下がより好ましい。
なお、上記水酸基含有量は、フェノール化合物1gが有する、水酸基(好ましくはフェノール性水酸基)の数を意図する。
また、フェノール化合物は、水酸基以外にも、エポキシ化合物と重合反応できる活性水素含有基(カルボン酸基等)を有していてもよいし、有していなくてもよい。フェノール化合物の活性水素の含有量(水酸基及びカルボン酸基等における水素原子の合計含有量)の下限値は、8.0mmol/g以上が好ましく、10.5mmol/g以上がより好ましく、11.0mmol/g以上が更に好ましく、12.0mmol/g以上が特に好ましく、13.0mmol/g以上が最も好ましい。上限値は、25.0mmol/g以下が好ましく、23.0mmol/g以下がより好ましい。 The lower limit of the hydroxyl group content of the phenol compound is preferably 3.0 mmol / g or more, more preferably 8.0 mmol / g or more, further preferably 11.0 mmol / g or more, and particularly preferably 12.0 mmol / g or more. Most preferably 13.0 mmol / g or more. The upper limit is preferably 25.0 mmol / g or less, more preferably 23.0 mmol / g or less.
The hydroxyl group content is intended to be the number of hydroxyl groups (preferably phenolic hydroxyl groups) possessed by 1 g of the phenol compound.
In addition to the hydroxyl group, the phenol compound may or may not have an active hydrogen-containing group (carboxylic acid group or the like) capable of polymerizing with the epoxy compound. The lower limit of the active hydrogen content of the phenol compound (total content of hydrogen atoms in hydroxyl groups, carboxylic acid groups, etc.) is preferably 8.0 mmol / g or more, more preferably 10.5 mmol / g or more, and 11.0 mmol. / G or more is more preferable, 12.0 mmol / g or more is particularly preferable, and 13.0 mmol / g or more is most preferable. The upper limit is preferably 25.0 mmol / g or less, more preferably 23.0 mmol / g or less.
なお、上記水酸基含有量は、フェノール化合物1gが有する、水酸基(好ましくはフェノール性水酸基)の数を意図する。
また、フェノール化合物は、水酸基以外にも、エポキシ化合物と重合反応できる活性水素含有基(カルボン酸基等)を有していてもよいし、有していなくてもよい。フェノール化合物の活性水素の含有量(水酸基及びカルボン酸基等における水素原子の合計含有量)の下限値は、8.0mmol/g以上が好ましく、10.5mmol/g以上がより好ましく、11.0mmol/g以上が更に好ましく、12.0mmol/g以上が特に好ましく、13.0mmol/g以上が最も好ましい。上限値は、25.0mmol/g以下が好ましく、23.0mmol/g以下がより好ましい。 The lower limit of the hydroxyl group content of the phenol compound is preferably 3.0 mmol / g or more, more preferably 8.0 mmol / g or more, further preferably 11.0 mmol / g or more, and particularly preferably 12.0 mmol / g or more. Most preferably 13.0 mmol / g or more. The upper limit is preferably 25.0 mmol / g or less, more preferably 23.0 mmol / g or less.
The hydroxyl group content is intended to be the number of hydroxyl groups (preferably phenolic hydroxyl groups) possessed by 1 g of the phenol compound.
In addition to the hydroxyl group, the phenol compound may or may not have an active hydrogen-containing group (carboxylic acid group or the like) capable of polymerizing with the epoxy compound. The lower limit of the active hydrogen content of the phenol compound (total content of hydrogen atoms in hydroxyl groups, carboxylic acid groups, etc.) is preferably 8.0 mmol / g or more, more preferably 10.5 mmol / g or more, and 11.0 mmol. / G or more is more preferable, 12.0 mmol / g or more is particularly preferable, and 13.0 mmol / g or more is most preferable. The upper limit is preferably 25.0 mmol / g or less, more preferably 23.0 mmol / g or less.
フェノール化合物の分子量の上限値は、600以下が好ましく、500以下がより好ましく、450以下が更に好ましく、400以下が特に好ましい。下限値は、110以上が好ましく、300以上がより好ましい。
The upper limit of the molecular weight of the phenol compound is preferably 600 or less, more preferably 500 or less, further preferably 450 or less, and particularly preferably 400 or less. The lower limit is preferably 110 or more, and more preferably 300 or more.
フェノール化合物は、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
本発明の組成物がフェノール化合物を含む場合、フェノール化合物の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、1.0~25.0質量%が好ましく、3.0~20.0質量%がより好ましい。
なお、本発明の組成物は、フェノール化合物及び特定化合物以外の化合物として、後述のエポキシ化合物と反応可能な基を有する化合物(「その他の活性水素含有化合物」ともいう)を含んでもよい。
本発明の組成物が、フェノール化合物を含み、かつ、その他の活性水素含有化合物を含む場合、本発明の組成物中における、フェノール化合物の含有量に対する、その他の活性水素含有化合物の含有量の質量比(その他の活性水素含有化合物の含有量/フェノール化合物の含有量)は、0~1が好ましく、0~0.1がより好ましく、0~0.05が更に好ましい。 The phenol compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
When the composition of the present invention contains a phenol compound, the content of the phenol compound is preferably 1.0 to 25.0% by mass, preferably 3.0 to 20.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition. Is more preferable.
The composition of the present invention may contain a compound having a group capable of reacting with an epoxy compound described later (also referred to as “other active hydrogen-containing compound”) as a compound other than the phenol compound and the specific compound.
When the composition of the present invention contains a phenol compound and also contains other active hydrogen-containing compounds, the mass of the content of the other active hydrogen-containing compound with respect to the content of the phenol compound in the composition of the present invention. The ratio (content of other active hydrogen-containing compound / content of phenol compound) is preferably 0 to 1, more preferably 0 to 0.1, and even more preferably 0 to 0.05.
本発明の組成物がフェノール化合物を含む場合、フェノール化合物の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、1.0~25.0質量%が好ましく、3.0~20.0質量%がより好ましい。
なお、本発明の組成物は、フェノール化合物及び特定化合物以外の化合物として、後述のエポキシ化合物と反応可能な基を有する化合物(「その他の活性水素含有化合物」ともいう)を含んでもよい。
本発明の組成物が、フェノール化合物を含み、かつ、その他の活性水素含有化合物を含む場合、本発明の組成物中における、フェノール化合物の含有量に対する、その他の活性水素含有化合物の含有量の質量比(その他の活性水素含有化合物の含有量/フェノール化合物の含有量)は、0~1が好ましく、0~0.1がより好ましく、0~0.05が更に好ましい。 The phenol compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
When the composition of the present invention contains a phenol compound, the content of the phenol compound is preferably 1.0 to 25.0% by mass, preferably 3.0 to 20.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition. Is more preferable.
The composition of the present invention may contain a compound having a group capable of reacting with an epoxy compound described later (also referred to as “other active hydrogen-containing compound”) as a compound other than the phenol compound and the specific compound.
When the composition of the present invention contains a phenol compound and also contains other active hydrogen-containing compounds, the mass of the content of the other active hydrogen-containing compound with respect to the content of the phenol compound in the composition of the present invention. The ratio (content of other active hydrogen-containing compound / content of phenol compound) is preferably 0 to 1, more preferably 0 to 0.1, and even more preferably 0 to 0.05.
〔エポキシ化合物〕
本発明の組成物は、更に、エポキシ化合物を含んでもよい。
なお、エポキシ化合物は、特定化合物以外の化合物である。例えば、特定化合物がエポキシ基を有する場合でも、特定化合物は、エポキシ化合物には該当しない。
エポキシ化合物は、1分子中に、少なくとも1個のエポキシ基(オキシラニル基)を有する化合物である。エポキシ基は、可能な場合、置換基を有していても有していなくてもよい。
エポキシ化合物が有するエポキシ基の数は、1分子中、2以上が好ましく、2~40がより好ましく、2~10が更に好ましく、2が特に好ましい。
エポキシ化合物の分子量は、150~10000が好ましく、150~2000がより好ましく、250~400が更に好ましい。 [Epoxy compound]
The composition of the present invention may further contain an epoxy compound.
The epoxy compound is a compound other than the specific compound. For example, even if the specific compound has an epoxy group, the specific compound does not correspond to an epoxy compound.
An epoxy compound is a compound having at least one epoxy group (oxylanyl group) in one molecule. Epoxy groups may or may not have substituents, if possible.
The number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 2 to 40, still more preferably 2 to 10, and particularly preferably 2 in one molecule.
The molecular weight of the epoxy compound is preferably 150 to 10000, more preferably 150 to 2000, and even more preferably 250 to 400.
本発明の組成物は、更に、エポキシ化合物を含んでもよい。
なお、エポキシ化合物は、特定化合物以外の化合物である。例えば、特定化合物がエポキシ基を有する場合でも、特定化合物は、エポキシ化合物には該当しない。
エポキシ化合物は、1分子中に、少なくとも1個のエポキシ基(オキシラニル基)を有する化合物である。エポキシ基は、可能な場合、置換基を有していても有していなくてもよい。
エポキシ化合物が有するエポキシ基の数は、1分子中、2以上が好ましく、2~40がより好ましく、2~10が更に好ましく、2が特に好ましい。
エポキシ化合物の分子量は、150~10000が好ましく、150~2000がより好ましく、250~400が更に好ましい。 [Epoxy compound]
The composition of the present invention may further contain an epoxy compound.
The epoxy compound is a compound other than the specific compound. For example, even if the specific compound has an epoxy group, the specific compound does not correspond to an epoxy compound.
An epoxy compound is a compound having at least one epoxy group (oxylanyl group) in one molecule. Epoxy groups may or may not have substituents, if possible.
The number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 2 to 40, still more preferably 2 to 10, and particularly preferably 2 in one molecule.
The molecular weight of the epoxy compound is preferably 150 to 10000, more preferably 150 to 2000, and even more preferably 250 to 400.
エポキシ化合物のエポキシ基含有量の下限値は、2.0mmol/g以上が好ましく、4.0mmol/g以上がより好ましく、5.0mmol/g以上が更に好ましい。上限値としては、20.0mmol/g以下が好ましく、15.0mmol/g以下がより好ましい。
なお、上記エポキシ基含有量は、エポキシ化合物1gが有する、エポキシ基の数を意図する。
エポキシ化合物は、常温(23℃)で、液状であるのが好ましい。 The lower limit of the epoxy group content of the epoxy compound is preferably 2.0 mmol / g or more, more preferably 4.0 mmol / g or more, and further preferably 5.0 mmol / g or more. The upper limit is preferably 20.0 mmol / g or less, more preferably 15.0 mmol / g or less.
The epoxy group content is intended to be the number of epoxy groups contained in 1 g of the epoxy compound.
The epoxy compound is preferably liquid at room temperature (23 ° C.).
なお、上記エポキシ基含有量は、エポキシ化合物1gが有する、エポキシ基の数を意図する。
エポキシ化合物は、常温(23℃)で、液状であるのが好ましい。 The lower limit of the epoxy group content of the epoxy compound is preferably 2.0 mmol / g or more, more preferably 4.0 mmol / g or more, and further preferably 5.0 mmol / g or more. The upper limit is preferably 20.0 mmol / g or less, more preferably 15.0 mmol / g or less.
The epoxy group content is intended to be the number of epoxy groups contained in 1 g of the epoxy compound.
The epoxy compound is preferably liquid at room temperature (23 ° C.).
エポキシ化合物は、液晶性を示してもよく示さなくてもよい。
つまり、エポキシ化合物は、液晶化合物であってよい。言い換えれば、エポキシ基を有する液晶化合物もエポキシ化合物として使用できる。
エポキシ化合物(液晶性のエポキシ化合物であってもよい)としては、例えば、少なくとも部分的に棒状構造を含む化合物(棒状化合物)、及び、少なくとも部分的に円盤状構造を含む化合物円盤状化合物が挙げられる。
中でも、得られる熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる点から棒状化合物が好ましい。
以下、棒状化合物及び円盤状化合物について詳述する。 The epoxy compound may or may not exhibit liquid crystallinity.
That is, the epoxy compound may be a liquid crystal compound. In other words, a liquid crystal compound having an epoxy group can also be used as the epoxy compound.
Examples of the epoxy compound (which may be a liquid crystal epoxy compound) include a compound having a rod-like structure at least partially (a rod-like compound) and a compound having a disk-like structure at least partially. Be done.
Among them, a rod-shaped compound is preferable because the obtained heat conductive material has more excellent heat conductivity.
Hereinafter, the rod-shaped compound and the disk-shaped compound will be described in detail.
つまり、エポキシ化合物は、液晶化合物であってよい。言い換えれば、エポキシ基を有する液晶化合物もエポキシ化合物として使用できる。
エポキシ化合物(液晶性のエポキシ化合物であってもよい)としては、例えば、少なくとも部分的に棒状構造を含む化合物(棒状化合物)、及び、少なくとも部分的に円盤状構造を含む化合物円盤状化合物が挙げられる。
中でも、得られる熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる点から棒状化合物が好ましい。
以下、棒状化合物及び円盤状化合物について詳述する。 The epoxy compound may or may not exhibit liquid crystallinity.
That is, the epoxy compound may be a liquid crystal compound. In other words, a liquid crystal compound having an epoxy group can also be used as the epoxy compound.
Examples of the epoxy compound (which may be a liquid crystal epoxy compound) include a compound having a rod-like structure at least partially (a rod-like compound) and a compound having a disk-like structure at least partially. Be done.
Among them, a rod-shaped compound is preferable because the obtained heat conductive material has more excellent heat conductivity.
Hereinafter, the rod-shaped compound and the disk-shaped compound will be described in detail.
(棒状化合物)
棒状化合物であるエポキシ化合物としては、アゾメチン類、アゾキシ類、シアノビフェニル類、シアノフェニルエステル類、安息香酸エステル類、シクロヘキサンカルボン酸フェニルエステル類、シアノフェニルシクロヘキサン類、シアノ置換フェニルピリミジン類、アルコキシ置換フェニルピリミジン類、フェニルジオキサン類、トラン類、及び、アルケニルシクロヘキシルベンゾニトリル類が挙げられる。以上のような低分子化合物だけではなく、高分子化合物も使用できる。上記高分子化合物は、低分子の反応性基を有する棒状化合物が重合した高分子化合物である。
好ましい棒状化合物としては、下記一般式(XXI)で表される棒状化合物が挙げられる。
一般式(XXI):Q1-L111-A111-L113-M-L114-A112-L112-Q2 (Stick compound)
Examples of the epoxy compound which is a rod-shaped compound include azomethines, azoxys, cyanobiphenyls, cyanophenyl esters, benzoic acid esters, cyclohexanecarboxylic acid phenyl esters, cyanophenylcyclohexanes, cyano-substituted phenylpyrimidines, and alkoxy-substituted phenyls. Examples thereof include pyrimidines, phenyldioxans, trans, and alkenylcyclohexylbenzonitriles. Not only low molecular weight compounds as described above, but also high molecular weight compounds can be used. The above-mentioned polymer compound is a polymer compound obtained by polymerizing a rod-shaped compound having a small molecule reactive group.
Preferred rod-shaped compounds include rod-shaped compounds represented by the following general formula (XXI).
Formula (XXI): Q 1 -L 111 -A 111 -L 113 -M-L 114 -A 112 -L 112 -Q 2
棒状化合物であるエポキシ化合物としては、アゾメチン類、アゾキシ類、シアノビフェニル類、シアノフェニルエステル類、安息香酸エステル類、シクロヘキサンカルボン酸フェニルエステル類、シアノフェニルシクロヘキサン類、シアノ置換フェニルピリミジン類、アルコキシ置換フェニルピリミジン類、フェニルジオキサン類、トラン類、及び、アルケニルシクロヘキシルベンゾニトリル類が挙げられる。以上のような低分子化合物だけではなく、高分子化合物も使用できる。上記高分子化合物は、低分子の反応性基を有する棒状化合物が重合した高分子化合物である。
好ましい棒状化合物としては、下記一般式(XXI)で表される棒状化合物が挙げられる。
一般式(XXI):Q1-L111-A111-L113-M-L114-A112-L112-Q2 (Stick compound)
Examples of the epoxy compound which is a rod-shaped compound include azomethines, azoxys, cyanobiphenyls, cyanophenyl esters, benzoic acid esters, cyclohexanecarboxylic acid phenyl esters, cyanophenylcyclohexanes, cyano-substituted phenylpyrimidines, and alkoxy-substituted phenyls. Examples thereof include pyrimidines, phenyldioxans, trans, and alkenylcyclohexylbenzonitriles. Not only low molecular weight compounds as described above, but also high molecular weight compounds can be used. The above-mentioned polymer compound is a polymer compound obtained by polymerizing a rod-shaped compound having a small molecule reactive group.
Preferred rod-shaped compounds include rod-shaped compounds represented by the following general formula (XXI).
Formula (XXI): Q 1 -L 111 -A 111 -L 113 -M-L 114 -A 112 -L 112 -Q 2
一般式(XXI)中、Q1及びQ2はそれぞれ独立に、エポキシ基であり、L111、L112、L113、及び、L114はそれぞれ独立に、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。A111及びA112はそれぞれ独立に、炭素数1~20の2価の連結基(スペーサ基)を表す。Mはメソゲン基を表す。
Q1及びQ2のエポキシ基は、置換基を有していてもよいし、有していなくてもよい。 In the general formula (XXI), Q 1 and Q 2 are independent epoxy groups, and L 111 , L 112 , L 113 , and L 114 each independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group. .. A 111 and A 112 each independently represent a divalent linking group (spacer group) having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. M represents a mesogen group.
Epoxy group of Q 1 and Q 2 may be substituted or may not have.
Q1及びQ2のエポキシ基は、置換基を有していてもよいし、有していなくてもよい。 In the general formula (XXI), Q 1 and Q 2 are independent epoxy groups, and L 111 , L 112 , L 113 , and L 114 each independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group. .. A 111 and A 112 each independently represent a divalent linking group (spacer group) having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. M represents a mesogen group.
Epoxy group of Q 1 and Q 2 may be substituted or may not have.
一般式(XXI)中、L111、L112、L113、及び、L114はそれぞれ独立に、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
L111、L112、L113、及び、L114で表される2価の連結基としては、それぞれ独立に、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-NR112-、-CO-O-、-O-CO-O-、-CO-NR112-、-NR112-CO-、-O-CO-、-CH2-O-、-O-CH2-、-O-CO-NR112-、-NR112-CO-O-、及び、-NR112-CO-NR112-からなる群より選ばれる2価の連結基であるのが好ましい。上記R112は炭素数1~7のアルキル基又は水素原子である。
中でも、L113及びL114は、それぞれ独立に、-O-が好ましい。
L111及びL112は、それぞれ独立に、単結合が好ましい。 In the general formula (XXI), L 111 , L 112 , L 113 , and L 114 each independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group.
The divalent linking groups represented by L 111 , L 112 , L 113 , and L 114 are independently -O-, -S-, -CO-, -NR 112- , and -CO-O, respectively. -, -O-CO-O-, -CO -NR 112- , -NR 112 -CO-, -O-CO-, -CH 2 -O-, -O-CH 2-, -O-CO-NR 112 -, - NR 112 -CO- O-, and, -NR 112 -CO-NR 112 - is preferably a divalent linking group selected from the group consisting of. R 112 is an alkyl group or a hydrogen atom having 1 to 7 carbon atoms.
Among them, L 113 and L 114 are preferably —O— independently of each other.
L 111 and L 112 are preferably single bonds independently of each other.
L111、L112、L113、及び、L114で表される2価の連結基としては、それぞれ独立に、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-NR112-、-CO-O-、-O-CO-O-、-CO-NR112-、-NR112-CO-、-O-CO-、-CH2-O-、-O-CH2-、-O-CO-NR112-、-NR112-CO-O-、及び、-NR112-CO-NR112-からなる群より選ばれる2価の連結基であるのが好ましい。上記R112は炭素数1~7のアルキル基又は水素原子である。
中でも、L113及びL114は、それぞれ独立に、-O-が好ましい。
L111及びL112は、それぞれ独立に、単結合が好ましい。 In the general formula (XXI), L 111 , L 112 , L 113 , and L 114 each independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group.
The divalent linking groups represented by L 111 , L 112 , L 113 , and L 114 are independently -O-, -S-, -CO-, -NR 112- , and -CO-O, respectively. -, -O-CO-O-, -CO -NR 112- , -NR 112 -CO-, -O-CO-, -CH 2 -O-, -O-CH 2-, -O-CO-NR 112 -, - NR 112 -CO- O-, and, -NR 112 -CO-NR 112 - is preferably a divalent linking group selected from the group consisting of. R 112 is an alkyl group or a hydrogen atom having 1 to 7 carbon atoms.
Among them, L 113 and L 114 are preferably —O— independently of each other.
L 111 and L 112 are preferably single bonds independently of each other.
一般式(XXI)中、A111及びA112は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1~20の2価の連結基を表す。
2価の連結基は、隣接していない酸素原子及び硫黄原子等のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよい。中でも、炭素数1~12の、アルキレン基、アルケニレン基、又は、アルキニレン基が好ましい。上記、アルキレン基、アルケニレン基、又は、アルキニレン基がエステル基を有していてもよいし、有していなくてもよい。
2価の連結基は直鎖状であるのが好ましく、また、上記2価の連結基は置換基を有していてもよいし、有していなくてもよい。置換基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子(フッ素原子、塩素原子、及び、臭素原子)、シアノ基、メチル基、及び、エチル基が挙げられる。
中でも、A111及びA112は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1~12のアルキレン基が好ましく、メチレン基がより好ましい。 In the general formula (XXI), A 111 and A 112 each independently represent a divalent linking group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
The divalent linking group may contain heteroatoms such as non-adjacent oxygen and sulfur atoms. Of these, an alkylene group, an alkaneylene group, or an alkynylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms is preferable. The above-mentioned alkylene group, alkenylene group, or alkynylene group may or may not have an ester group.
The divalent linking group is preferably linear, and the divalent linking group may or may not have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom (fluorine atom, chlorine atom, and bromine atom), a cyano group, a methyl group, and an ethyl group.
Among them, A 111 and A 112 are each independently preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably a methylene group.
2価の連結基は、隣接していない酸素原子及び硫黄原子等のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよい。中でも、炭素数1~12の、アルキレン基、アルケニレン基、又は、アルキニレン基が好ましい。上記、アルキレン基、アルケニレン基、又は、アルキニレン基がエステル基を有していてもよいし、有していなくてもよい。
2価の連結基は直鎖状であるのが好ましく、また、上記2価の連結基は置換基を有していてもよいし、有していなくてもよい。置換基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子(フッ素原子、塩素原子、及び、臭素原子)、シアノ基、メチル基、及び、エチル基が挙げられる。
中でも、A111及びA112は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1~12のアルキレン基が好ましく、メチレン基がより好ましい。 In the general formula (XXI), A 111 and A 112 each independently represent a divalent linking group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
The divalent linking group may contain heteroatoms such as non-adjacent oxygen and sulfur atoms. Of these, an alkylene group, an alkaneylene group, or an alkynylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms is preferable. The above-mentioned alkylene group, alkenylene group, or alkynylene group may or may not have an ester group.
The divalent linking group is preferably linear, and the divalent linking group may or may not have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom (fluorine atom, chlorine atom, and bromine atom), a cyano group, a methyl group, and an ethyl group.
Among them, A 111 and A 112 are each independently preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably a methylene group.
一般式(XXI)中、Mはメソゲン基を表し、上記メソゲン基としては、公知のメソゲン基が挙げられる。中でも、下記一般式(XXII)で表される基が好ましい。
一般式(XXII):-(W1-L115)n-W2- In the general formula (XXI), M represents a mesogen group, and examples of the mesogen group include known mesogen groups. Of these, a group represented by the following general formula (XXII) is preferable.
General formula (XXII):-(W 1- L 115 ) n- W 2-
一般式(XXII):-(W1-L115)n-W2- In the general formula (XXI), M represents a mesogen group, and examples of the mesogen group include known mesogen groups. Of these, a group represented by the following general formula (XXII) is preferable.
General formula (XXII):-(W 1- L 115 ) n- W 2-
一般式(XXII)式中、W1及びW2は、それぞれ独立に、2価の環状アルキレン基、2価の環状アルケニレン基、アリーレン基、又は、2価のヘテロ環基を表す。L115は、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。nは、1~4の整数を表す。
In the general formula (XXII), W 1 and W 2 independently represent a divalent cyclic alkylene group, a divalent cyclic alkaneylene group, an arylene group, or a divalent heterocyclic group, respectively. L 115 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. n represents an integer of 1 to 4.
W1及びW2としては、例えば、1,4-シクロヘキセンジイル、1,4-シクロヘキサンジイル、1,4-フェニレン、ピリミジン-2,5-ジイル、ピリジン-2,5-ジイル、1,3,4-チアジアゾール-2,5-ジイル、1,3,4-オキサジアゾール-2,5-ジイル、ナフタレン-2,6-ジイル、ナフタレン-1,5-ジイル、チオフェン-2,5-ジイル、及び、ピリダジン-3,6-ジイルが挙げられる。1,4-シクロヘキサンジイルの場合、トランス体及びシス体の構造異性体のどちらの異性体であってもよく、任意の割合の混合物でもよい。中でも、トランス体が好ましい。
W1及びW2は、それぞれ置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、例えば、上述した置換基群Yで例示された基が挙げられ、より具体的には、ハロゲン原子(フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、及び、ヨウ素原子)、シアノ基、炭素数1~10のアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、及び、プロピル基等)、炭素数1~10のアルコキシ基(例えば、メトキシ基、及び、エトキシ基等)、炭素数1~10のアシル基(例えば、ホルミル基、及び、アセチル基等)、炭素数1~10のアルコキシカルボニル基(例えば、メトキシカルボニル基、及び、エトキシカルボニル基等)、炭素数1~10のアシルオキシ基(例えば、アセチルオキシ基、及び、プロピオニルオキシ基等)、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基、及び、ジフルオロメチル基等が挙げられる。
W1が複数存在する場合、複数存在するW1は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 Examples of W 1 and W 2 include 1,4-cyclohexenediyl, 1,4-cyclohexanediyl, 1,4-phenylene, pyrimidine-2,5-diyl, pyridine-2,5-diyl, 1,3. 4-Thiadiazole-2,5-diyl, 1,3,4-oxadiazole-2,5-diyl, naphthalene-2,6-diyl, naphthalene-1,5-diyl, thiophene-2,5-diyl, And pyridazine-3,6-diyl. In the case of 1,4-cyclohexanediyl, it may be either a trans isomer or a cis structural isomer, or a mixture in any proportion. Of these, a transformer body is preferable.
W 1 and W 2 may each have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the groups exemplified in the above-mentioned substituent group Y, and more specifically, a halogen atom (fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, and iodine atom), a cyano group, and a carbon. An alkyl group having a number of 1 to 10 (for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, etc.), an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, etc.), and a group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. An acyl group (for example, formyl group and acetyl group, etc.), an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, a methoxycarbonyl group, an ethoxycarbonyl group, etc.), an acyloxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, an acyloxy group). Acetyloxy group, propionyloxy group, etc.), nitro group, trifluoromethyl group, difluoromethyl group and the like can be mentioned.
If W 1 there are a plurality, W 1 existing in plural numbers may each be the same or different.
W1及びW2は、それぞれ置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、例えば、上述した置換基群Yで例示された基が挙げられ、より具体的には、ハロゲン原子(フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、及び、ヨウ素原子)、シアノ基、炭素数1~10のアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、及び、プロピル基等)、炭素数1~10のアルコキシ基(例えば、メトキシ基、及び、エトキシ基等)、炭素数1~10のアシル基(例えば、ホルミル基、及び、アセチル基等)、炭素数1~10のアルコキシカルボニル基(例えば、メトキシカルボニル基、及び、エトキシカルボニル基等)、炭素数1~10のアシルオキシ基(例えば、アセチルオキシ基、及び、プロピオニルオキシ基等)、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基、及び、ジフルオロメチル基等が挙げられる。
W1が複数存在する場合、複数存在するW1は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 Examples of W 1 and W 2 include 1,4-cyclohexenediyl, 1,4-cyclohexanediyl, 1,4-phenylene, pyrimidine-2,5-diyl, pyridine-2,5-diyl, 1,3. 4-Thiadiazole-2,5-diyl, 1,3,4-oxadiazole-2,5-diyl, naphthalene-2,6-diyl, naphthalene-1,5-diyl, thiophene-2,5-diyl, And pyridazine-3,6-diyl. In the case of 1,4-cyclohexanediyl, it may be either a trans isomer or a cis structural isomer, or a mixture in any proportion. Of these, a transformer body is preferable.
W 1 and W 2 may each have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the groups exemplified in the above-mentioned substituent group Y, and more specifically, a halogen atom (fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, and iodine atom), a cyano group, and a carbon. An alkyl group having a number of 1 to 10 (for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, etc.), an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, etc.), and a group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. An acyl group (for example, formyl group and acetyl group, etc.), an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, a methoxycarbonyl group, an ethoxycarbonyl group, etc.), an acyloxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, an acyloxy group). Acetyloxy group, propionyloxy group, etc.), nitro group, trifluoromethyl group, difluoromethyl group and the like can be mentioned.
If W 1 there are a plurality, W 1 existing in plural numbers may each be the same or different.
一般式(XXII)式中、L115は、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。L115で表される2価の連結基としては、上述したL111~L114で表される2価の連結基の具体例が挙げられ、例えば、-CO-O-、-O-CO-、-CH2-O-、及び、-O-CH2-が挙げられる。
L115が複数存在する場合、複数存在するL115は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the general formula (XXII), L 115 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Specific examples of the divalent linking group represented by L 115 include the above-mentioned divalent linking groups represented by L 111 to L 114 , and examples thereof include -CO-O- and -O-CO-. , -CH 2- O-, and -O-CH 2- .
When a plurality of L 115s are present, the plurality of L 115s may be the same or different from each other.
L115が複数存在する場合、複数存在するL115は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the general formula (XXII), L 115 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Specific examples of the divalent linking group represented by L 115 include the above-mentioned divalent linking groups represented by L 111 to L 114 , and examples thereof include -CO-O- and -O-CO-. , -CH 2- O-, and -O-CH 2- .
When a plurality of L 115s are present, the plurality of L 115s may be the same or different from each other.
上記一般式(XXII)で表されるメソゲン基の基本骨格で好ましい骨格を、以下に例示する。上記メソゲン基は、これらの骨格に置換基が置換していてもよい。
The preferred skeleton of the basic skeleton of the mesogen group represented by the above general formula (XXII) is illustrated below. The mesogen groups may be substituted with substituents on these skeletons.
上記骨格の中でも、得られる熱伝導シートの熱伝導性がより優れる点でビフェニル骨格が好ましい。
なお、一般式(XXI)で表される化合物は、特表平11-513019号公報(WO97/00600)に記載の方法を参照して合成できる。
棒状化合物は、特開平11-323162号公報及び特許4118691号に記載のメソゲン基を有するモノマーであってもよい。 Among the above skeletons, the biphenyl skeleton is preferable in that the obtained heat conductive sheet has more excellent thermal conductivity.
The compound represented by the general formula (XXI) can be synthesized by referring to the method described in JP-A No. 11-513019 (WO97 / 00600).
The rod-shaped compound may be a monomer having a mesogen group described in JP-A-11-323162 and Patent No. 4118691.
なお、一般式(XXI)で表される化合物は、特表平11-513019号公報(WO97/00600)に記載の方法を参照して合成できる。
棒状化合物は、特開平11-323162号公報及び特許4118691号に記載のメソゲン基を有するモノマーであってもよい。 Among the above skeletons, the biphenyl skeleton is preferable in that the obtained heat conductive sheet has more excellent thermal conductivity.
The compound represented by the general formula (XXI) can be synthesized by referring to the method described in JP-A No. 11-513019 (WO97 / 00600).
The rod-shaped compound may be a monomer having a mesogen group described in JP-A-11-323162 and Patent No. 4118691.
中でも、棒状化合物は、一般式(E1)で表される化合物であるのが好ましい。
Among them, the rod-shaped compound is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (E1).
一般式(E1)中、LE1は、それぞれ独立に、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
中でも、LE1は、2価の連結基が好ましい。
2価の連結基は、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-NH-、-CH=CH-、-C≡C-、-CH=N-、-N=CH-、-N=N-、置換意を有していてもよいアルキレン基、又は、これらの2以上の組み合わせからなる基が好ましく、-O-アルキレン基-又は-アルキレン基-O-がより好ましい。
なお上記アルキレン基は、直鎖状、分岐鎖状、及び、環状のいずれでもよいが、炭素数1~2の直鎖状アルキレン基が好ましい。
複数存在するLE1は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the general formula (E1), LE1 independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Of these, LE1 is preferably a divalent linking group.
The divalent linking groups are -O-, -S-, -CO-, -NH-, -CH = CH-, -C≡C-, -CH = N-, -N = CH-, -N = N—, an alkylene group which may have a substitution intention, or a group consisting of two or more of these is preferable, and —O—alkylene group— or −alkylene group—O— is more preferable.
The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but a linear alkylene group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms is preferable.
A plurality of LE1s may be the same or different from each other.
中でも、LE1は、2価の連結基が好ましい。
2価の連結基は、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-NH-、-CH=CH-、-C≡C-、-CH=N-、-N=CH-、-N=N-、置換意を有していてもよいアルキレン基、又は、これらの2以上の組み合わせからなる基が好ましく、-O-アルキレン基-又は-アルキレン基-O-がより好ましい。
なお上記アルキレン基は、直鎖状、分岐鎖状、及び、環状のいずれでもよいが、炭素数1~2の直鎖状アルキレン基が好ましい。
複数存在するLE1は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the general formula (E1), LE1 independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Of these, LE1 is preferably a divalent linking group.
The divalent linking groups are -O-, -S-, -CO-, -NH-, -CH = CH-, -C≡C-, -CH = N-, -N = CH-, -N = N—, an alkylene group which may have a substitution intention, or a group consisting of two or more of these is preferable, and —O—alkylene group— or −alkylene group—O— is more preferable.
The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but a linear alkylene group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms is preferable.
A plurality of LE1s may be the same or different from each other.
一般式(E1)中、LE2は、それぞれ独立に、単結合、-CH=CH-、-CO-O-、-O-CO-、-C(-CH3)=CH-、-CH=C(-CH3)-、-CH=N-、-N=CH-、-N=N-、-C≡C-、-N=N+(-O-)-、-N+(-O-)=N-、-CH=N+(-O-)-、-N+(-O-)=CH-、-CH=CH-CO-、-CO-CH=CH-、-CH=C(-CN)-、又は、-C(-CN)=CH-を表す。
中でも、LE2は、それぞれ独立に、単結合、-CO-O-、又は、-O-CO-が好ましい。
LE2が複数存在する場合、複数存在するLE2は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the general formula (E1), LE2 are independently single-bonded, -CH = CH-, -CO-O-, -O-CO-, -C (-CH 3 ) = CH-, -CH =. C (-CH 3 )-, -CH = N-, -N = CH-, -N = N-, -C≡C-, -N = N + (-O - )-, -N + (-O-) -) = N -, - CH = N + (-O -) -, - N + (-O -) = CH -, - CH = CH-CO -, - CO-CH = CH -, - CH = C It represents (-CN)-or-C (-CN) = CH-.
Among them, L E2 are each independently a single bond, -CO-O-, or, -O-CO- is preferred.
When there are a plurality of LE2s , the plurality of LE2s may be the same or different.
中でも、LE2は、それぞれ独立に、単結合、-CO-O-、又は、-O-CO-が好ましい。
LE2が複数存在する場合、複数存在するLE2は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the general formula (E1), LE2 are independently single-bonded, -CH = CH-, -CO-O-, -O-CO-, -C (-CH 3 ) = CH-, -CH =. C (-CH 3 )-, -CH = N-, -N = CH-, -N = N-, -C≡C-, -N = N + (-O - )-, -N + (-O-) -) = N -, - CH = N + (-O -) -, - N + (-O -) = CH -, - CH = CH-CO -, - CO-CH = CH -, - CH = C It represents (-CN)-or-C (-CN) = CH-.
Among them, L E2 are each independently a single bond, -CO-O-, or, -O-CO- is preferred.
When there are a plurality of LE2s , the plurality of LE2s may be the same or different.
一般式(E1)中、LE3は、それぞれ独立に、単結合、又は、置換基を有していてもよい、5員環若しくは6員環の芳香族環基又は5員環若しくは6員環の非芳香族環基、又は、これらの環からなる多環基を表す。
LE3で表される芳香族環基及び非芳香族環基の例としては、置換基を有していてもよい、1,4-シクロヘキサンジイル基、1,4-シクロヘキセンジイル基、1,4-フェニレン基、ピリミジン-2,5-ジイル基、ピリジン-2,5-ジイル基、1,3,4-チアジアゾール-2,5-ジイル基、1,3,4-オキサジアゾール-2,5-ジイル基、ナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基、ナフタレン-1,5-ジイル基、チオフェン-2,5-ジイル基、及び、ピリダジン-3,6-ジイル基が挙げられる。1,4-シクロヘキサンジイル基の場合、トランス体及びシス体の構造異性体のどちらの異性体であってもよく、任意の割合の混合物でもよい。中でも、トランス体であるのが好ましい。
中でも、LE3は、単結合、1,4-フェニレン基、又は、1,4-シクロヘキセンジイル基が好ましい。
LE3で表される基が有する置換基は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、又は、アセチル基が好ましく、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1)がより好ましい。
なお、置換基が複数存在する場合、置換基は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
LE3が複数存在する場合、複数存在するLE3は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the general formula (E1), LE3 may independently have a single bond or a substituent, respectively, and may have a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring aromatic ring group or a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. Represents a non-aromatic ring group of, or a polycyclic group composed of these rings.
Examples of aromatic ring groups and non-aromatic ring group represented by L E3, which may have a substituent, 1,4-cyclohexane-diyl group, 1,4-cyclohexene-diyl group, 1,4 -Phenylene group, pyrimidin-2,5-diyl group, pyridine-2,5-diyl group, 1,3,4-thiasiazol-2,5-diyl group, 1,3,4-oxadiazol-2,5 Examples thereof include a diyl group, a naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, a naphthalene-1,5-diyl group, a thiophene-2,5-diyl group, and a pyridazine-3,6-diyl group. In the case of a 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group, it may be either a trans isomer or a cis structural isomer, or a mixture in any proportion. Above all, a transformer body is preferable.
Among them, L E3 represents a single bond, 1,4-phenylene group, or 1,4-cyclohexene-diyl group are preferable.
Substituent having a group represented by L E3 each independently represent an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, or, preferably an acetyl group, an alkyl group (preferably having a carbon number of 1) Gayori preferable.
When a plurality of substituents are present, the substituents may be the same or different.
When there are a plurality of LE3s , the plurality of LE3s may be the same or different.
LE3で表される芳香族環基及び非芳香族環基の例としては、置換基を有していてもよい、1,4-シクロヘキサンジイル基、1,4-シクロヘキセンジイル基、1,4-フェニレン基、ピリミジン-2,5-ジイル基、ピリジン-2,5-ジイル基、1,3,4-チアジアゾール-2,5-ジイル基、1,3,4-オキサジアゾール-2,5-ジイル基、ナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基、ナフタレン-1,5-ジイル基、チオフェン-2,5-ジイル基、及び、ピリダジン-3,6-ジイル基が挙げられる。1,4-シクロヘキサンジイル基の場合、トランス体及びシス体の構造異性体のどちらの異性体であってもよく、任意の割合の混合物でもよい。中でも、トランス体であるのが好ましい。
中でも、LE3は、単結合、1,4-フェニレン基、又は、1,4-シクロヘキセンジイル基が好ましい。
LE3で表される基が有する置換基は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、又は、アセチル基が好ましく、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1)がより好ましい。
なお、置換基が複数存在する場合、置換基は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
LE3が複数存在する場合、複数存在するLE3は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the general formula (E1), LE3 may independently have a single bond or a substituent, respectively, and may have a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring aromatic ring group or a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. Represents a non-aromatic ring group of, or a polycyclic group composed of these rings.
Examples of aromatic ring groups and non-aromatic ring group represented by L E3, which may have a substituent, 1,4-cyclohexane-diyl group, 1,4-cyclohexene-diyl group, 1,4 -Phenylene group, pyrimidin-2,5-diyl group, pyridine-2,5-diyl group, 1,3,4-thiasiazol-2,5-diyl group, 1,3,4-oxadiazol-2,5 Examples thereof include a diyl group, a naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, a naphthalene-1,5-diyl group, a thiophene-2,5-diyl group, and a pyridazine-3,6-diyl group. In the case of a 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group, it may be either a trans isomer or a cis structural isomer, or a mixture in any proportion. Above all, a transformer body is preferable.
Among them, L E3 represents a single bond, 1,4-phenylene group, or 1,4-cyclohexene-diyl group are preferable.
Substituent having a group represented by L E3 each independently represent an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, or, preferably an acetyl group, an alkyl group (preferably having a carbon number of 1) Gayori preferable.
When a plurality of substituents are present, the substituents may be the same or different.
When there are a plurality of LE3s , the plurality of LE3s may be the same or different.
一般式(E1)中、peは、0以上の整数を表す。
peが2以上の整数である場合、複数存在する(-LE3-LE2-)は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
中でも、peは、0~2が好ましく、0又は1がより好ましく、0が更に好ましい。 In the general formula (E1), pe represents an integer of 0 or more.
If pe is the integer of 2 or more, there exist a plurality of (-L E3 -L E2 -) may each be the same or different.
Among them, pe is preferably 0 to 2, more preferably 0 or 1, and even more preferably 0.
peが2以上の整数である場合、複数存在する(-LE3-LE2-)は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
中でも、peは、0~2が好ましく、0又は1がより好ましく、0が更に好ましい。 In the general formula (E1), pe represents an integer of 0 or more.
If pe is the integer of 2 or more, there exist a plurality of (-L E3 -L E2 -) may each be the same or different.
Among them, pe is preferably 0 to 2, more preferably 0 or 1, and even more preferably 0.
一般式(E1)中、LE4は、それぞれ独立に、置換基を表す。
置換基は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、又は、アセチル基が好ましく、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1)がより好ましい。
複数存在するLE4は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。また、次に説明するleが2以上の整数である場合、同一の(LE4)le中に複数存在するLE4も、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the general formula (E1), LE4 independently represents a substituent.
The substituent is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, or an acetyl group, and more preferably an alkyl group (preferably 1 carbon number).
A plurality of LE4s may be the same or different from each other. Further, when le described below is an integer of 2 or more, a plurality of LE4s existing in the same (LE4 ) le may be the same or different.
置換基は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、又は、アセチル基が好ましく、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1)がより好ましい。
複数存在するLE4は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。また、次に説明するleが2以上の整数である場合、同一の(LE4)le中に複数存在するLE4も、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the general formula (E1), LE4 independently represents a substituent.
The substituent is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, or an acetyl group, and more preferably an alkyl group (preferably 1 carbon number).
A plurality of LE4s may be the same or different from each other. Further, when le described below is an integer of 2 or more, a plurality of LE4s existing in the same (LE4 ) le may be the same or different.
一般式(E1)中、leは、それぞれ独立に、0~4の整数を表す。
中でも、leは、それぞれ独立に、0~2が好ましい。
複数存在するleは、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the general formula (E1), le independently represents an integer of 0 to 4.
Among them, le is preferably 0 to 2 independently of each other.
A plurality of le's may be the same or different from each other.
中でも、leは、それぞれ独立に、0~2が好ましい。
複数存在するleは、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the general formula (E1), le independently represents an integer of 0 to 4.
Among them, le is preferably 0 to 2 independently of each other.
A plurality of le's may be the same or different from each other.
棒状化合物は、ビフェニル骨格を有するのが好ましい。
言い換えると、エポキシ化合物は、ビフェニル骨格を有するのが好ましく、この場合のエポキシ化合物は棒状化合物であるのがより好ましい。 The rod compound preferably has a biphenyl skeleton.
In other words, the epoxy compound preferably has a biphenyl skeleton, and the epoxy compound in this case is more preferably a rod-shaped compound.
言い換えると、エポキシ化合物は、ビフェニル骨格を有するのが好ましく、この場合のエポキシ化合物は棒状化合物であるのがより好ましい。 The rod compound preferably has a biphenyl skeleton.
In other words, the epoxy compound preferably has a biphenyl skeleton, and the epoxy compound in this case is more preferably a rod-shaped compound.
(円盤状化合物)
円盤状化合物であるエポキシ化合物は、少なくとも部分的に円盤状構造を有する。
円盤状構造は、少なくとも、脂環又は芳香族環を有する。特に、円盤状構造が、芳香族環を有する場合、円盤状化合物は、分子間のπ-π相互作用によるスタッキング構造の形成により柱状構造を形成しうる。
円盤状構造として、具体的には、Angew.Chem.Int.Ed.2012,51,7990-7993又は特開平7-306317号公報に記載のトリフェニレン構造、並びに、特開2007-2220号公報及び特開2010-244038号公報に記載の3置換ベンゼン構造等が挙げられる。 (Disc-shaped compound)
The epoxy compound, which is a disk-shaped compound, has a disk-shaped structure at least partially.
The disc-like structure has at least an alicyclic or aromatic ring. In particular, when the disk-shaped structure has an aromatic ring, the disk-shaped compound can form a columnar structure by forming a stacking structure by π-π interaction between molecules.
As a disk-shaped structure, specifically, Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Examples thereof include the triphenylene structure described in 2012, 51, 7990-7793 or JP-A-7-306317, and the tri-substituted benzene structure described in JP-A-2007-2220 and JP-A-2010-244038.
円盤状化合物であるエポキシ化合物は、少なくとも部分的に円盤状構造を有する。
円盤状構造は、少なくとも、脂環又は芳香族環を有する。特に、円盤状構造が、芳香族環を有する場合、円盤状化合物は、分子間のπ-π相互作用によるスタッキング構造の形成により柱状構造を形成しうる。
円盤状構造として、具体的には、Angew.Chem.Int.Ed.2012,51,7990-7993又は特開平7-306317号公報に記載のトリフェニレン構造、並びに、特開2007-2220号公報及び特開2010-244038号公報に記載の3置換ベンゼン構造等が挙げられる。 (Disc-shaped compound)
The epoxy compound, which is a disk-shaped compound, has a disk-shaped structure at least partially.
The disc-like structure has at least an alicyclic or aromatic ring. In particular, when the disk-shaped structure has an aromatic ring, the disk-shaped compound can form a columnar structure by forming a stacking structure by π-π interaction between molecules.
As a disk-shaped structure, specifically, Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Examples thereof include the triphenylene structure described in 2012, 51, 7990-7793 or JP-A-7-306317, and the tri-substituted benzene structure described in JP-A-2007-2220 and JP-A-2010-244038.
上記円盤状化合物は、エポキシ基を3個以上有するのが好ましい。3個以上のエポキシ基を有する円盤状化合物を含むエポキシ化合物の硬化物はガラス転移温度が高く、耐熱性が高い傾向がある。
円盤状化合物が有するエポキシ基の数は、8以下が好ましく、6以下より好ましい。 The disk-shaped compound preferably has three or more epoxy groups. A cured product of an epoxy compound containing a disk-shaped compound having three or more epoxy groups tends to have a high glass transition temperature and high heat resistance.
The number of epoxy groups contained in the disk-shaped compound is preferably 8 or less, and more preferably 6 or less.
円盤状化合物が有するエポキシ基の数は、8以下が好ましく、6以下より好ましい。 The disk-shaped compound preferably has three or more epoxy groups. A cured product of an epoxy compound containing a disk-shaped compound having three or more epoxy groups tends to have a high glass transition temperature and high heat resistance.
The number of epoxy groups contained in the disk-shaped compound is preferably 8 or less, and more preferably 6 or less.
円盤状化合物の具体例としては、C. Destrade et al., Mol. Crysr. Liq. Cryst., vol. 71, page 111 (1981) ;日本化学会編、季刊化学総説、No.22、液晶の化学、第5章、第10章第2節(1994);B. Kohne et al., Angew. Chem. Soc. Chem. Comm., page 1794 (1985);J. Zhang et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., vol. 116, page 2655 (1994)、及び特許第4592225号に記載されている化合物等において末端の少なくとも1個(好ましくは3個以上)をエポキシ基とした化合物が挙げられる。
円盤状化合物としては、Angew.Chem.Int. Ed. 2012, 51, 7990-7993、及び特開平7-306317号公報に記載のトリフェニレン構造、並びに特開2007-2220号公報、及び、特開2010-244038号公報に記載の3置換ベンゼン構造において末端の少なくとも1個(好ましくは3個以上)をエポキシ基とした化合物等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the disk-shaped compound include C.I. Destrade et al. , Mol. Crysr. Liq. Cryst. , Vol. 71, page 111 (1981); Chemical Society of Japan, Quarterly Review of Chemistry, No. 22, Liquid crystal chemistry, Chapter 5, Chapter 10, Section 2 (1994); B. Kohne et al. , Angew. Chem. Soc. Chem. Comm. , Page 1794 (1985); Zhang et al. , J. Am. Chem. Soc. , Vol. Examples of the compounds described in 116, page 2655 (1994), and Japanese Patent No. 4592225 include compounds in which at least one (preferably three or more) ends are epoxy groups.
Examples of the disk-shaped compound include Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. The triphenylene structure described in 2012, 51, 7990-7793, and JP-A-7-306317, and the tri-substituted benzene structure described in JP-A-2007-2220 and JP-A-2010-2404038 are terminal. Examples thereof include compounds having at least one (preferably three or more) epoxy groups.
円盤状化合物としては、Angew.Chem.Int. Ed. 2012, 51, 7990-7993、及び特開平7-306317号公報に記載のトリフェニレン構造、並びに特開2007-2220号公報、及び、特開2010-244038号公報に記載の3置換ベンゼン構造において末端の少なくとも1個(好ましくは3個以上)をエポキシ基とした化合物等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the disk-shaped compound include C.I. Destrade et al. , Mol. Crysr. Liq. Cryst. , Vol. 71, page 111 (1981); Chemical Society of Japan, Quarterly Review of Chemistry, No. 22, Liquid crystal chemistry, Chapter 5, Chapter 10, Section 2 (1994); B. Kohne et al. , Angew. Chem. Soc. Chem. Comm. , Page 1794 (1985); Zhang et al. , J. Am. Chem. Soc. , Vol. Examples of the compounds described in 116, page 2655 (1994), and Japanese Patent No. 4592225 include compounds in which at least one (preferably three or more) ends are epoxy groups.
Examples of the disk-shaped compound include Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. The triphenylene structure described in 2012, 51, 7990-7793, and JP-A-7-306317, and the tri-substituted benzene structure described in JP-A-2007-2220 and JP-A-2010-2404038 are terminal. Examples thereof include compounds having at least one (preferably three or more) epoxy groups.
(その他のエポキシ化合物)
上述のエポキシ化合物以外の、その他のエポキシ化合物としては、例えば、一般式(BN)で表されるエポキシ化合物が挙げられる。 (Other epoxy compounds)
Examples of other epoxy compounds other than the above-mentioned epoxy compounds include epoxy compounds represented by the general formula (BN).
上述のエポキシ化合物以外の、その他のエポキシ化合物としては、例えば、一般式(BN)で表されるエポキシ化合物が挙げられる。 (Other epoxy compounds)
Examples of other epoxy compounds other than the above-mentioned epoxy compounds include epoxy compounds represented by the general formula (BN).
一般式(DN)中、nDNは、0以上の整数を表し、0~5が好ましく、1がより好ましい。
RDNは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基としては、-O-、-O-CO-、-CO-O-、-S-、アルキレン基(炭素数は、1~10が好ましい。)、アリーレン基(炭素数は、6~20が好ましい。)、又は、これらの組み合わせからなる基が好ましく、アルキレン基がより好ましく、メチレン基がより好ましい。 In the general formula (DN), nDN represents an integer of 0 or more, preferably 0 to 5, and more preferably 1.
RDN represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. The divalent linking group includes -O-, -O-CO-, -CO-O-, -S-, an alkylene group (preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms), and an arylene group (the carbon number is preferably 1 to 10). 6 to 20 is preferable), or a group composed of a combination thereof is preferable, an alkylene group is more preferable, and a methylene group is more preferable.
RDNは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基としては、-O-、-O-CO-、-CO-O-、-S-、アルキレン基(炭素数は、1~10が好ましい。)、アリーレン基(炭素数は、6~20が好ましい。)、又は、これらの組み合わせからなる基が好ましく、アルキレン基がより好ましく、メチレン基がより好ましい。 In the general formula (DN), nDN represents an integer of 0 or more, preferably 0 to 5, and more preferably 1.
RDN represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. The divalent linking group includes -O-, -O-CO-, -CO-O-, -S-, an alkylene group (preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms), and an arylene group (the carbon number is preferably 1 to 10). 6 to 20 is preferable), or a group composed of a combination thereof is preferable, an alkylene group is more preferable, and a methylene group is more preferable.
その他のエポキシ化合物としては、エポキシ基が、縮環している化合物も挙げられる。このような化合物としては、例えば、3,4:8,9-ジエポキシビシクロ[4.3.0]ノナン等が挙げられる。
Examples of other epoxy compounds include compounds in which the epoxy group is fused. Examples of such a compound include 3,4: 8,9-diepoxybicyclo [4.3.0] nonane and the like.
その他のエポキシ化合物としては、他にも、例えば、ビスフェノールA、F、S、AD等のグリシジルエーテルであるビスフェノールA型エポキシ化合物、ビスフェノールF型エポキシ化合物、ビスフェノールS型エポキシ化合物、ビスフェノールAD型エポキシ化合物等;水素添加したビスフェノールA型エポキシ化合物、水素添加したビスフェノールAD型エポキシ化合物等;フェノールノボラック型のグリシジルエーテル(フェノールノボラック型エポキシ化合物)、クレゾールノボラック型のグリシジルエーテル(クレゾールノボラック型エポキシ化合物)、ビスフェノールAノボラック型のグリシジルエーテル等;ジシクロペンタジエン型のグリシジルエーテル(ジシクロペンタジエン型エポキシ化合物);ジヒドロキシペンタジエン型のグリシジルエーテル(ジヒドロキシペンタジエン型エポキシ化合物);ポリヒドロキシベンゼン型のグリシジルエーテル(ポリヒドロキシベンゼン型エポキシ化合物);ベンゼンポリカルボン酸型のグリシジルエステル(ベンゼンポリカルボン酸型エポキシ化合物);及び、トリスフェノールメタン型エポキシ化合物が挙げられる。
Other epoxy compounds include, for example, bisphenol A type epoxy compounds, bisphenol F type epoxy compounds, bisphenol S type epoxy compounds, and bisphenol AD type epoxy compounds, which are glycidyl ethers such as bisphenol A, F, S, and AD. Etc .; hydrogenated bisphenol A type epoxy compound, hydrogenated bisphenol AD type epoxy compound, etc .; phenol novolac type glycidyl ether (phenol novolac type epoxy compound), cresol novolac type glycidyl ether (cresol novolac type epoxy compound), bisphenol A Novolak type glycidyl ether, etc .; Dicyclopentadiene type glycidyl ether (dicyclopentadiene type epoxy compound); Dihydroxypentadiene type glycidyl ether (dihydroxypentadiene type epoxy compound); Polyhydroxybenzene type glycidyl ether (polyhydroxybenzene type) Epoxy compounds); benzenepolycarboxylic acid type glycidyl esters (benzenepolycarboxylic acid type epoxy compounds); and trisphenol methane type epoxy compounds.
エポキシ化合物は、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
本発明の組成物がエポキシ化合物を含む場合、エポキシ化合物の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、1.0~25.0質量%が好ましく、3.0~20.0質量%がより好ましい。 The epoxy compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
When the composition of the present invention contains an epoxy compound, the content of the epoxy compound is preferably 1.0 to 25.0% by mass, preferably 3.0 to 20.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition. Is more preferable.
本発明の組成物がエポキシ化合物を含む場合、エポキシ化合物の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、1.0~25.0質量%が好ましく、3.0~20.0質量%がより好ましい。 The epoxy compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
When the composition of the present invention contains an epoxy compound, the content of the epoxy compound is preferably 1.0 to 25.0% by mass, preferably 3.0 to 20.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition. Is more preferable.
本発明の組成物は、上述のフェノール化合物及びエポキシ化合物の、少なくとも一方を含むのが好ましい。
この場合、組成物は、上述の通り、フェノール化合物及びエポキシ化合物のうちの、フェノール化合物のみを含んでもよい(エポキシ化合物を実質的に含まなくてもよい)し、エポキシ化合物のみを含んでもよい(フェノール化合物を実質的に含まなくてもよい)し、それぞれの両方を含んでもよい。
本発明の組成物が、エポキシ化合物及びフェノール化合物をそれぞれ含む場合、組成物における、エポキシ化合物の含有量とフェノール化合物の含有量との比は、エポキシ化合物のエポキシ基と、フェノール化合物の水酸基との当量比(エポキシ基の数/水酸基の数)が、30/70~70/30となる量が好ましく、35/65~65/35となる量がより好ましい。
また、本発明の組成物が、エポキシ化合物及びフェノール化合物をそれぞれ含む場合、組成物における、エポキシ化合物の含有量とフェノール化合物の含有量との比は、エポキシ化合物のエポキシ基と、フェノール化合物の活性水素(水酸基における水素原子等)との当量比(エポキシ基の数/活性水素の数)が、30/70~70/30となる量が好ましく、35/65~65/35となる量がより好ましい。 The composition of the present invention preferably contains at least one of the above-mentioned phenol compound and epoxy compound.
In this case, as described above, the composition may contain only the phenol compound among the phenol compound and the epoxy compound (it may be substantially free of the epoxy compound), or may contain only the epoxy compound (it may contain only the epoxy compound). It may be substantially free of phenolic compounds) or both.
When the composition of the present invention contains an epoxy compound and a phenol compound, respectively, the ratio of the content of the epoxy compound to the content of the phenol compound in the composition is the ratio of the epoxy group of the epoxy compound to the hydroxyl group of the phenol compound. The equivalent ratio (number of epoxy groups / number of hydroxyl groups) is preferably 30/70 to 70/30, more preferably 35/65 to 65/35.
When the composition of the present invention contains an epoxy compound and a phenol compound, respectively, the ratio of the content of the epoxy compound to the content of the phenol compound in the composition is the activity of the epoxy group of the epoxy compound and the activity of the phenol compound. The equivalent ratio (number of epoxy groups / number of active hydrogens) with hydrogen (hydrogen atom in hydroxyl group, etc.) is preferably 30/70 to 70/30, and more preferably 35/65 to 65/35. preferable.
この場合、組成物は、上述の通り、フェノール化合物及びエポキシ化合物のうちの、フェノール化合物のみを含んでもよい(エポキシ化合物を実質的に含まなくてもよい)し、エポキシ化合物のみを含んでもよい(フェノール化合物を実質的に含まなくてもよい)し、それぞれの両方を含んでもよい。
本発明の組成物が、エポキシ化合物及びフェノール化合物をそれぞれ含む場合、組成物における、エポキシ化合物の含有量とフェノール化合物の含有量との比は、エポキシ化合物のエポキシ基と、フェノール化合物の水酸基との当量比(エポキシ基の数/水酸基の数)が、30/70~70/30となる量が好ましく、35/65~65/35となる量がより好ましい。
また、本発明の組成物が、エポキシ化合物及びフェノール化合物をそれぞれ含む場合、組成物における、エポキシ化合物の含有量とフェノール化合物の含有量との比は、エポキシ化合物のエポキシ基と、フェノール化合物の活性水素(水酸基における水素原子等)との当量比(エポキシ基の数/活性水素の数)が、30/70~70/30となる量が好ましく、35/65~65/35となる量がより好ましい。 The composition of the present invention preferably contains at least one of the above-mentioned phenol compound and epoxy compound.
In this case, as described above, the composition may contain only the phenol compound among the phenol compound and the epoxy compound (it may be substantially free of the epoxy compound), or may contain only the epoxy compound (it may contain only the epoxy compound). It may be substantially free of phenolic compounds) or both.
When the composition of the present invention contains an epoxy compound and a phenol compound, respectively, the ratio of the content of the epoxy compound to the content of the phenol compound in the composition is the ratio of the epoxy group of the epoxy compound to the hydroxyl group of the phenol compound. The equivalent ratio (number of epoxy groups / number of hydroxyl groups) is preferably 30/70 to 70/30, more preferably 35/65 to 65/35.
When the composition of the present invention contains an epoxy compound and a phenol compound, respectively, the ratio of the content of the epoxy compound to the content of the phenol compound in the composition is the activity of the epoxy group of the epoxy compound and the activity of the phenol compound. The equivalent ratio (number of epoxy groups / number of active hydrogens) with hydrogen (hydrogen atom in hydroxyl group, etc.) is preferably 30/70 to 70/30, and more preferably 35/65 to 65/35. preferable.
また、組成物における、フェノール化合物に含まれる水酸基の数と特定化合物に含まれる水酸基の数とを合計した水酸基数に対する、エポキシ化合物に含まれるエポキシ基の数と特定化合物に含まれるエポキシ基の数とを合計したエポキシ基数の比(エポキシ基の数/水酸基の数)は、30/70~70/30となる量が好ましく、40/60~60/40となる量がより好ましく、42/58~58/42となる量が更に好ましい。
この場合、組成物は、エポキシ化合物及びフェノール化合物の一方のみを含んでいてもよいし、両方とも含んでいてもよいし、両方とも含んでいなくてもよい。 Further, the number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound and the number of epoxy groups contained in the specific compound with respect to the total number of hydroxyl groups contained in the phenol compound and the number of hydroxyl groups contained in the specific compound in the composition. The ratio of the total number of epoxy groups (number of epoxy groups / number of hydroxyl groups) is preferably 30/70 to 70/30, more preferably 40/60 to 60/40, and 42/58. An amount of about 58/42 is more preferable.
In this case, the composition may contain only one of the epoxy compound and the phenol compound, may contain both, or may not contain both.
この場合、組成物は、エポキシ化合物及びフェノール化合物の一方のみを含んでいてもよいし、両方とも含んでいてもよいし、両方とも含んでいなくてもよい。 Further, the number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound and the number of epoxy groups contained in the specific compound with respect to the total number of hydroxyl groups contained in the phenol compound and the number of hydroxyl groups contained in the specific compound in the composition. The ratio of the total number of epoxy groups (number of epoxy groups / number of hydroxyl groups) is preferably 30/70 to 70/30, more preferably 40/60 to 60/40, and 42/58. An amount of about 58/42 is more preferable.
In this case, the composition may contain only one of the epoxy compound and the phenol compound, may contain both, or may not contain both.
また、組成物が、エポキシ基を有する特定化合物、活性水素を有する特定化合物、及び/又は、その他の活性水素含有化合物を含む場合、エポキシ化合物、及び、エポキシ基を有する特定化合物の合計含有量と、フェノール化合物、活性水素を有する特定化合物、及び、その他の活性水素含有化合物の合計含有量との比は、系中のエポキシ基と活性水素(水酸基における水素原子等)との当量比(エポキシ基の数/活性水素の数)が、30/70~70/30となる量が好ましく、40/60~60/40となる量がより好ましく、42/58~58/42となる量が更に好ましい。
When the composition contains a specific compound having an epoxy group, a specific compound having an active hydrogen, and / or other active hydrogen-containing compound, the total content of the epoxy compound and the specific compound having an epoxy group is used. The ratio of the total content of the phenol compound, the specific compound having active hydrogen, and other active hydrogen-containing compounds is the equivalent ratio (epoxide group) of the epoxy group in the system to the active hydrogen (hydrogen atom at the hydroxyl group, etc.). (Number of compounds / number of active hydrogens) is preferably 30/70 to 70/30, more preferably 40/60 to 60/40, and even more preferably 42/58 to 58/42. ..
本発明の組成物が、エポキシ化合物及びフェノール化合物の両方を含む場合、組成物において、フェノール化合物とエポキシ化合物との合計含有量は、固形分の全質量に対して、5~90質量%が好ましく、10~50質量%がより好ましく、15~40質量%が更に好ましい。
When the composition of the present invention contains both an epoxy compound and a phenol compound, the total content of the phenol compound and the epoxy compound in the composition is preferably 5 to 90% by mass with respect to the total mass of the solid content. 10 to 50% by mass is more preferable, and 15 to 40% by mass is further preferable.
〔無機粒子〕
本発明の熱伝導材料形成用組成物は無機粒子を含む。
無機粒子としては、例えば、酸化鉄、シリカ(SiO2)、アルミナ(Al2O3)、TiO2、BaTiO3、ZrO2などの無機酸化物;窒化アルミニウム、窒化ケイ素などの無機窒化物;フッ化カルシウム、フッ化バリウム、硫酸バリウムなどの難溶性のイオン結晶;モンモリロナイトなどの粘土;などの微粒子が挙げられる。 [Inorganic particles]
The composition for forming a heat conductive material of the present invention contains inorganic particles.
Examples of the inorganic particles include inorganic oxides such as iron oxide, silica (SiO 2 ), alumina (Al 2 O 3 ), TiO 2 , BaTIO 3 , and ZrO 2 ; inorganic nitrides such as aluminum nitride and silicon nitride; Examples thereof include fine particles such as sparingly soluble ionic crystals such as calcium oxide, barium fluoride, and barium sulfate; and clays such as montmorillonite.
本発明の熱伝導材料形成用組成物は無機粒子を含む。
無機粒子としては、例えば、酸化鉄、シリカ(SiO2)、アルミナ(Al2O3)、TiO2、BaTiO3、ZrO2などの無機酸化物;窒化アルミニウム、窒化ケイ素などの無機窒化物;フッ化カルシウム、フッ化バリウム、硫酸バリウムなどの難溶性のイオン結晶;モンモリロナイトなどの粘土;などの微粒子が挙げられる。 [Inorganic particles]
The composition for forming a heat conductive material of the present invention contains inorganic particles.
Examples of the inorganic particles include inorganic oxides such as iron oxide, silica (SiO 2 ), alumina (Al 2 O 3 ), TiO 2 , BaTIO 3 , and ZrO 2 ; inorganic nitrides such as aluminum nitride and silicon nitride; Examples thereof include fine particles such as sparingly soluble ionic crystals such as calcium oxide, barium fluoride, and barium sulfate; and clays such as montmorillonite.
本発明においては得られる熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れるとの理由から、上記無機粒子が、無機窒化物又は無機酸化物であることが好ましく、無機窒化物であることがより好ましい。
無機窒化物としては、具体的には、例えば、窒化ホウ素(BN)、窒化炭素(C3N4)、窒化ケイ素(Si3N4)、窒化ガリウム(GaN)、窒化インジウム(InN)、窒化アルミニウム(AlN)、窒化クロム(Cr2N)、窒化銅(Cu3N)、窒化鉄(Fe4N又はFe3N)、窒化ランタン(LaN)、窒化リチウム(Li3N)、窒化マグネシウム(Mg3N2)、窒化モリブデン(Mo2N)、窒化ニオブ(NbN)、窒化タンタル(TaN)、窒化チタン(TiN)、窒化タングステン(W2N、WN2、又は、WN)、窒化イットリウム(YN)、及び、窒化ジルコニウム(ZrN)等が挙げられる。
上記の無機窒化物は、単独で用いてもよく、複数を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
無機窒化物は、得られる熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる点で、ホウ素原子、アルミニウム原子、及び、珪素原子からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましい。より具体的には、無機窒化物は、窒化ホウ素、窒化アルミニウム、又は、窒化ケイ素であるのが好ましく、窒化ホウ素又は窒化アルミニウムであるのがより好ましく、窒化ホウ素であるのが更に好ましい。 In the present invention, the inorganic particles are preferably an inorganic nitride or an inorganic oxide, and more preferably an inorganic nitride, because the obtained heat conductive material has better thermal conductivity.
Specific examples of the inorganic nitride include boron nitride (BN), carbon nitride (C 3 N 4 ), silicon nitride (Si 3 N 4 ), gallium nitride (GaN), indium nitride (InN), and nitride. Aluminum (AlN), Chromium Nitride (Cr 2 N), Copper Nitride (Cu 3 N), Iron Nitride (Fe 4 N or Fe 3 N), Lantern Nitride (La N), Lithium Nitride (Li 3 N), Magnesium Nitride ( Mg 3 N 2 ), molybdenum nitride (Mo 2 N), niobium nitride (NbN), tantalum nitride (TaN), titanium nitride (TiN), tungsten nitride (W 2 N, WN 2 , or WN), yttrium nitride (WN) YN), zirconium nitride (ZrN) and the like can be mentioned.
The above-mentioned inorganic nitrides may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The inorganic nitride preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a boron atom, an aluminum atom, and a silicon atom in that the obtained heat conductive material has more excellent thermal conductivity. More specifically, the inorganic nitride is preferably boron nitride, aluminum nitride, or silicon nitride, more preferably boron nitride or aluminum nitride, and even more preferably boron nitride.
無機窒化物としては、具体的には、例えば、窒化ホウ素(BN)、窒化炭素(C3N4)、窒化ケイ素(Si3N4)、窒化ガリウム(GaN)、窒化インジウム(InN)、窒化アルミニウム(AlN)、窒化クロム(Cr2N)、窒化銅(Cu3N)、窒化鉄(Fe4N又はFe3N)、窒化ランタン(LaN)、窒化リチウム(Li3N)、窒化マグネシウム(Mg3N2)、窒化モリブデン(Mo2N)、窒化ニオブ(NbN)、窒化タンタル(TaN)、窒化チタン(TiN)、窒化タングステン(W2N、WN2、又は、WN)、窒化イットリウム(YN)、及び、窒化ジルコニウム(ZrN)等が挙げられる。
上記の無機窒化物は、単独で用いてもよく、複数を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
無機窒化物は、得られる熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる点で、ホウ素原子、アルミニウム原子、及び、珪素原子からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましい。より具体的には、無機窒化物は、窒化ホウ素、窒化アルミニウム、又は、窒化ケイ素であるのが好ましく、窒化ホウ素又は窒化アルミニウムであるのがより好ましく、窒化ホウ素であるのが更に好ましい。 In the present invention, the inorganic particles are preferably an inorganic nitride or an inorganic oxide, and more preferably an inorganic nitride, because the obtained heat conductive material has better thermal conductivity.
Specific examples of the inorganic nitride include boron nitride (BN), carbon nitride (C 3 N 4 ), silicon nitride (Si 3 N 4 ), gallium nitride (GaN), indium nitride (InN), and nitride. Aluminum (AlN), Chromium Nitride (Cr 2 N), Copper Nitride (Cu 3 N), Iron Nitride (Fe 4 N or Fe 3 N), Lantern Nitride (La N), Lithium Nitride (Li 3 N), Magnesium Nitride ( Mg 3 N 2 ), molybdenum nitride (Mo 2 N), niobium nitride (NbN), tantalum nitride (TaN), titanium nitride (TiN), tungsten nitride (W 2 N, WN 2 , or WN), yttrium nitride (WN) YN), zirconium nitride (ZrN) and the like can be mentioned.
The above-mentioned inorganic nitrides may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The inorganic nitride preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a boron atom, an aluminum atom, and a silicon atom in that the obtained heat conductive material has more excellent thermal conductivity. More specifically, the inorganic nitride is preferably boron nitride, aluminum nitride, or silicon nitride, more preferably boron nitride or aluminum nitride, and even more preferably boron nitride.
無機粒子の形状は特に限定されず、例えば、米粒状、球形状、立方体状、紡錘形状、鱗片状、凝集状、及び、不定形状等が挙げられる。中でも粒子の形状は鱗片状と凝集状が好ましい。
また、形状の異なる無機粒子を1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。 The shape of the inorganic particles is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include rice granules, spheres, cubes, spindles, scales, agglutinates, and indefinite shapes. Of these, the shape of the particles is preferably scaly and agglutinating.
Further, the inorganic particles having different shapes may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
また、形状の異なる無機粒子を1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。 The shape of the inorganic particles is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include rice granules, spheres, cubes, spindles, scales, agglutinates, and indefinite shapes. Of these, the shape of the particles is preferably scaly and agglutinating.
Further, the inorganic particles having different shapes may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
無機粒子の大きさは特に限定されないが、無機粒子の分散性がより優れる点で、無機粒子の平均粒径は500μm以下が好ましく、300μm以下がより好ましく、200μm以下が更に好ましい。下限は特に限定されないが、取り扱い性の点で、10nm以上が好ましく、100nm以上がより好ましい。
上記平均粒径の測定方法としては、電子顕微鏡を用いて、100個の無機粒子を無作為に選択して、それぞれの無機粒子の粒径(長径)を測定し、それらを算術平均して求める。なお、市販品を用いる場合、カタログ値を用いてもよい。 The size of the inorganic particles is not particularly limited, but the average particle size of the inorganic particles is preferably 500 μm or less, more preferably 300 μm or less, still more preferably 200 μm or less, in that the dispersibility of the inorganic particles is more excellent. The lower limit is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of handleability, 10 nm or more is preferable, and 100 nm or more is more preferable.
As the method for measuring the average particle size, 100 inorganic particles are randomly selected using an electron microscope, the particle size (major axis) of each inorganic particle is measured, and they are calculated by arithmetic mean. .. When using a commercially available product, the catalog value may be used.
上記平均粒径の測定方法としては、電子顕微鏡を用いて、100個の無機粒子を無作為に選択して、それぞれの無機粒子の粒径(長径)を測定し、それらを算術平均して求める。なお、市販品を用いる場合、カタログ値を用いてもよい。 The size of the inorganic particles is not particularly limited, but the average particle size of the inorganic particles is preferably 500 μm or less, more preferably 300 μm or less, still more preferably 200 μm or less, in that the dispersibility of the inorganic particles is more excellent. The lower limit is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of handleability, 10 nm or more is preferable, and 100 nm or more is more preferable.
As the method for measuring the average particle size, 100 inorganic particles are randomly selected using an electron microscope, the particle size (major axis) of each inorganic particle is measured, and they are calculated by arithmetic mean. .. When using a commercially available product, the catalog value may be used.
本発明の組成物中、無機粒子の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、60~90質量%が好ましく、70~85質量%がより好ましく、75~80質量%が更に好ましい。
本明細書で組成物の固形分とは、組成物が溶媒を含有する場合に、溶媒を除いたすべての成分を意図し、溶媒以外の成分であれば液状成分であっても固形分とみなす。 In the composition of the present invention, the content of the inorganic particles is preferably 60 to 90% by mass, more preferably 70 to 85% by mass, still more preferably 75 to 80% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
In the present specification, the solid content of the composition is intended to mean all components excluding the solvent when the composition contains a solvent, and if it is a component other than the solvent, it is regarded as a solid content even if it is a liquid component. ..
本明細書で組成物の固形分とは、組成物が溶媒を含有する場合に、溶媒を除いたすべての成分を意図し、溶媒以外の成分であれば液状成分であっても固形分とみなす。 In the composition of the present invention, the content of the inorganic particles is preferably 60 to 90% by mass, more preferably 70 to 85% by mass, still more preferably 75 to 80% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
In the present specification, the solid content of the composition is intended to mean all components excluding the solvent when the composition contains a solvent, and if it is a component other than the solvent, it is regarded as a solid content even if it is a liquid component. ..
熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる点で、組成物に含まれる無機粒子の平均粒径は3μmより大きいことが好ましく、4~50μmがより好ましい。
The average particle size of the inorganic particles contained in the composition is preferably larger than 3 μm, more preferably 4 to 50 μm, in that the heat conductive material is more excellent in heat conductivity.
また、無機物は、平均粒径が異なる無機物をそれぞれ有するのも好ましく、例えば、平均粒径が20μm以上の無機物である無機物Xと、平均粒径が20μm未満の無機物である無機物Yとの両方を含むのも好ましい。
上記無機物Xの平均粒径は、20~300μmが好ましく、30~200μmがより好ましい。上記無機物Yの平均粒径は、10nm以上20μm未満が好ましく、100nm以上15μm以下がより好ましい。
無機物Xは、無機窒化物又は無機酸化物が好ましく、無機窒化物がより好ましく、窒化ホウ素が更に好ましい。
無機物Yは、無機窒化物又は無機酸化物が好ましく、窒化ホウ素又は酸化アルミニウムがより好ましく、窒化ホウ素が更に好ましい。
無機物X及び無機物Yは、それぞれ、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
無機物中、無機物Xの含有量と無機物Yの含有量との質量比(無機物Xの含有量/無機物Yの含有量)は、50/50~99/1が好ましく、75/25~97/3が更に好ましい。
また、組成物により形成される熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れるとの理由から、無機粒子中の窒化ホウ素の含有量は55%以上が好ましく、75%以上がさらに好ましい。 Further, the inorganic substances preferably have inorganic substances having different average particle diameters. For example, both the inorganic substance X having an average particle size of 20 μm or more and the inorganic substance Y having an average particle size of less than 20 μm are used. It is also preferable to include it.
The average particle size of the inorganic substance X is preferably 20 to 300 μm, more preferably 30 to 200 μm. The average particle size of the inorganic substance Y is preferably 10 nm or more and less than 20 μm, and more preferably 100 nm or more and 15 μm or less.
The inorganic substance X is preferably an inorganic nitride or an inorganic oxide, more preferably an inorganic nitride, and even more preferably boron nitride.
The inorganic substance Y is preferably an inorganic nitride or an inorganic oxide, more preferably boron nitride or aluminum oxide, and even more preferably boron nitride.
As the inorganic substance X and the inorganic substance Y, each of them may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The mass ratio of the content of the inorganic substance X to the content of the inorganic substance Y (content of the inorganic substance X / content of the inorganic substance Y) is preferably 50/50 to 99/1, and 75/25 to 97/3. Is more preferable.
Further, the content of boron nitride in the inorganic particles is preferably 55% or more, more preferably 75% or more, because the heat conductive material formed by the composition has more excellent thermal conductivity.
上記無機物Xの平均粒径は、20~300μmが好ましく、30~200μmがより好ましい。上記無機物Yの平均粒径は、10nm以上20μm未満が好ましく、100nm以上15μm以下がより好ましい。
無機物Xは、無機窒化物又は無機酸化物が好ましく、無機窒化物がより好ましく、窒化ホウ素が更に好ましい。
無機物Yは、無機窒化物又は無機酸化物が好ましく、窒化ホウ素又は酸化アルミニウムがより好ましく、窒化ホウ素が更に好ましい。
無機物X及び無機物Yは、それぞれ、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
無機物中、無機物Xの含有量と無機物Yの含有量との質量比(無機物Xの含有量/無機物Yの含有量)は、50/50~99/1が好ましく、75/25~97/3が更に好ましい。
また、組成物により形成される熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れるとの理由から、無機粒子中の窒化ホウ素の含有量は55%以上が好ましく、75%以上がさらに好ましい。 Further, the inorganic substances preferably have inorganic substances having different average particle diameters. For example, both the inorganic substance X having an average particle size of 20 μm or more and the inorganic substance Y having an average particle size of less than 20 μm are used. It is also preferable to include it.
The average particle size of the inorganic substance X is preferably 20 to 300 μm, more preferably 30 to 200 μm. The average particle size of the inorganic substance Y is preferably 10 nm or more and less than 20 μm, and more preferably 100 nm or more and 15 μm or less.
The inorganic substance X is preferably an inorganic nitride or an inorganic oxide, more preferably an inorganic nitride, and even more preferably boron nitride.
The inorganic substance Y is preferably an inorganic nitride or an inorganic oxide, more preferably boron nitride or aluminum oxide, and even more preferably boron nitride.
As the inorganic substance X and the inorganic substance Y, each of them may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The mass ratio of the content of the inorganic substance X to the content of the inorganic substance Y (content of the inorganic substance X / content of the inorganic substance Y) is preferably 50/50 to 99/1, and 75/25 to 97/3. Is more preferable.
Further, the content of boron nitride in the inorganic particles is preferably 55% or more, more preferably 75% or more, because the heat conductive material formed by the composition has more excellent thermal conductivity.
〔硬化促進剤〕
本発明の組成物は、更に、熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる点から、硬化促進剤を含んでいてもよい。
硬化促進剤としては、例えば、トリフェニルホスフィン、三フッ化ホウ素アミン錯体、及び、特開2012-67225号公報の段落0052に記載の化合物が挙げられる。その他にも、2-メチルイミダゾール(商品名;2MZ)、2-ウンデシルイミダゾール(商品名;C11-Z)、2-ヘプタデシルイミダゾール(商品名;C17Z)、1,2-ジメチルイミダゾール(商品名;1.2DMZ)、2-エチル-4-メチルイミダゾール(商品名;2E4MZ)、2-フェニルイミダゾール(商品名;2PZ)、2-フェニル-4-メチルイミダゾール(商品名;2P4MZ)、1-ベンジル-2-メチルイミダゾール(商品名;1B2MZ)、1-ベンジル-2-フェニルイミダゾール(商品名;1B2PZ)、1-シアノエチル-2-メチルイミダゾール(商品名;2MZ-CN)、1-シアノエチル-2-ウンデシルイミダゾール(商品名;C11Z-CN)、1-シアノエチル-2-フェニルイミダゾリウムトリメリテイト(商品名;2PZCNS-PW)、2,4-ジアミノ-6-[2’-メチルイミダゾリル-(1’)]-エチル-s-トリアジン(商品名;2MZ-A)、2,4-ジアミノ-6-[2’-ウンデシルイミダゾリル-(1’)]-エチル-s-トリアジン(商品名;C11Z-A)、2,4-ジアミノ-6-[2’-エチル-4’-メチルイミダゾリル-(1’)]-エチル-s-トリアジン(商品名;2E4MZ-A)、2,4-ジアミノ-6-[2’-メチルイミダゾリル-(1’)]-エチル-s-トリアジンイソシアヌル酸付加物(商品名;2MA-OK)、2-フェニル-4,5-ジヒドロキシメチルイミダゾール(商品名;2PHZ-PW)、2-フェニル-4-メチル-5-ヒドロキシメチルイミダゾール(商品名;2P4MHZ-PW)、及び、1-シアノエチル-2-フェニルイミダゾール(商品名;2PZ-CN)などのイミダゾール系硬化促進剤等が挙げられる(いずれも四国化成工業(株)製)。
硬化促進剤は、1種単独で使用してもよく2種以上使用してもよい。
組成物が硬化促進剤を含む場合、エポキシ化合物及びエポキシ基を有する特定化合物の合計含有量に対する、硬化促進剤の含有量は、0.01~10質量%が好ましく、0.1~5質量%がより好ましい。 [Curing accelerator]
The composition of the present invention may further contain a curing accelerator because the heat conductive material is more excellent in heat conductivity.
Examples of the curing accelerator include triphenylphosphine, a boron trifluoride amine complex, and the compounds described in paragraph 0052 of JP2012-67225A. In addition, 2-methylimidazole (trade name; 2MZ), 2-undecylimidazole (trade name: C11-Z), 2-heptadecylimidazole (trade name: C17Z), 1,2-dimethylimidazole (trade name). 1.2DMZ), 2-ethyl-4-methylimidazole (trade name: 2E4MZ), 2-phenylimidazole (trade name: 2PZ), 2-phenyl-4-methylimidazole (trade name: 2P4MZ), 1-benzyl -2-Methylimidazole (trade name: 1B2MZ), 1-benzyl-2-phenylimidazole (trade name: 1B2PZ), 1-cyanoethyl-2-methylimidazole (trade name: 2MZ-CN), 1-cyanoethyl-2- Undecylimidazole (trade name: C11Z-CN), 1-cyanoethyl-2-phenylimidazolium trimerite (trade name: 2PZCNS-PW), 2,4-diamino-6- [2'-methylimidazolyl- (1) ')]-Ethyl-s-triazine (trade name; 2MZ-A), 2,4-diamino-6- [2'-undecylimidazolyl- (1')]-ethyl-s-triazine (trade name; C11Z) -A), 2,4-diamino-6- [2'-ethyl-4'-methylimidazolyl- (1')]-ethyl-s-triazine (trade name; 2E4MZ-A), 2,4-diamino- 6- [2'-methylimidazolyl- (1')] -ethyl-s-triazine isocyanuric acid adduct (trade name; 2MA-OK), 2-phenyl-4,5-dihydroxymethylimidazole (trade name; 2PHZ-) PW), 2-phenyl-4-methyl-5-hydroxymethylimidazole (trade name: 2P4MHZ-PW), and imidazole-based curing accelerators such as 1-cyanoethyl-2-phenylimidazole (trade name: 2PZ-CN). Etc. (all manufactured by Shikoku Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.).
The curing accelerator may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
When the composition contains a curing accelerator, the content of the curing accelerator is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass, based on the total content of the epoxy compound and the specific compound having an epoxy group. Is more preferable.
本発明の組成物は、更に、熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる点から、硬化促進剤を含んでいてもよい。
硬化促進剤としては、例えば、トリフェニルホスフィン、三フッ化ホウ素アミン錯体、及び、特開2012-67225号公報の段落0052に記載の化合物が挙げられる。その他にも、2-メチルイミダゾール(商品名;2MZ)、2-ウンデシルイミダゾール(商品名;C11-Z)、2-ヘプタデシルイミダゾール(商品名;C17Z)、1,2-ジメチルイミダゾール(商品名;1.2DMZ)、2-エチル-4-メチルイミダゾール(商品名;2E4MZ)、2-フェニルイミダゾール(商品名;2PZ)、2-フェニル-4-メチルイミダゾール(商品名;2P4MZ)、1-ベンジル-2-メチルイミダゾール(商品名;1B2MZ)、1-ベンジル-2-フェニルイミダゾール(商品名;1B2PZ)、1-シアノエチル-2-メチルイミダゾール(商品名;2MZ-CN)、1-シアノエチル-2-ウンデシルイミダゾール(商品名;C11Z-CN)、1-シアノエチル-2-フェニルイミダゾリウムトリメリテイト(商品名;2PZCNS-PW)、2,4-ジアミノ-6-[2’-メチルイミダゾリル-(1’)]-エチル-s-トリアジン(商品名;2MZ-A)、2,4-ジアミノ-6-[2’-ウンデシルイミダゾリル-(1’)]-エチル-s-トリアジン(商品名;C11Z-A)、2,4-ジアミノ-6-[2’-エチル-4’-メチルイミダゾリル-(1’)]-エチル-s-トリアジン(商品名;2E4MZ-A)、2,4-ジアミノ-6-[2’-メチルイミダゾリル-(1’)]-エチル-s-トリアジンイソシアヌル酸付加物(商品名;2MA-OK)、2-フェニル-4,5-ジヒドロキシメチルイミダゾール(商品名;2PHZ-PW)、2-フェニル-4-メチル-5-ヒドロキシメチルイミダゾール(商品名;2P4MHZ-PW)、及び、1-シアノエチル-2-フェニルイミダゾール(商品名;2PZ-CN)などのイミダゾール系硬化促進剤等が挙げられる(いずれも四国化成工業(株)製)。
硬化促進剤は、1種単独で使用してもよく2種以上使用してもよい。
組成物が硬化促進剤を含む場合、エポキシ化合物及びエポキシ基を有する特定化合物の合計含有量に対する、硬化促進剤の含有量は、0.01~10質量%が好ましく、0.1~5質量%がより好ましい。 [Curing accelerator]
The composition of the present invention may further contain a curing accelerator because the heat conductive material is more excellent in heat conductivity.
Examples of the curing accelerator include triphenylphosphine, a boron trifluoride amine complex, and the compounds described in paragraph 0052 of JP2012-67225A. In addition, 2-methylimidazole (trade name; 2MZ), 2-undecylimidazole (trade name: C11-Z), 2-heptadecylimidazole (trade name: C17Z), 1,2-dimethylimidazole (trade name). 1.2DMZ), 2-ethyl-4-methylimidazole (trade name: 2E4MZ), 2-phenylimidazole (trade name: 2PZ), 2-phenyl-4-methylimidazole (trade name: 2P4MZ), 1-benzyl -2-Methylimidazole (trade name: 1B2MZ), 1-benzyl-2-phenylimidazole (trade name: 1B2PZ), 1-cyanoethyl-2-methylimidazole (trade name: 2MZ-CN), 1-cyanoethyl-2- Undecylimidazole (trade name: C11Z-CN), 1-cyanoethyl-2-phenylimidazolium trimerite (trade name: 2PZCNS-PW), 2,4-diamino-6- [2'-methylimidazolyl- (1) ')]-Ethyl-s-triazine (trade name; 2MZ-A), 2,4-diamino-6- [2'-undecylimidazolyl- (1')]-ethyl-s-triazine (trade name; C11Z) -A), 2,4-diamino-6- [2'-ethyl-4'-methylimidazolyl- (1')]-ethyl-s-triazine (trade name; 2E4MZ-A), 2,4-diamino- 6- [2'-methylimidazolyl- (1')] -ethyl-s-triazine isocyanuric acid adduct (trade name; 2MA-OK), 2-phenyl-4,5-dihydroxymethylimidazole (trade name; 2PHZ-) PW), 2-phenyl-4-methyl-5-hydroxymethylimidazole (trade name: 2P4MHZ-PW), and imidazole-based curing accelerators such as 1-cyanoethyl-2-phenylimidazole (trade name: 2PZ-CN). Etc. (all manufactured by Shikoku Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.).
The curing accelerator may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
When the composition contains a curing accelerator, the content of the curing accelerator is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass, based on the total content of the epoxy compound and the specific compound having an epoxy group. Is more preferable.
〔分散剤〕
本発明の組成物は、更に、分散剤を含んでいてもよい。
組成物が分散剤を含むと、組成物中での無機物の分散性が向上し、より優れた熱伝導率と接着性を実現できる。 [Dispersant]
The composition of the present invention may further contain a dispersant.
When the composition contains a dispersant, the dispersibility of the inorganic substance in the composition is improved, and more excellent thermal conductivity and adhesiveness can be realized.
本発明の組成物は、更に、分散剤を含んでいてもよい。
組成物が分散剤を含むと、組成物中での無機物の分散性が向上し、より優れた熱伝導率と接着性を実現できる。 [Dispersant]
The composition of the present invention may further contain a dispersant.
When the composition contains a dispersant, the dispersibility of the inorganic substance in the composition is improved, and more excellent thermal conductivity and adhesiveness can be realized.
分散剤としては、通常使用される分散剤から適宜選択できる。例えば、DISPERBYK-106(BYK-Chemie GmbH製)、DISPERBYK-111(BYK-Chemie GmbH製)、ED-113(楠本化成株式会社製)、アジスパーPN-411(味の素ファインテクノ製)、及び、REB122-4(日立化成工業製)等が挙げられる。
分散剤は1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
本発明の組成物が分散剤を含む場合、無機物の含有量に対する、分散剤の含有量は、0.01~10質量%が好ましく、0.1~5質量%がより好ましい。 The dispersant can be appropriately selected from commonly used dispersants. For example, DISPERBYK-106 (manufactured by BYK-Chemie GmbH), DISPERBYK-111 (manufactured by BYK-Chemie GmbH), ED-113 (manufactured by Kusumoto Kasei Co., Ltd.), Ajisper PN-411 (manufactured by Ajinomoto Fine-Techno), and REB122- 4 (manufactured by Hitachi Kasei Kogyo) and the like.
The dispersant may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
When the composition of the present invention contains a dispersant, the content of the dispersant is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass, based on the content of the inorganic substance.
分散剤は1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
本発明の組成物が分散剤を含む場合、無機物の含有量に対する、分散剤の含有量は、0.01~10質量%が好ましく、0.1~5質量%がより好ましい。 The dispersant can be appropriately selected from commonly used dispersants. For example, DISPERBYK-106 (manufactured by BYK-Chemie GmbH), DISPERBYK-111 (manufactured by BYK-Chemie GmbH), ED-113 (manufactured by Kusumoto Kasei Co., Ltd.), Ajisper PN-411 (manufactured by Ajinomoto Fine-Techno), and REB122- 4 (manufactured by Hitachi Kasei Kogyo) and the like.
The dispersant may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
When the composition of the present invention contains a dispersant, the content of the dispersant is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass, based on the content of the inorganic substance.
〔溶媒〕
本発明の組成物は、更に、溶媒を含んでいてもよい。
溶媒の種類は特に制限されず、有機溶媒であるのが好ましい。有機溶媒としては、例えば、シクロペンタノン、シクロヘキサノン、酢酸エチル、メチルエチルケトン、ジクロロメタン、及び、テトラヒドロフラン等が挙げられる。
本発明の組成物が溶媒を含む場合、溶媒の含有量は、組成物の固形分濃度を、20~90質量%とする量が好ましく、30~85質量%とする量がより好ましく、40~85質量%とする量が更に好ましい。 〔solvent〕
The composition of the present invention may further contain a solvent.
The type of solvent is not particularly limited, and an organic solvent is preferable. Examples of the organic solvent include cyclopentanone, cyclohexanone, ethyl acetate, methyl ethyl ketone, dichloromethane, tetrahydrofuran and the like.
When the composition of the present invention contains a solvent, the content of the solvent is preferably such that the solid content concentration of the composition is 20 to 90% by mass, more preferably 30 to 85% by mass, and 40 to 40 to 80%. An amount of 85% by mass is more preferable.
本発明の組成物は、更に、溶媒を含んでいてもよい。
溶媒の種類は特に制限されず、有機溶媒であるのが好ましい。有機溶媒としては、例えば、シクロペンタノン、シクロヘキサノン、酢酸エチル、メチルエチルケトン、ジクロロメタン、及び、テトラヒドロフラン等が挙げられる。
本発明の組成物が溶媒を含む場合、溶媒の含有量は、組成物の固形分濃度を、20~90質量%とする量が好ましく、30~85質量%とする量がより好ましく、40~85質量%とする量が更に好ましい。 〔solvent〕
The composition of the present invention may further contain a solvent.
The type of solvent is not particularly limited, and an organic solvent is preferable. Examples of the organic solvent include cyclopentanone, cyclohexanone, ethyl acetate, methyl ethyl ketone, dichloromethane, tetrahydrofuran and the like.
When the composition of the present invention contains a solvent, the content of the solvent is preferably such that the solid content concentration of the composition is 20 to 90% by mass, more preferably 30 to 85% by mass, and 40 to 40 to 80%. An amount of 85% by mass is more preferable.
〔組成物の製造方法〕
本発明の組成物の製造方法は特に制限されず、公知の方法を採用でき、例えば、上述した各種成分を混合して製造できる。混合する際には、各種成分を一括で混合しても、順次混合してもよい。
成分を混合する方法に特に制限はなく、公知の方法を使用できる。混合に使用する混合装置は、液中分散機が好ましく、例えば、自転公転ミキサー、高速回転せん断型撹拌機等の撹拌機、コロイドミル、ロールミル、高圧噴射式分散機、超音波分散機、ビーズミル、及び、ホモジナイザーが挙げられる。混合装置は1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上使用してもよい。混合の前後、及び/又は、同時に、脱気処理を行ってもよい。 [Method for producing composition]
The method for producing the composition of the present invention is not particularly limited, and a known method can be adopted. For example, the above-mentioned various components can be mixed and produced. When mixing, various components may be mixed all at once or sequentially.
The method of mixing the components is not particularly limited, and a known method can be used. The mixer used for mixing is preferably a liquid disperser. And a homogenizer. The mixing device may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Deaeration treatment may be performed before and after mixing and / or at the same time.
本発明の組成物の製造方法は特に制限されず、公知の方法を採用でき、例えば、上述した各種成分を混合して製造できる。混合する際には、各種成分を一括で混合しても、順次混合してもよい。
成分を混合する方法に特に制限はなく、公知の方法を使用できる。混合に使用する混合装置は、液中分散機が好ましく、例えば、自転公転ミキサー、高速回転せん断型撹拌機等の撹拌機、コロイドミル、ロールミル、高圧噴射式分散機、超音波分散機、ビーズミル、及び、ホモジナイザーが挙げられる。混合装置は1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上使用してもよい。混合の前後、及び/又は、同時に、脱気処理を行ってもよい。 [Method for producing composition]
The method for producing the composition of the present invention is not particularly limited, and a known method can be adopted. For example, the above-mentioned various components can be mixed and produced. When mixing, various components may be mixed all at once or sequentially.
The method of mixing the components is not particularly limited, and a known method can be used. The mixer used for mixing is preferably a liquid disperser. And a homogenizer. The mixing device may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Deaeration treatment may be performed before and after mixing and / or at the same time.
〔熱伝導材料の製造方法〕
本発明の組成物を硬化処理して熱伝導材料が得られる。
本発明の組成物の硬化方法は、特に制限されないが、熱硬化反応が好ましい。
熱硬化反応の際の加熱温度は特に制限されない。例えば、50~250℃の範囲で適宜選択すればよい。また、熱硬化反応を行う際には、温度の異なる加熱処理を複数回にわたって実施してもよい。
硬化処理は、フィルム状又はシート状とした組成物について行うのが好ましい。具体的には、例えば、組成物を塗布成膜し硬化反応を行えばよい。
硬化処理を行う際は、基材上に組成物を塗布して塗膜を形成してから硬化させるのが好ましい。この際、基材上に形成した塗膜に、更に異なる基材を接触させてから硬化処理を行ってもよい。硬化後に得られた硬化物(熱伝導材料)は、基材の一方又は両方と分離してもよいし分離しなくてもよい。
また、硬化処理を行う際に、別々の基材上に組成物を塗布して、それぞれ塗膜を形成し、得られた塗膜同士を接触させた状態で硬化処理を行ってもよい。硬化後に得られた硬化物(熱伝導材料)は、基材の一方又は両方と分離してもよいし分離しなくてもよい。 [Manufacturing method of heat conductive material]
The composition of the present invention is cured to obtain a heat conductive material.
The curing method of the composition of the present invention is not particularly limited, but a thermosetting reaction is preferable.
The heating temperature during the thermosetting reaction is not particularly limited. For example, it may be appropriately selected in the range of 50 to 250 ° C. Further, when the thermosetting reaction is carried out, heat treatments having different temperatures may be carried out a plurality of times.
The curing treatment is preferably performed on a film-like or sheet-like composition. Specifically, for example, the composition may be applied to form a film and a curing reaction may be carried out.
When performing the curing treatment, it is preferable to apply the composition on the substrate to form a coating film and then cure. At this time, a different base material may be brought into contact with the coating film formed on the base material, and then the curing treatment may be performed. The cured product (heat conductive material) obtained after curing may or may not be separated from one or both of the substrates.
Further, when performing the curing treatment, the composition may be applied on different substrates to form coating films, and the curing treatment may be performed in a state where the obtained coating films are in contact with each other. The cured product (heat conductive material) obtained after curing may or may not be separated from one or both of the substrates.
本発明の組成物を硬化処理して熱伝導材料が得られる。
本発明の組成物の硬化方法は、特に制限されないが、熱硬化反応が好ましい。
熱硬化反応の際の加熱温度は特に制限されない。例えば、50~250℃の範囲で適宜選択すればよい。また、熱硬化反応を行う際には、温度の異なる加熱処理を複数回にわたって実施してもよい。
硬化処理は、フィルム状又はシート状とした組成物について行うのが好ましい。具体的には、例えば、組成物を塗布成膜し硬化反応を行えばよい。
硬化処理を行う際は、基材上に組成物を塗布して塗膜を形成してから硬化させるのが好ましい。この際、基材上に形成した塗膜に、更に異なる基材を接触させてから硬化処理を行ってもよい。硬化後に得られた硬化物(熱伝導材料)は、基材の一方又は両方と分離してもよいし分離しなくてもよい。
また、硬化処理を行う際に、別々の基材上に組成物を塗布して、それぞれ塗膜を形成し、得られた塗膜同士を接触させた状態で硬化処理を行ってもよい。硬化後に得られた硬化物(熱伝導材料)は、基材の一方又は両方と分離してもよいし分離しなくてもよい。 [Manufacturing method of heat conductive material]
The composition of the present invention is cured to obtain a heat conductive material.
The curing method of the composition of the present invention is not particularly limited, but a thermosetting reaction is preferable.
The heating temperature during the thermosetting reaction is not particularly limited. For example, it may be appropriately selected in the range of 50 to 250 ° C. Further, when the thermosetting reaction is carried out, heat treatments having different temperatures may be carried out a plurality of times.
The curing treatment is preferably performed on a film-like or sheet-like composition. Specifically, for example, the composition may be applied to form a film and a curing reaction may be carried out.
When performing the curing treatment, it is preferable to apply the composition on the substrate to form a coating film and then cure. At this time, a different base material may be brought into contact with the coating film formed on the base material, and then the curing treatment may be performed. The cured product (heat conductive material) obtained after curing may or may not be separated from one or both of the substrates.
Further, when performing the curing treatment, the composition may be applied on different substrates to form coating films, and the curing treatment may be performed in a state where the obtained coating films are in contact with each other. The cured product (heat conductive material) obtained after curing may or may not be separated from one or both of the substrates.
硬化処理は、組成物を半硬化状態にした時点で終了してもよい。また、組成物を半硬化状態にした後、更に硬化処理を実施して、硬化を完全にしてもよい。
組成物を半硬化状態にするための硬化処理(以下、「半硬化処理」とも略す。)と、硬化を完全にするための硬化処理(以下、「本硬化処理」とも略す。)とを、別々の工程に分けて行ってもよい。 The curing treatment may be completed when the composition is in a semi-cured state. Further, after the composition is made into a semi-cured state, further curing treatment may be carried out to complete the curing.
A curing treatment for bringing the composition into a semi-hardened state (hereinafter, also abbreviated as "semi-hardening treatment") and a curing treatment for completely curing (hereinafter, also abbreviated as "main curing treatment") are performed. It may be divided into separate steps.
組成物を半硬化状態にするための硬化処理(以下、「半硬化処理」とも略す。)と、硬化を完全にするための硬化処理(以下、「本硬化処理」とも略す。)とを、別々の工程に分けて行ってもよい。 The curing treatment may be completed when the composition is in a semi-cured state. Further, after the composition is made into a semi-cured state, further curing treatment may be carried out to complete the curing.
A curing treatment for bringing the composition into a semi-hardened state (hereinafter, also abbreviated as "semi-hardening treatment") and a curing treatment for completely curing (hereinafter, also abbreviated as "main curing treatment") are performed. It may be divided into separate steps.
例えば、半硬化処理では、基材上に組成物を塗布して塗膜を形成した後、そのまま無加圧で基材上の塗膜を加熱等して半硬化状態の熱伝導材料(以下、「半硬化膜」とも略す。)としてもよいし、プレス加工を併用しながら基材上の塗膜を加熱等して半硬化膜としてもよい。プレス加工をする場合、プレス加工は、上記加熱等の、前後に実施されてもよいし、最中に実施されてもよい。半硬化処理においてプレス加工を実施すると、得られる半硬化膜の膜厚の調整、及び/又は、半硬化膜中のボイド量の低減をしやすい場合がある。
半硬化処理において、別々の基材上に形成した塗膜同士を積層させた状態で半硬化処理を行ってもよいし、塗膜同士を積層させずに半硬化処理を行ってもよい。半硬化処理は、組成物から形成された塗膜と、更に、上記塗膜以外の材料とを接触させた状態で実施してもよい。 For example, in the semi-curing treatment, a composition is applied onto a base material to form a coating film, and then the coating film on the base material is heated without pressure to form a semi-cured heat conductive material (hereinafter referred to as “semi-cured material”). It may also be abbreviated as “semi-hardened film”), or it may be used as a semi-cured film by heating the coating film on the substrate while also using press processing. When the press working is performed, the press working may be carried out before or after the above heating or the like, or may be carried out during the press working. When press working is performed in the semi-hardened film, it may be easy to adjust the film thickness of the obtained semi-hardened film and / or reduce the amount of voids in the semi-hardened film.
In the semi-hardening treatment, the semi-hardening treatment may be performed in a state where the coating films formed on different substrates are laminated, or the semi-hardening treatment may be performed without laminating the coating films. The semi-hardening treatment may be carried out in a state where the coating film formed from the composition is further in contact with a material other than the coating film.
半硬化処理において、別々の基材上に形成した塗膜同士を積層させた状態で半硬化処理を行ってもよいし、塗膜同士を積層させずに半硬化処理を行ってもよい。半硬化処理は、組成物から形成された塗膜と、更に、上記塗膜以外の材料とを接触させた状態で実施してもよい。 For example, in the semi-curing treatment, a composition is applied onto a base material to form a coating film, and then the coating film on the base material is heated without pressure to form a semi-cured heat conductive material (hereinafter referred to as “semi-cured material”). It may also be abbreviated as “semi-hardened film”), or it may be used as a semi-cured film by heating the coating film on the substrate while also using press processing. When the press working is performed, the press working may be carried out before or after the above heating or the like, or may be carried out during the press working. When press working is performed in the semi-hardened film, it may be easy to adjust the film thickness of the obtained semi-hardened film and / or reduce the amount of voids in the semi-hardened film.
In the semi-hardening treatment, the semi-hardening treatment may be performed in a state where the coating films formed on different substrates are laminated, or the semi-hardening treatment may be performed without laminating the coating films. The semi-hardening treatment may be carried out in a state where the coating film formed from the composition is further in contact with a material other than the coating film.
得られた、半硬化膜を、そのまま熱伝導材料として使用してもよいし、半硬化膜に更に本硬化処理を施してから完全に硬化した熱伝導材料として使用してもよい。
本硬化処理においては、半硬化膜を、そのまま無加圧で加熱等してもよいし、プレス加工を行ってから、又は、行いながら加熱等してもよい。この際、本硬化処理において、別々の半硬化膜同士を積層させた状態で本硬化処理を行ってもよいし、半硬化膜同士を積層させずに本硬化処理を行ってもよい。
また、本硬化処理は、半硬化膜を、使用されるデバイス等に接触するように配置した状態で実施してもよい。本硬化処理によって、デバイスと本発明の熱伝導材料とが接着するのも好ましい。 The obtained semi-cured film may be used as it is as a heat conductive material, or may be used as a completely cured heat conductive material after the semi-hard film is further subjected to the main curing treatment.
In the main curing treatment, the semi-hardened film may be heated as it is without pressure, or may be heated after being pressed or while being pressed. At this time, in the main curing treatment, the main curing treatment may be performed in a state where the separate semi-hardened films are laminated, or the main curing treatment may be performed without laminating the semi-hardened films.
Further, the main curing treatment may be carried out in a state where the semi-hardened film is arranged so as to be in contact with the device or the like to be used. It is also preferable that the device and the heat conductive material of the present invention are adhered to each other by this hardening treatment.
本硬化処理においては、半硬化膜を、そのまま無加圧で加熱等してもよいし、プレス加工を行ってから、又は、行いながら加熱等してもよい。この際、本硬化処理において、別々の半硬化膜同士を積層させた状態で本硬化処理を行ってもよいし、半硬化膜同士を積層させずに本硬化処理を行ってもよい。
また、本硬化処理は、半硬化膜を、使用されるデバイス等に接触するように配置した状態で実施してもよい。本硬化処理によって、デバイスと本発明の熱伝導材料とが接着するのも好ましい。 The obtained semi-cured film may be used as it is as a heat conductive material, or may be used as a completely cured heat conductive material after the semi-hard film is further subjected to the main curing treatment.
In the main curing treatment, the semi-hardened film may be heated as it is without pressure, or may be heated after being pressed or while being pressed. At this time, in the main curing treatment, the main curing treatment may be performed in a state where the separate semi-hardened films are laminated, or the main curing treatment may be performed without laminating the semi-hardened films.
Further, the main curing treatment may be carried out in a state where the semi-hardened film is arranged so as to be in contact with the device or the like to be used. It is also preferable that the device and the heat conductive material of the present invention are adhered to each other by this hardening treatment.
半硬化処理及び/又は本硬化処理等における硬化処理の際に行ってもよいプレス加工に使用するプレスに制限はなく、例えば、平板プレスを使用してもよいしロールプレスを使用してもよい。
ロールプレスを使用する場合は、例えば、基材上に塗膜を形成して得た塗膜付き基材を、2本のロールが対向する1対のロールに挟持し、上記1対のロールを回転させて上記塗膜付き基材を通過させながら、上記塗膜付き基材の膜厚方向に圧力を付加するのが好ましい。上記塗膜付き基材は、塗膜の片面にのみ基材が存在していてもよいし、塗膜の両面に基材が存在していてもよい。上記塗膜付き基材は、ロールプレスに1回だけ通過させてもよいし複数回通過させてもよい。
半硬化処理及び/又は本硬化処理等における硬化処理の際に、平板プレスによる処理とロールプレスによる処理とは一方のみを実施してもよいし両方を実施してもよい。 There is no limitation on the press used for the press working that may be performed during the semi-hardening treatment and / or the curing treatment in the main curing treatment, and for example, a flat plate press or a roll press may be used. ..
When a roll press is used, for example, a base material with a coating film obtained by forming a coating film on the base material is sandwiched between a pair of rolls in which two rolls face each other, and the above pair of rolls is used. It is preferable to apply pressure in the film thickness direction of the coating film-coated substrate while rotating the coating film-coated substrate. In the above-mentioned base material with a coating film, the base material may be present on only one side of the coating film, or the base material may be present on both sides of the coating film. The base material with a coating film may be passed through the roll press only once or may be passed a plurality of times.
In the semi-hardening treatment and / or the curing treatment in the main curing treatment or the like, only one of the treatment by the flat plate press and the treatment by the roll press may be carried out, or both may be carried out.
ロールプレスを使用する場合は、例えば、基材上に塗膜を形成して得た塗膜付き基材を、2本のロールが対向する1対のロールに挟持し、上記1対のロールを回転させて上記塗膜付き基材を通過させながら、上記塗膜付き基材の膜厚方向に圧力を付加するのが好ましい。上記塗膜付き基材は、塗膜の片面にのみ基材が存在していてもよいし、塗膜の両面に基材が存在していてもよい。上記塗膜付き基材は、ロールプレスに1回だけ通過させてもよいし複数回通過させてもよい。
半硬化処理及び/又は本硬化処理等における硬化処理の際に、平板プレスによる処理とロールプレスによる処理とは一方のみを実施してもよいし両方を実施してもよい。 There is no limitation on the press used for the press working that may be performed during the semi-hardening treatment and / or the curing treatment in the main curing treatment, and for example, a flat plate press or a roll press may be used. ..
When a roll press is used, for example, a base material with a coating film obtained by forming a coating film on the base material is sandwiched between a pair of rolls in which two rolls face each other, and the above pair of rolls is used. It is preferable to apply pressure in the film thickness direction of the coating film-coated substrate while rotating the coating film-coated substrate. In the above-mentioned base material with a coating film, the base material may be present on only one side of the coating film, or the base material may be present on both sides of the coating film. The base material with a coating film may be passed through the roll press only once or may be passed a plurality of times.
In the semi-hardening treatment and / or the curing treatment in the main curing treatment or the like, only one of the treatment by the flat plate press and the treatment by the roll press may be carried out, or both may be carried out.
硬化反応を含む熱伝導材料の作製については、「高熱伝導性コンポジット材料」(シーエムシー出版、竹澤由高著)を参照できる。
For the production of heat conductive materials including curing reaction, refer to "High heat conductive composite material" (CMC Publishing, by Yutaka Takezawa).
熱伝導材料の形状に特に制限はなく、用途に応じて様々な形状に成形できる。成形された熱伝導材料の典型的な形状としては、例えば、シート状が挙げられる。
つまり、本発明の組成物を用いて得られる熱伝導材料は、熱伝導シート(以下、「本発明の熱伝導シート」とも略す。)であるのも好ましい。
また、本発明の組成物を用いて得られる熱伝導材料の熱伝導性は異方的ではなく等方的であるのが好ましい。 The shape of the heat conductive material is not particularly limited, and can be molded into various shapes depending on the application. A typical shape of the molded heat conductive material is, for example, a sheet shape.
That is, it is also preferable that the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention is a heat conductive sheet (hereinafter, also abbreviated as "heat conductive sheet of the present invention").
Further, the thermal conductivity of the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention is preferably isotropic rather than anisotropic.
つまり、本発明の組成物を用いて得られる熱伝導材料は、熱伝導シート(以下、「本発明の熱伝導シート」とも略す。)であるのも好ましい。
また、本発明の組成物を用いて得られる熱伝導材料の熱伝導性は異方的ではなく等方的であるのが好ましい。 The shape of the heat conductive material is not particularly limited, and can be molded into various shapes depending on the application. A typical shape of the molded heat conductive material is, for example, a sheet shape.
That is, it is also preferable that the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention is a heat conductive sheet (hereinafter, also abbreviated as "heat conductive sheet of the present invention").
Further, the thermal conductivity of the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention is preferably isotropic rather than anisotropic.
熱伝導材料は、絶縁性(電気絶縁性)であるのが好ましい。言い換えると、本発明の組成物は、熱伝導性絶縁組成物であるのが好ましい。
例えば、熱伝導材料の23℃相対湿度65%における体積抵抗率は、1010Ω・cm以上が好ましく、1012Ω・cm以上がより好ましく、1014Ω・cm以上が更に好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、通常1018Ω・cm以下である。 The heat conductive material is preferably insulating (electrically insulating). In other words, the composition of the present invention is preferably a thermally conductive insulating composition.
For example, the volume resistivity of the heat conductive material at 23 ° C. and 65% relative humidity is preferably 10 10 Ω · cm or more, more preferably 10 12 Ω · cm or more, and even more preferably 10 14 Ω · cm or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is usually 10 18 Ω · cm or less.
例えば、熱伝導材料の23℃相対湿度65%における体積抵抗率は、1010Ω・cm以上が好ましく、1012Ω・cm以上がより好ましく、1014Ω・cm以上が更に好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、通常1018Ω・cm以下である。 The heat conductive material is preferably insulating (electrically insulating). In other words, the composition of the present invention is preferably a thermally conductive insulating composition.
For example, the volume resistivity of the heat conductive material at 23 ° C. and 65% relative humidity is preferably 10 10 Ω · cm or more, more preferably 10 12 Ω · cm or more, and even more preferably 10 14 Ω · cm or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is usually 10 18 Ω · cm or less.
[熱伝導シート]
本発明の組成物を用いて得られる熱伝導材料は、本発明の組成物から形成される部材以外の、他の部材と組み合わせて使用されてもよい。
例えば、シート状の熱伝導材料(熱伝導シート)は、本発明の組成物から形成された層の他の、シート状の支持体と組み合わせられていてもよい。
シート状の支持体としては、プラスチックフィルム、金属フィルム、又は、ガラス板が挙げられる。プラスチックフィルムの材料としては、例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)等のポリエステル、ポリカーボネート、アクリル樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、ポリウレタン、ポリアミド、ポリオレフィン、セルロース誘導体、及び、シリコーンが挙げられる。金属フィルムとしては、銅フィルムが挙げられる。
シート状の熱伝導材料(熱伝導シート)の膜厚は、100~300μmが好ましく、150~250μmがより好ましい。 [Heat conduction sheet]
The heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention may be used in combination with other members other than the members formed from the composition of the present invention.
For example, the sheet-shaped heat conductive material (heat conductive sheet) may be combined with another sheet-shaped support of the layer formed from the composition of the present invention.
Examples of the sheet-shaped support include a plastic film, a metal film, and a glass plate. Examples of the material of the plastic film include polyester such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polycarbonate, acrylic resin, epoxy resin, polyurethane, polyamide, polyolefin, cellulose derivative, and silicone. Examples of the metal film include a copper film.
The film thickness of the sheet-shaped heat conductive material (heat conductive sheet) is preferably 100 to 300 μm, more preferably 150 to 250 μm.
本発明の組成物を用いて得られる熱伝導材料は、本発明の組成物から形成される部材以外の、他の部材と組み合わせて使用されてもよい。
例えば、シート状の熱伝導材料(熱伝導シート)は、本発明の組成物から形成された層の他の、シート状の支持体と組み合わせられていてもよい。
シート状の支持体としては、プラスチックフィルム、金属フィルム、又は、ガラス板が挙げられる。プラスチックフィルムの材料としては、例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)等のポリエステル、ポリカーボネート、アクリル樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、ポリウレタン、ポリアミド、ポリオレフィン、セルロース誘導体、及び、シリコーンが挙げられる。金属フィルムとしては、銅フィルムが挙げられる。
シート状の熱伝導材料(熱伝導シート)の膜厚は、100~300μmが好ましく、150~250μmがより好ましい。 [Heat conduction sheet]
The heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention may be used in combination with other members other than the members formed from the composition of the present invention.
For example, the sheet-shaped heat conductive material (heat conductive sheet) may be combined with another sheet-shaped support of the layer formed from the composition of the present invention.
Examples of the sheet-shaped support include a plastic film, a metal film, and a glass plate. Examples of the material of the plastic film include polyester such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polycarbonate, acrylic resin, epoxy resin, polyurethane, polyamide, polyolefin, cellulose derivative, and silicone. Examples of the metal film include a copper film.
The film thickness of the sheet-shaped heat conductive material (heat conductive sheet) is preferably 100 to 300 μm, more preferably 150 to 250 μm.
さらに、本発明の熱伝導シートの片面又は両面に接着剤層又は粘着剤層を配した熱伝導性多層シート(以下、「本発明の熱伝導性多層シート」とも略す。)に成形することができる。
このような接着剤層及び/又は粘着剤層を介して、熱伝導材料をデバイスのような熱を移動させるべき対象物と接合することで、熱伝導材料と対象物との、より強固な接合を実現できる。
例えば、本発明の熱伝導性多層シートとして、本発明の熱伝導シートと、上記熱伝導シートの片面又は両面に設けられた、接着剤層又は粘着剤層と、を有する、熱伝導性多層シートを作製してもよい。
なお、上記熱伝導シートの片面又は両面には、それぞれ接着剤層及び粘着剤層の一方が設けられていてもよく、両方が設けられていてもよい。上記熱伝導シートの一面に接着剤層が設けられていて、他の面に粘着剤層が設けられていてもよい。また、上記熱伝導シートの片面又は両面には、接着剤層及び/又は粘着剤層が部分的に設けられていてもよく、全面的に設けられていてもよい。
なお、上述の通り、本発明において熱伝導シート等の熱伝導材料は半硬化状態(半硬化膜)であってもよく、熱伝導性多層シートにおける熱伝導シートが半硬化状態であってもよい。熱伝導性多層シートにおける接着剤層は硬化していてもよく半硬化状態であってもよく未硬化状態であってもよい。 Further, it can be molded into a heat conductive multilayer sheet (hereinafter, also abbreviated as "heat conductive multilayer sheet of the present invention") in which an adhesive layer or an adhesive layer is arranged on one side or both sides of the heat conductive sheet of the present invention. can.
By bonding the heat conductive material to an object such as a device to which heat should be transferred through such an adhesive layer and / or an adhesive layer, a stronger bond between the heat conductive material and the object is performed. Can be realized.
For example, as the heat conductive multilayer sheet of the present invention, the heat conductive multilayer sheet having the heat conductive sheet of the present invention and an adhesive layer or an adhesive layer provided on one side or both sides of the heat conductive sheet. May be produced.
In addition, one of the adhesive layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be provided on one side or both sides of the heat conductive sheet, respectively, or both may be provided. An adhesive layer may be provided on one surface of the heat conductive sheet, and an adhesive layer may be provided on the other surface. Further, the adhesive layer and / or the adhesive layer may be partially provided on one side or both sides of the heat conductive sheet, or may be provided on the entire surface.
As described above, in the present invention, the heat conductive material such as the heat conductive sheet may be in a semi-cured state (semi-cured film), and the heat conductive sheet in the heat conductive multilayer sheet may be in a semi-cured state. .. The adhesive layer in the heat conductive multilayer sheet may be cured, semi-cured, or uncured.
このような接着剤層及び/又は粘着剤層を介して、熱伝導材料をデバイスのような熱を移動させるべき対象物と接合することで、熱伝導材料と対象物との、より強固な接合を実現できる。
例えば、本発明の熱伝導性多層シートとして、本発明の熱伝導シートと、上記熱伝導シートの片面又は両面に設けられた、接着剤層又は粘着剤層と、を有する、熱伝導性多層シートを作製してもよい。
なお、上記熱伝導シートの片面又は両面には、それぞれ接着剤層及び粘着剤層の一方が設けられていてもよく、両方が設けられていてもよい。上記熱伝導シートの一面に接着剤層が設けられていて、他の面に粘着剤層が設けられていてもよい。また、上記熱伝導シートの片面又は両面には、接着剤層及び/又は粘着剤層が部分的に設けられていてもよく、全面的に設けられていてもよい。
なお、上述の通り、本発明において熱伝導シート等の熱伝導材料は半硬化状態(半硬化膜)であってもよく、熱伝導性多層シートにおける熱伝導シートが半硬化状態であってもよい。熱伝導性多層シートにおける接着剤層は硬化していてもよく半硬化状態であってもよく未硬化状態であってもよい。 Further, it can be molded into a heat conductive multilayer sheet (hereinafter, also abbreviated as "heat conductive multilayer sheet of the present invention") in which an adhesive layer or an adhesive layer is arranged on one side or both sides of the heat conductive sheet of the present invention. can.
By bonding the heat conductive material to an object such as a device to which heat should be transferred through such an adhesive layer and / or an adhesive layer, a stronger bond between the heat conductive material and the object is performed. Can be realized.
For example, as the heat conductive multilayer sheet of the present invention, the heat conductive multilayer sheet having the heat conductive sheet of the present invention and an adhesive layer or an adhesive layer provided on one side or both sides of the heat conductive sheet. May be produced.
In addition, one of the adhesive layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be provided on one side or both sides of the heat conductive sheet, respectively, or both may be provided. An adhesive layer may be provided on one surface of the heat conductive sheet, and an adhesive layer may be provided on the other surface. Further, the adhesive layer and / or the adhesive layer may be partially provided on one side or both sides of the heat conductive sheet, or may be provided on the entire surface.
As described above, in the present invention, the heat conductive material such as the heat conductive sheet may be in a semi-cured state (semi-cured film), and the heat conductive sheet in the heat conductive multilayer sheet may be in a semi-cured state. .. The adhesive layer in the heat conductive multilayer sheet may be cured, semi-cured, or uncured.
<接着剤層>
接着剤層は接着性を有する化合物(樹脂及び/又は低分子量体等)を少なくとも1種含むのが好ましい。
接着剤層は、必要に応じてフィラー等のその他の成分を更に含んでもよい。 <Adhesive layer>
The adhesive layer preferably contains at least one adhesive compound (resin and / or low molecular weight compound, etc.).
The adhesive layer may further contain other components such as fillers, if desired.
接着剤層は接着性を有する化合物(樹脂及び/又は低分子量体等)を少なくとも1種含むのが好ましい。
接着剤層は、必要に応じてフィラー等のその他の成分を更に含んでもよい。 <Adhesive layer>
The adhesive layer preferably contains at least one adhesive compound (resin and / or low molecular weight compound, etc.).
The adhesive layer may further contain other components such as fillers, if desired.
上記接着性を有する化合物としては、接着時において、絶縁性、接着性、及び/又は、柔軟性を有する化合物が好ましい。
中でも接着性及び絶縁性の観点から、ポリイミド樹脂、変性ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、変性ポリアミドイミド樹脂、及び、エポキシ化合物からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましい。
エポキシ化合物は、アクリル変性ゴムを含有するエポキシ樹脂であってもよい。 As the compound having adhesiveness, a compound having insulating property, adhesiveness and / or flexibility at the time of adhesion is preferable.
Above all, from the viewpoint of adhesiveness and insulating property, it is preferable to contain at least one selected from the group consisting of a polyimide resin, a modified polyimide resin, a polyamide-imide resin, a modified polyamide-imide resin, and an epoxy compound.
The epoxy compound may be an epoxy resin containing an acrylic modified rubber.
中でも接着性及び絶縁性の観点から、ポリイミド樹脂、変性ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、変性ポリアミドイミド樹脂、及び、エポキシ化合物からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましい。
エポキシ化合物は、アクリル変性ゴムを含有するエポキシ樹脂であってもよい。 As the compound having adhesiveness, a compound having insulating property, adhesiveness and / or flexibility at the time of adhesion is preferable.
Above all, from the viewpoint of adhesiveness and insulating property, it is preferable to contain at least one selected from the group consisting of a polyimide resin, a modified polyimide resin, a polyamide-imide resin, a modified polyamide-imide resin, and an epoxy compound.
The epoxy compound may be an epoxy resin containing an acrylic modified rubber.
上記ポリイミド樹脂及び変性ポリイミド樹脂としては、例えば、ユピコートFS-100L(宇部興産株式会社製)、セミコファインSP-300、SP-400、SP-800(東レ株式会社製)、及び、Uイミドシリーズ(ユニチカ株式会社製)等に代表される製品等が挙げられる。
Examples of the polyimide resin and the modified polyimide resin include Iupicort FS-100L (manufactured by Ube Industries, Ltd.), Semicofine SP-300, SP-400, SP-800 (manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.), and Uimide series (manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.). Products such as Unitika Ltd.) can be mentioned.
上記ポリアミドイミド樹脂や変性ポリアミドイミド樹脂としては、例えば、KSシリーズ(日立化成工業株式会社製)、バイロマックスシリーズ(東洋紡績株式会社製)、及び、トーロン(ソルベイアドバンスドポリマーズ社製)等が挙げられる。
中でも、高耐熱性及び高接着性の観点から、KSシリーズ(日立化成工業株式会社製)に代表される変性ポリアミドイミド樹脂を用いることが好ましい。 Examples of the above-mentioned polyamide-imide resin and modified polyamide-imide resin include KS series (manufactured by Hitachi Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.), Vilomax series (manufactured by Toyo Spinning Co., Ltd.), Toron (manufactured by Solvay Advanced Polymers Co., Ltd.) and the like. ..
Above all, from the viewpoint of high heat resistance and high adhesiveness, it is preferable to use a modified polyamide-imide resin represented by the KS series (manufactured by Hitachi Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.).
中でも、高耐熱性及び高接着性の観点から、KSシリーズ(日立化成工業株式会社製)に代表される変性ポリアミドイミド樹脂を用いることが好ましい。 Examples of the above-mentioned polyamide-imide resin and modified polyamide-imide resin include KS series (manufactured by Hitachi Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.), Vilomax series (manufactured by Toyo Spinning Co., Ltd.), Toron (manufactured by Solvay Advanced Polymers Co., Ltd.) and the like. ..
Above all, from the viewpoint of high heat resistance and high adhesiveness, it is preferable to use a modified polyamide-imide resin represented by the KS series (manufactured by Hitachi Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.).
上記接着剤層に用いられる、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、及び、変性ポリアミドイミド樹脂は、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
またこれらの樹脂は、通常、樹脂が溶剤に溶解したワニス状態であり、PETフィルム等の支持体に直接塗布し溶剤を乾燥させることによりフィルム化して接着剤層として用いることもできる。 The polyimide resin, the polyamide-imide resin, and the modified polyamide-imide resin used for the adhesive layer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
Further, these resins are usually in a varnish state in which the resin is dissolved in a solvent, and can be directly applied to a support such as a PET film and dried to form a film and used as an adhesive layer.
またこれらの樹脂は、通常、樹脂が溶剤に溶解したワニス状態であり、PETフィルム等の支持体に直接塗布し溶剤を乾燥させることによりフィルム化して接着剤層として用いることもできる。 The polyimide resin, the polyamide-imide resin, and the modified polyamide-imide resin used for the adhesive layer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
Further, these resins are usually in a varnish state in which the resin is dissolved in a solvent, and can be directly applied to a support such as a PET film and dried to form a film and used as an adhesive layer.
また、接着性を有する化合物としてエポキシ化合物を用いてもよい。具体的には、例えば、エポキシ化合物、その硬化剤、及び、硬化剤促進剤を含むエポキシ組成物を接着剤層としてもよい。上記エポキシ組成物には、グリシジルアクリレートを添加することも好ましい。
エポキシ組成物の詳細については、例えば、特開2002-134531号公報、特開2002-226796号公報、及び、2003-221573号公報等の記載を参照することもできる。 Moreover, you may use an epoxy compound as a compound having adhesiveness. Specifically, for example, an epoxy composition containing an epoxy compound, a curing agent thereof, and a curing agent accelerator may be used as the adhesive layer. It is also preferable to add glycidyl acrylate to the epoxy composition.
For details of the epoxy composition, for example, the descriptions of JP-A-2002-134531, JP-A-2002-226996, and JP-A-2003-221573 can also be referred to.
エポキシ組成物の詳細については、例えば、特開2002-134531号公報、特開2002-226796号公報、及び、2003-221573号公報等の記載を参照することもできる。 Moreover, you may use an epoxy compound as a compound having adhesiveness. Specifically, for example, an epoxy composition containing an epoxy compound, a curing agent thereof, and a curing agent accelerator may be used as the adhesive layer. It is also preferable to add glycidyl acrylate to the epoxy composition.
For details of the epoxy composition, for example, the descriptions of JP-A-2002-134531, JP-A-2002-226996, and JP-A-2003-221573 can also be referred to.
接着剤層に使用されるエポキシ化合物は、硬化して接着作用を呈するものであればよく、特に制限はない。例えば、分子量が500以下のビスフェノールA型又はビスフェノールF型の液状であるエポキシ化合物を用いると積層時の流動性を向上させられる。高Tg(ガラス転移温度)化を目的に多官能のエポキシ化合物を加えてもよく、多官能エポキシ化合物としては、例えば、フェノールノボラック型のエポキシ化合物、クレゾールノボラック型のエポキシ化合物等が挙げられる。
接着剤層に使用されるエポキシ化合物として、本発明の組成物において使用できるエポキシ化合物として説明したエポキシ化合物を使用してもよい。 The epoxy compound used for the adhesive layer is not particularly limited as long as it cures and exhibits an adhesive action. For example, when a bisphenol A type or bisphenol F type liquid epoxy compound having a molecular weight of 500 or less is used, the fluidity at the time of lamination can be improved. A polyfunctional epoxy compound may be added for the purpose of increasing the Tg (glass transition temperature), and examples of the polyfunctional epoxy compound include a phenol novolac type epoxy compound and a cresol novolac type epoxy compound.
As the epoxy compound used for the adhesive layer, the epoxy compound described as the epoxy compound that can be used in the composition of the present invention may be used.
接着剤層に使用されるエポキシ化合物として、本発明の組成物において使用できるエポキシ化合物として説明したエポキシ化合物を使用してもよい。 The epoxy compound used for the adhesive layer is not particularly limited as long as it cures and exhibits an adhesive action. For example, when a bisphenol A type or bisphenol F type liquid epoxy compound having a molecular weight of 500 or less is used, the fluidity at the time of lamination can be improved. A polyfunctional epoxy compound may be added for the purpose of increasing the Tg (glass transition temperature), and examples of the polyfunctional epoxy compound include a phenol novolac type epoxy compound and a cresol novolac type epoxy compound.
As the epoxy compound used for the adhesive layer, the epoxy compound described as the epoxy compound that can be used in the composition of the present invention may be used.
エポキシ化合物の硬化剤としては、例えば、ポリアミド、ポリアミン、酸無水物、ポリスルフィド、三弗化硼素、又は、フェノール化合物(フェノールノボラック樹脂、フェノール性水酸基を1分子中に2個以上有する化合物であるビスフェノールA、ビスフェノールF、若しくは、ビスフェノールS等)が挙げられる。吸湿時の耐電食性に優れる観点から、フェノール化合物であるフェノールノボラック樹脂、ビスフェノールノボラック樹脂、又は、クレゾールノボラック樹脂等を用いるのも好ましい。
また、上記硬化剤として、本発明の組成物において使用できるフェノール化合物として説明したフェノール化合物を使用してもよい。 Examples of the curing agent for the epoxy compound include polyamide, polyamine, acid anhydride, polysulfide, boron trifluoride, or phenol compound (phenol novolac resin, bisphenol, which is a compound having two or more phenolic hydroxyl groups in one molecule. A, bisphenol F, bisphenol S, etc.). From the viewpoint of excellent electrolytic corrosion resistance during moisture absorption, it is also preferable to use a phenol compound such as phenol novolac resin, bisphenol novolak resin, or cresol novolak resin.
Further, as the curing agent, the phenol compound described as the phenol compound that can be used in the composition of the present invention may be used.
また、上記硬化剤として、本発明の組成物において使用できるフェノール化合物として説明したフェノール化合物を使用してもよい。 Examples of the curing agent for the epoxy compound include polyamide, polyamine, acid anhydride, polysulfide, boron trifluoride, or phenol compound (phenol novolac resin, bisphenol, which is a compound having two or more phenolic hydroxyl groups in one molecule. A, bisphenol F, bisphenol S, etc.). From the viewpoint of excellent electrolytic corrosion resistance during moisture absorption, it is also preferable to use a phenol compound such as phenol novolac resin, bisphenol novolak resin, or cresol novolak resin.
Further, as the curing agent, the phenol compound described as the phenol compound that can be used in the composition of the present invention may be used.
硬化剤を用いる場合は、硬化剤とともに硬化促進剤を用いることが好ましい。硬化促進剤としては、トリフェニルホスフィンやイミダゾールを用いるのも好ましい。イミダゾールとしては、例えば、2-メチルイミダゾール、2-エチル-4-メチルイミダゾール、1-シアノエチル-2-フェニルイミダゾール、及び、1-シアノエチル-2-フェニルイミダゾリウムトリメリテートが挙げられる。イミダゾール類は、例えば、四国化成工業株式会社から2E4MZ、2PZ-CN、2PZ-CNSという商品名で市販されている。
When using a curing agent, it is preferable to use a curing accelerator together with the curing agent. It is also preferable to use triphenylphosphine or imidazole as the curing accelerator. Examples of the imidazole include 2-methylimidazole, 2-ethyl-4-methylimidazole, 1-cyanoethyl-2-phenylimidazole, and 1-cyanoethyl-2-phenylimidazolium trimerite. The imidazoles are commercially available from Shikoku Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd. under the trade names of 2E4MZ, 2PZ-CN, and 2PZ-CNS.
接着剤層に用いるエポキシ化合物は、エポキシ化合物と相溶性がある高分子量樹脂と併用されることも好ましい。
エポキシ化合物と相溶性がある高分子量樹脂としては、例えば、高分子量エポキシ化合物、極性の大きい官能基含有ゴム、及び、極性の大きい官能基含有反応性ゴムが挙げられる。
上記極性の大きい官能基含有反応性ゴムとしては、アクリルゴムにカルボキシル基のような極性が大きい官能基を付加したアクリル変性ゴムが挙げられる。 The epoxy compound used for the adhesive layer is also preferably used in combination with a high molecular weight resin compatible with the epoxy compound.
Examples of the high molecular weight resin compatible with the epoxy compound include a high molecular weight epoxy compound, a functional group-containing rubber having a large polarity, and a functional group-containing reactive rubber having a large polarity.
Examples of the highly polar functional group-containing reactive rubber include acrylic modified rubber in which a highly polar functional group such as a carboxyl group is added to acrylic rubber.
エポキシ化合物と相溶性がある高分子量樹脂としては、例えば、高分子量エポキシ化合物、極性の大きい官能基含有ゴム、及び、極性の大きい官能基含有反応性ゴムが挙げられる。
上記極性の大きい官能基含有反応性ゴムとしては、アクリルゴムにカルボキシル基のような極性が大きい官能基を付加したアクリル変性ゴムが挙げられる。 The epoxy compound used for the adhesive layer is also preferably used in combination with a high molecular weight resin compatible with the epoxy compound.
Examples of the high molecular weight resin compatible with the epoxy compound include a high molecular weight epoxy compound, a functional group-containing rubber having a large polarity, and a functional group-containing reactive rubber having a large polarity.
Examples of the highly polar functional group-containing reactive rubber include acrylic modified rubber in which a highly polar functional group such as a carboxyl group is added to acrylic rubber.
ここで、エポキシ化合物と相溶性があるとは、硬化後にエポキシ化合物と分離して二つ以上の相に分かれることなく、均質混和物を形成する性質を言う。
上記高分子量樹脂の重量平均分子量は特に制限されない。Bステージにおける接着剤のタック性の低減や硬化時の可撓性を向上させる観点から、重量平均分子量が3万以上であることが好ましい。 Here, "compatible with an epoxy compound" means a property of forming a homogeneous admixture without separating from the epoxy compound and separating into two or more phases after curing.
The weight average molecular weight of the high molecular weight resin is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of reducing the tackiness of the adhesive in the B stage and improving the flexibility during curing, the weight average molecular weight is preferably 30,000 or more.
上記高分子量樹脂の重量平均分子量は特に制限されない。Bステージにおける接着剤のタック性の低減や硬化時の可撓性を向上させる観点から、重量平均分子量が3万以上であることが好ましい。 Here, "compatible with an epoxy compound" means a property of forming a homogeneous admixture without separating from the epoxy compound and separating into two or more phases after curing.
The weight average molecular weight of the high molecular weight resin is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of reducing the tackiness of the adhesive in the B stage and improving the flexibility during curing, the weight average molecular weight is preferably 30,000 or more.
高分子量エポキシ化合物は、分子量が3万~8万の高分子量エポキシ化合物、さらには、分子量が8万を超える超高分子量エポキシ化合物(特公平7-59617号、特公平7-59618号、特公平7-59619号、特公平7-59620号、特公平7-64911号、特公平7-68327号公報参照)があり、いずれも日立化成工業株社で製造している。極性の大きい官能基含有反応性ゴムとして、カルボキシル基含有アクリルゴムは、例えば、ナガセケムテックス社から、HTR-860P(商品名)が販売されている。
The high molecular weight epoxy compound is a high molecular weight epoxy compound having a molecular weight of 30,000 to 80,000, and an ultra high molecular weight epoxy compound having a molecular weight of more than 80,000 (Special Fair 7-59617, Special Fair 7-59618, Special Fair). 7-59619, Tokuhei 7-59620, Tokuhei 7-64911, Tokuhei 7-68327), all of which are manufactured by Hitachi Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd. As a functional group-containing reactive rubber having a high polarity, HTR-860P (trade name) of a carboxyl group-containing acrylic rubber is sold by Nagase ChemteX Corporation, for example.
上記エポキシ化合物と相溶性がありかつ重量平均分子量が3万以上の高分子量樹脂を用いる場合、その添加量は、接着剤層を構成する樹脂を100質量部とした場合に、10質量部以上であることが好ましい、また、40重量部以下であることが好ましい。
10質量部以上であると、エポキシ化合物を主成分とする相(以下エポキシ化合物相という)の可撓性の向上、タック性の向上、及び/又は、クラック抑制等を実現しやすく、絶縁性が低下しにくい。40重量部以下であると、エポキシ化合物相のTgを向上させられる。 When a high molecular weight resin that is compatible with the epoxy compound and has a weight average molecular weight of 30,000 or more is used, the amount added is 10 parts by mass or more when the resin constituting the adhesive layer is 100 parts by mass. It is preferably 40 parts by weight or less.
When it is 10 parts by mass or more, it is easy to improve the flexibility, tackiness, and / or crack suppression of the phase containing the epoxy compound as the main component (hereinafter referred to as the epoxy compound phase), and the insulating property is improved. Hard to drop. When it is 40 parts by weight or less, the Tg of the epoxy compound phase can be improved.
10質量部以上であると、エポキシ化合物を主成分とする相(以下エポキシ化合物相という)の可撓性の向上、タック性の向上、及び/又は、クラック抑制等を実現しやすく、絶縁性が低下しにくい。40重量部以下であると、エポキシ化合物相のTgを向上させられる。 When a high molecular weight resin that is compatible with the epoxy compound and has a weight average molecular weight of 30,000 or more is used, the amount added is 10 parts by mass or more when the resin constituting the adhesive layer is 100 parts by mass. It is preferably 40 parts by weight or less.
When it is 10 parts by mass or more, it is easy to improve the flexibility, tackiness, and / or crack suppression of the phase containing the epoxy compound as the main component (hereinafter referred to as the epoxy compound phase), and the insulating property is improved. Hard to drop. When it is 40 parts by weight or less, the Tg of the epoxy compound phase can be improved.
高分子量エポキシ化合物の重量平均分子量は、2万以上50万以下であることが好ましい。この範囲では、シート状態及び/又はフィルム状態での強度及び/又は可撓性が向上し、タック性も抑制しやすい。
The weight average molecular weight of the high molecular weight epoxy compound is preferably 20,000 or more and 500,000 or less. In this range, the strength and / or flexibility in the sheet state and / or the film state is improved, and the tackiness is easily suppressed.
上記接着剤層に好適に用いられる、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、変性ポリアミドイミド樹脂及び、エポキシ化合物は、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
またこれらの化合物は、化合物が溶媒に溶解したワニス状態の混合物にしてもよい。このような混合物を、PETフィルム等の支持体に直接塗布し、溶媒を乾燥させることにより、化合物をフィルム化して接着剤層として用いることができる。 The polyamide-imide resin, the modified polyamide-imide resin, and the epoxy compound preferably used for the adhesive layer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
Further, these compounds may be a mixture in a varnish state in which the compounds are dissolved in a solvent. By applying such a mixture directly to a support such as a PET film and drying the solvent, the compound can be formed into a film and used as an adhesive layer.
またこれらの化合物は、化合物が溶媒に溶解したワニス状態の混合物にしてもよい。このような混合物を、PETフィルム等の支持体に直接塗布し、溶媒を乾燥させることにより、化合物をフィルム化して接着剤層として用いることができる。 The polyamide-imide resin, the modified polyamide-imide resin, and the epoxy compound preferably used for the adhesive layer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
Further, these compounds may be a mixture in a varnish state in which the compounds are dissolved in a solvent. By applying such a mixture directly to a support such as a PET film and drying the solvent, the compound can be formed into a film and used as an adhesive layer.
(シランカップリング剤)
接着剤層には、異種材料間の界面結合をよくするために、シランカップリング剤を配合してもよい。
上記シランカップリング剤としては、例えば、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、γ-メルカプトプロピルトリメトキシシラン、γ-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン、γ-ウレイドプロピルトリエトキシシラン、及び、N-β-アミノエチル-γ-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシランが挙げられる。
中でも、接着強度の観点から、γ-メルカプトプロピルトリメトキシシラン、又は、γ-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシランが好ましい。
接着剤層がシランカップリング剤を含む場合、その配合量は、添加による効果及び/又は耐熱性への影響の観点から、上記接着性を有する化合物100質量部に対し、0.1~10質量部が好ましい。 (Silane coupling agent)
A silane coupling agent may be added to the adhesive layer in order to improve the interfacial bond between different materials.
Examples of the silane coupling agent include γ-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, γ-mercaptopropyltrimethoxysilane, γ-aminopropyltriethoxysilane, γ-ureidopropyltriethoxysilane, and N-β-. Aminoethyl-γ-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane can be mentioned.
Of these, γ-mercaptopropyltrimethoxysilane or γ-aminopropyltriethoxysilane is preferable from the viewpoint of adhesive strength.
When the adhesive layer contains a silane coupling agent, the blending amount thereof is 0.1 to 10% by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the above-mentioned adhesive compound from the viewpoint of the effect of the addition and / or the influence on heat resistance. Part is preferable.
接着剤層には、異種材料間の界面結合をよくするために、シランカップリング剤を配合してもよい。
上記シランカップリング剤としては、例えば、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、γ-メルカプトプロピルトリメトキシシラン、γ-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン、γ-ウレイドプロピルトリエトキシシラン、及び、N-β-アミノエチル-γ-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシランが挙げられる。
中でも、接着強度の観点から、γ-メルカプトプロピルトリメトキシシラン、又は、γ-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシランが好ましい。
接着剤層がシランカップリング剤を含む場合、その配合量は、添加による効果及び/又は耐熱性への影響の観点から、上記接着性を有する化合物100質量部に対し、0.1~10質量部が好ましい。 (Silane coupling agent)
A silane coupling agent may be added to the adhesive layer in order to improve the interfacial bond between different materials.
Examples of the silane coupling agent include γ-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, γ-mercaptopropyltrimethoxysilane, γ-aminopropyltriethoxysilane, γ-ureidopropyltriethoxysilane, and N-β-. Aminoethyl-γ-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane can be mentioned.
Of these, γ-mercaptopropyltrimethoxysilane or γ-aminopropyltriethoxysilane is preferable from the viewpoint of adhesive strength.
When the adhesive layer contains a silane coupling agent, the blending amount thereof is 0.1 to 10% by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the above-mentioned adhesive compound from the viewpoint of the effect of the addition and / or the influence on heat resistance. Part is preferable.
(フィラー)
接着剤層は、フィラー(好ましくは無機フィラー)を含んでもよい。
接着剤層がフィラーを含むことで、接着剤層の取扱い性や熱伝導性が向上する。また難燃性を与えること、溶融粘度を調整すること、チクソトロピック性を付与すること、及び/又は、表面硬度を向上すること等が可能になる。 (Filler)
The adhesive layer may contain a filler (preferably an inorganic filler).
When the adhesive layer contains a filler, the handleability and thermal conductivity of the adhesive layer are improved. Further, it is possible to impart flame retardancy, adjust the melt viscosity, impart thixotropic property, and / or improve the surface hardness.
接着剤層は、フィラー(好ましくは無機フィラー)を含んでもよい。
接着剤層がフィラーを含むことで、接着剤層の取扱い性や熱伝導性が向上する。また難燃性を与えること、溶融粘度を調整すること、チクソトロピック性を付与すること、及び/又は、表面硬度を向上すること等が可能になる。 (Filler)
The adhesive layer may contain a filler (preferably an inorganic filler).
When the adhesive layer contains a filler, the handleability and thermal conductivity of the adhesive layer are improved. Further, it is possible to impart flame retardancy, adjust the melt viscosity, impart thixotropic property, and / or improve the surface hardness.
接着剤層がフィラーを含む場合、その含有量は特に制限されない。中でも上記含有量は、接着剤層に含まれる上記接着性を有する化合物100体積部に対して、20~50体積部が好ましい。
配合の効果の点から上記含有量が30体積部以上であることがより好ましい。また接着剤の貯蔵弾性率の好適化、接着性の向上、及び/又は、ボイド抑制などを実現して絶縁性の低下等を抑制する観点から、上記含有量が50体積部以下であることも好ましい。 When the adhesive layer contains a filler, its content is not particularly limited. Above all, the content is preferably 20 to 50 parts by volume with respect to 100 parts by volume of the compound having the adhesiveness contained in the adhesive layer.
From the viewpoint of the effect of blending, the content is more preferably 30 parts by volume or more. Further, from the viewpoint of optimizing the storage elastic modulus of the adhesive, improving the adhesiveness, and / or suppressing the decrease in insulating property by suppressing voids, the content may be 50 parts by volume or less. preferable.
配合の効果の点から上記含有量が30体積部以上であることがより好ましい。また接着剤の貯蔵弾性率の好適化、接着性の向上、及び/又は、ボイド抑制などを実現して絶縁性の低下等を抑制する観点から、上記含有量が50体積部以下であることも好ましい。 When the adhesive layer contains a filler, its content is not particularly limited. Above all, the content is preferably 20 to 50 parts by volume with respect to 100 parts by volume of the compound having the adhesiveness contained in the adhesive layer.
From the viewpoint of the effect of blending, the content is more preferably 30 parts by volume or more. Further, from the viewpoint of optimizing the storage elastic modulus of the adhesive, improving the adhesiveness, and / or suppressing the decrease in insulating property by suppressing voids, the content may be 50 parts by volume or less. preferable.
無機フィラーとしては、例えば、水酸化アルミニウム、水酸化マグネシウム、炭酸カルシウム、炭酸マグネシウム、ケイ酸カルシウム、ケイ酸マグネシウム、酸化カルシウム、酸化マグネシウム、アルミナ(酸化アルミニウム)、窒化アルミニウム、ほう酸アルミウィスカ、窒化ホウ素、結晶性シリカ、非晶性シリカ、窒化ケイ素、タルク、マイカ、及び、硫酸バリウムが挙げられる。
中でも、熱伝導率が高いため放熱性が良く、不純物を制御しやすく、耐熱性及び絶縁性が良好な点で、アルミナ、窒化ホウ素、又は、窒化アルミニウムが好ましい。
フィラーは、1種類単独で使用してもよく、2種類以上を使用してもよい。 Examples of the inorganic filler include aluminum hydroxide, magnesium hydroxide, calcium carbonate, magnesium carbonate, calcium silicate, magnesium silicate, calcium oxide, magnesium oxide, alumina (aluminum oxide), aluminum nitride, aluminum borate whisker, and boron nitride. , Crystalline silica, amorphous silica, silicon nitride, talc, mica, and barium sulfate.
Among them, alumina, boron nitride, or aluminum nitride is preferable in that it has good heat dissipation because of its high thermal conductivity, it is easy to control impurities, and it has good heat resistance and insulating properties.
One type of filler may be used alone, or two or more types may be used.
中でも、熱伝導率が高いため放熱性が良く、不純物を制御しやすく、耐熱性及び絶縁性が良好な点で、アルミナ、窒化ホウ素、又は、窒化アルミニウムが好ましい。
フィラーは、1種類単独で使用してもよく、2種類以上を使用してもよい。 Examples of the inorganic filler include aluminum hydroxide, magnesium hydroxide, calcium carbonate, magnesium carbonate, calcium silicate, magnesium silicate, calcium oxide, magnesium oxide, alumina (aluminum oxide), aluminum nitride, aluminum borate whisker, and boron nitride. , Crystalline silica, amorphous silica, silicon nitride, talc, mica, and barium sulfate.
Among them, alumina, boron nitride, or aluminum nitride is preferable in that it has good heat dissipation because of its high thermal conductivity, it is easy to control impurities, and it has good heat resistance and insulating properties.
One type of filler may be used alone, or two or more types may be used.
接着剤層に含まれるフィラーの平均粒子径は特に制限されない。例えば、熱伝導性の観点から、0.1~10μmが好ましく、0.2~5μmがより好ましい。
The average particle size of the filler contained in the adhesive layer is not particularly limited. For example, from the viewpoint of thermal conductivity, 0.1 to 10 μm is preferable, and 0.2 to 5 μm is more preferable.
接着剤層におけるフィラーの含有量は、接着性と熱伝導性のバランスをとる観点から、接着剤層の全体積に対して、50体積%以下(例えば20体積%以上50体積%以下)であることも好ましい。
The content of the filler in the adhesive layer is 50% by volume or less (for example, 20% by volume or more and 50% by volume or less) with respect to the total volume of the adhesive layer from the viewpoint of balancing adhesiveness and thermal conductivity. It is also preferable.
特に、接着剤層が接着性を有する化合物としてエポキシ化合物及び変性ポリアミドイミド樹脂からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種を含み、フィラーとしてアルミナ及び酸化ケイ素からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種を含み、フィラーの含有量は接着性を有する化合物100体積部に対して25体積部以上100体積部以下であり、フィラーの平均粒子径は0.2~5μmであることが、接着強度と熱伝導率の観点から好ましい。
In particular, the adhesive layer contains at least one selected from the group consisting of an epoxy compound and a modified polyamideimide resin as a compound having adhesiveness, and at least one selected from the group consisting of alumina and silicon oxide as a filler. The content of the filler is 25 parts by volume or more and 100 parts by volume or less with respect to 100 parts by volume of the adhesive having adhesiveness, and the average particle size of the filler is 0.2 to 5 μm. It is preferable from the viewpoint of.
接着剤層の膜厚は熱伝導率と接着性の観点から、1~16μmが好ましく、2~15μmがより好ましく、3~14μmが更に好ましく、4~12μmが特に好ましい。
接着剤層の膜厚は、マイクロメータ、触針式膜厚計、針式膜厚計等を用いて測定することができる。 The film thickness of the adhesive layer is preferably 1 to 16 μm, more preferably 2 to 15 μm, further preferably 3 to 14 μm, and particularly preferably 4 to 12 μm from the viewpoint of thermal conductivity and adhesiveness.
The film thickness of the adhesive layer can be measured using a micrometer, a stylus type film thickness meter, a needle type film thickness meter, or the like.
接着剤層の膜厚は、マイクロメータ、触針式膜厚計、針式膜厚計等を用いて測定することができる。 The film thickness of the adhesive layer is preferably 1 to 16 μm, more preferably 2 to 15 μm, further preferably 3 to 14 μm, and particularly preferably 4 to 12 μm from the viewpoint of thermal conductivity and adhesiveness.
The film thickness of the adhesive layer can be measured using a micrometer, a stylus type film thickness meter, a needle type film thickness meter, or the like.
<粘着剤層>
上記粘着剤層の材料としては、各種粘着剤及び/又は熱硬化系材料等で、必要とする耐熱性能及び熱伝導性能を有するものであれば、特に限定することなく使用できる。また、粘着剤層中に各種熱伝導性フィラーを混合して熱伝導性を高めた粘着剤を用いてもよい。 <Adhesive layer>
As the material of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, various pressure-sensitive adhesives and / or thermosetting materials and the like, which have the required heat resistance and heat conduction performance, can be used without particular limitation. Further, a pressure-sensitive adhesive may be used in which various heat-conductive fillers are mixed in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to improve the heat-conductivity.
上記粘着剤層の材料としては、各種粘着剤及び/又は熱硬化系材料等で、必要とする耐熱性能及び熱伝導性能を有するものであれば、特に限定することなく使用できる。また、粘着剤層中に各種熱伝導性フィラーを混合して熱伝導性を高めた粘着剤を用いてもよい。 <Adhesive layer>
As the material of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, various pressure-sensitive adhesives and / or thermosetting materials and the like, which have the required heat resistance and heat conduction performance, can be used without particular limitation. Further, a pressure-sensitive adhesive may be used in which various heat-conductive fillers are mixed in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to improve the heat-conductivity.
粘着剤層を形成する粘着剤としては、例えば、アクリル系粘着剤、オレフィン系粘着剤、シリコーン系粘着剤、天然ゴム系粘着剤、及び、合成ゴム系粘着剤が挙げられる。
電子機器における半導体付近での使用用途では、アウトガスが発生しにくい点で、アクリル系粘着剤又はオレフィン系粘着剤が好ましい。また耐熱性の観点からは、シリコーン樹脂を主原料とするシリコーン系粘着剤が好ましい。
なお、「シリコーン樹脂を主原料とする粘着剤」とは、シリコーン樹脂を60質量%以上(好ましくは80質量%以上)含む粘着剤のことである。
シリコーン樹脂を主原料とする粘着剤としては、例えば、過酸化物架橋(硬化)型シリコーン系粘着剤及び付加反応型シリコーン系粘着剤が挙げられる。中でも、薄層にした場合の厚み精度が高く、転写法での粘着剤層形成が容易な点で、付加反応型シリコーン系粘着剤が好ましい。 Examples of the pressure-sensitive adhesive forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer include an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive, an olefin-based pressure-sensitive adhesive, a silicone-based pressure-sensitive adhesive, a natural rubber-based pressure-sensitive adhesive, and a synthetic rubber-based pressure-sensitive adhesive.
Acrylic adhesives or olefin adhesives are preferable because outgas is less likely to be generated in applications near semiconductors in electronic devices. From the viewpoint of heat resistance, a silicone-based adhesive containing a silicone resin as a main raw material is preferable.
The "adhesive containing a silicone resin as a main raw material" is a pressure-sensitive adhesive containing 60% by mass or more (preferably 80% by mass or more) of a silicone resin.
Examples of the pressure-sensitive adhesive using a silicone resin as a main raw material include a peroxide-crosslinked (cured) type silicone-based pressure-sensitive adhesive and an addition-reaction type silicone-based pressure-sensitive adhesive. Above all, an addition reaction type silicone-based pressure-sensitive adhesive is preferable because it has high thickness accuracy when it is made into a thin layer and it is easy to form a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer by a transfer method.
電子機器における半導体付近での使用用途では、アウトガスが発生しにくい点で、アクリル系粘着剤又はオレフィン系粘着剤が好ましい。また耐熱性の観点からは、シリコーン樹脂を主原料とするシリコーン系粘着剤が好ましい。
なお、「シリコーン樹脂を主原料とする粘着剤」とは、シリコーン樹脂を60質量%以上(好ましくは80質量%以上)含む粘着剤のことである。
シリコーン樹脂を主原料とする粘着剤としては、例えば、過酸化物架橋(硬化)型シリコーン系粘着剤及び付加反応型シリコーン系粘着剤が挙げられる。中でも、薄層にした場合の厚み精度が高く、転写法での粘着剤層形成が容易な点で、付加反応型シリコーン系粘着剤が好ましい。 Examples of the pressure-sensitive adhesive forming the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer include an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive, an olefin-based pressure-sensitive adhesive, a silicone-based pressure-sensitive adhesive, a natural rubber-based pressure-sensitive adhesive, and a synthetic rubber-based pressure-sensitive adhesive.
Acrylic adhesives or olefin adhesives are preferable because outgas is less likely to be generated in applications near semiconductors in electronic devices. From the viewpoint of heat resistance, a silicone-based adhesive containing a silicone resin as a main raw material is preferable.
The "adhesive containing a silicone resin as a main raw material" is a pressure-sensitive adhesive containing 60% by mass or more (preferably 80% by mass or more) of a silicone resin.
Examples of the pressure-sensitive adhesive using a silicone resin as a main raw material include a peroxide-crosslinked (cured) type silicone-based pressure-sensitive adhesive and an addition-reaction type silicone-based pressure-sensitive adhesive. Above all, an addition reaction type silicone-based pressure-sensitive adhesive is preferable because it has high thickness accuracy when it is made into a thin layer and it is easy to form a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer by a transfer method.
付加反応型シリコーン系粘着剤としては、例えば、シリコーンゴムとシリコーンレジンとを含有し、さらに必要に応じて架橋剤、充填剤、可塑剤、老化防止剤、帯電防止剤、及び/又は、着色剤(顔料、染料など)等の添加剤を含有する粘着剤が挙げられる。
Examples of the addition reaction type silicone adhesive include a silicone rubber and a silicone resin, and if necessary, a cross-linking agent, a filler, a plasticizer, an antiaging agent, an antioxidant, and / or a coloring agent. Examples thereof include adhesives containing additives such as (pigments, dyes, etc.).
上記シリコーンゴムとしては、シリコーン系のゴム成分であれば特に制限されないが、フェニル基を有しているオルガノポリシロキサン(特に、メチルフェニルシロキサンを主な構成単位としているオルガノポリシロキサン)を含むシリコーンゴムが好ましい。このようなシリコーンゴムにおけるオルガノポリシロキサンには、必要に応じて、ビニル基などの各種官能基が導入されていてもよい。
The silicone rubber is not particularly limited as long as it is a silicone-based rubber component, but is a silicone rubber containing an organopolysiloxane having a phenyl group (particularly, an organopolysiloxane having methylphenylsiloxane as a main constituent unit). Is preferable. Various functional groups such as vinyl groups may be introduced into the organopolysiloxane in such silicone rubber, if necessary.
上記シリコーンレジンとしては、シリコーン系粘着剤に使用されているシリコーン系のレジンであれば特に制限されないが、例えば、構成単位「R3SiO1/2」からなる単位、構成単位「SiO2」からなる単位、構成単位「RSiO3/2」からなる単位、及び、構成単位「R2SiO」からなる単位からなる群より選択される少なくともいずれか1種の単位を有する(共)重合体からなるオルガノポリシロキサンを含むシリコーンレジンが挙げられる。なお、上記構成単位におけるRは、炭化水素基又はヒドロキシル基を示す。
As the silicone resin is not particularly limited as long as it is a resin of silicone used in the silicone adhesive, for example, units consisting of constituent units "R 3 SiO 1/2", from the constituent unit "SiO 2" comprising units, units consisting of constituent units "RSiO 3/2", and consists of at least one kind of unit selected from the group consisting of units consisting of constituent units "R 2 SiO" (co) polymer Examples include silicone resins containing organopolysiloxane. In addition, R in the said structural unit represents a hydrocarbon group or a hydroxyl group.
アクリル系粘着剤は、(メタ)アクリル酸、及び/又は、(メタ)アクリル酸エステルの単独重合体及び共重合体が挙げられる。
Examples of the acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive include homopolymers and copolymers of (meth) acrylic acid and / or (meth) acrylic acid ester.
中でも、柔軟性、化学的安定性、加工性、及び/又は、粘着性のコントロール可能性に優れる点で、アクリル系粘着剤は、アクリル酸ブチル、又は、アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシル等を主な原料成分としたポリ(メタ)アクリル酸エステル系の高分子化合物が好ましい。
Among them, butyl acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, etc. are the main raw materials for acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesives because they are excellent in flexibility, chemical stability, processability, and / or controllability of adhesiveness. A poly (meth) acrylic acid ester-based polymer compound as a component is preferable.
上記高分子化合物は、アクリル酸ブチル、アクリル酸エチル、及び、アクリル酸2エチルヘキシル等から選ばれる1以上のモノマーと、アクリル酸、アクリロニトリル、及び/又は、ヒドロキシエチルアクリレート等とを共重合し、-COOH基、-CN基、-OH基等の極性基を導入した構造を有する共重合体が好ましい。
The above polymer compound is obtained by copolymerizing one or more monomers selected from butyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, diethylhexyl acrylate and the like with acrylate, acrylonitrile, and / or hydroxyethyl acrylate, and the like. A copolymer having a structure in which a polar group such as a COOH group, -CN group, or -OH group is introduced is preferable.
また、アクリル系粘着剤には、柔軟性を損なわない範囲で架橋構造を導入してもよい。架橋構造を導入することで、長期間の密着保持性及び膜強度を改善しやすい。例えば、-OH基等の極性基を有するポリマーに、複数のイソシアネート基やエポキシ基等の上記極性基と結合する官能基を持つ化合物を、上記極性基と反応させることで、架橋構造を導入できる。
Further, a crosslinked structure may be introduced into the acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive as long as the flexibility is not impaired. By introducing a crosslinked structure, it is easy to improve long-term adhesion retention and film strength. For example, a crosslinked structure can be introduced by reacting a polymer having a polar group such as an −OH group with a compound having a functional group that binds to the polar group such as a plurality of isocyanate groups or an epoxy group with the polar group. ..
[熱伝導層付きデバイス]
本発明の組成物を用いて得られる熱伝導材料は放熱シート等の放熱材として使用でき、各種デバイスの放熱用途に使用できる。より具体的には、デバイス上に本発明の熱伝導材料を含む熱伝導層を配置して熱伝導層付きデバイスを作製して、デバイスからの発熱を効率的に熱伝導層で放熱できる。上記熱伝導層は、上述した熱伝導性多層シート含む熱伝導層であってもよい。
本発明の組成物を用いて得られる熱伝導材料は十分な熱伝導性を有するとともに、高い耐熱性を有しているため、パーソナルコンピュータ、一般家電、及び、自動車等の様々な電気機器に用いられているパワー半導体デバイスの放熱用途に適している。
更に、本発明の組成物を用いて得られる熱伝導材料は、半硬化状態であっても十分な熱伝導性を有するため、各種装置の部材の隙間等の、光硬化のための光を到達させるのが困難な部位に配置する放熱材としても使用できる。また、接着性にも優れるため、熱伝導性を有する接着剤としての使用も可能である。 [Device with thermal conductive layer]
The heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention can be used as a heat radiating material such as a heat radiating sheet, and can be used for heat radiating applications of various devices. More specifically, a device with a heat conductive layer can be produced by arranging a heat conductive layer containing the heat conductive material of the present invention on the device, and heat generated from the device can be efficiently dissipated by the heat conductive layer. The heat conductive layer may be a heat conductive layer including the above-mentioned heat conductive multilayer sheet.
Since the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention has sufficient heat conductivity and high heat resistance, it is used for various electric devices such as personal computers, general household appliances, and automobiles. It is suitable for heat dissipation of power semiconductor devices.
Further, since the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention has sufficient heat conductivity even in a semi-cured state, it reaches light for photocuring such as gaps between members of various devices. It can also be used as a heat radiating material to be placed in a part that is difficult to make. In addition, since it has excellent adhesiveness, it can be used as an adhesive having thermal conductivity.
本発明の組成物を用いて得られる熱伝導材料は放熱シート等の放熱材として使用でき、各種デバイスの放熱用途に使用できる。より具体的には、デバイス上に本発明の熱伝導材料を含む熱伝導層を配置して熱伝導層付きデバイスを作製して、デバイスからの発熱を効率的に熱伝導層で放熱できる。上記熱伝導層は、上述した熱伝導性多層シート含む熱伝導層であってもよい。
本発明の組成物を用いて得られる熱伝導材料は十分な熱伝導性を有するとともに、高い耐熱性を有しているため、パーソナルコンピュータ、一般家電、及び、自動車等の様々な電気機器に用いられているパワー半導体デバイスの放熱用途に適している。
更に、本発明の組成物を用いて得られる熱伝導材料は、半硬化状態であっても十分な熱伝導性を有するため、各種装置の部材の隙間等の、光硬化のための光を到達させるのが困難な部位に配置する放熱材としても使用できる。また、接着性にも優れるため、熱伝導性を有する接着剤としての使用も可能である。 [Device with thermal conductive layer]
The heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention can be used as a heat radiating material such as a heat radiating sheet, and can be used for heat radiating applications of various devices. More specifically, a device with a heat conductive layer can be produced by arranging a heat conductive layer containing the heat conductive material of the present invention on the device, and heat generated from the device can be efficiently dissipated by the heat conductive layer. The heat conductive layer may be a heat conductive layer including the above-mentioned heat conductive multilayer sheet.
Since the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention has sufficient heat conductivity and high heat resistance, it is used for various electric devices such as personal computers, general household appliances, and automobiles. It is suitable for heat dissipation of power semiconductor devices.
Further, since the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention has sufficient heat conductivity even in a semi-cured state, it reaches light for photocuring such as gaps between members of various devices. It can also be used as a heat radiating material to be placed in a part that is difficult to make. In addition, since it has excellent adhesiveness, it can be used as an adhesive having thermal conductivity.
以下に、実施例を挙げて本発明を更に詳細に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り適宜変更することができる。したがって、本発明の範囲は以下に示す実施例により限定的に解釈されるべきものではない。
Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in more detail with reference to examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, treatment contents, treatment procedures, etc. shown in the following examples can be appropriately changed as long as they do not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention should not be construed as limiting by the examples shown below.
[実施例1~40及び比較例1~12(組成物の調製)]
〔各種成分〕
以下に、実施例及び比較例で使用した各種成分を示す。
<特定化合物及び比較用化合物>
以下に、実施例で使用した特定化合物を示す。以下のC-1~C-11が特定化合物であり、D-1~D-2が特定化合物に該当しない化合物(比較用化合物)である。
[Examples 1 to 40 and Comparative Examples 1 to 12 (preparation of composition)]
[Various ingredients]
The various components used in Examples and Comparative Examples are shown below.
<Specific compounds and comparative compounds>
The specific compounds used in the examples are shown below. The following C-1 to C-11 are specific compounds, and D-1 to D-2 are compounds that do not correspond to specific compounds (comparative compounds).
〔各種成分〕
以下に、実施例及び比較例で使用した各種成分を示す。
<特定化合物及び比較用化合物>
以下に、実施例で使用した特定化合物を示す。以下のC-1~C-11が特定化合物であり、D-1~D-2が特定化合物に該当しない化合物(比較用化合物)である。
[Examples 1 to 40 and Comparative Examples 1 to 12 (preparation of composition)]
[Various ingredients]
The various components used in Examples and Comparative Examples are shown below.
<Specific compounds and comparative compounds>
The specific compounds used in the examples are shown below. The following C-1 to C-11 are specific compounds, and D-1 to D-2 are compounds that do not correspond to specific compounds (comparative compounds).
<フェノール化合物>
以下に、実施例で使用したフェノール化合物A-1~A~3を示す。
なお、実施例で使用したフェノール化合物A-1は、米国特許第4992596号明細書を参考に合成した。 <Phenol compound>
The phenolic compounds A-1 to A-3 used in the examples are shown below.
The phenol compound A-1 used in the examples was synthesized with reference to US Pat. No. 4,992,596.
以下に、実施例で使用したフェノール化合物A-1~A~3を示す。
なお、実施例で使用したフェノール化合物A-1は、米国特許第4992596号明細書を参考に合成した。 <Phenol compound>
The phenolic compounds A-1 to A-3 used in the examples are shown below.
The phenol compound A-1 used in the examples was synthesized with reference to US Pat. No. 4,992,596.
<エポキシ化合物>
以下に、実施例及び比較例で使用したエポキシ化合物を示す。以下のC-11が特定化合物であり、B-1~B-3が特定化合物に該当しない化合物である。
なお、下記B-2は2種類のエポキシ化合物の混合物である(商品名:エポトートZX-1059、東都化成株式会社製)。 <Epoxy compound>
The epoxy compounds used in Examples and Comparative Examples are shown below. The following C-11 is a specific compound, and B-1 to B-3 are compounds that do not correspond to a specific compound.
B-2 below is a mixture of two types of epoxy compounds (trade name: Epototo ZX-1059, manufactured by Toto Kasei Co., Ltd.).
以下に、実施例及び比較例で使用したエポキシ化合物を示す。以下のC-11が特定化合物であり、B-1~B-3が特定化合物に該当しない化合物である。
なお、下記B-2は2種類のエポキシ化合物の混合物である(商品名:エポトートZX-1059、東都化成株式会社製)。 <Epoxy compound>
The epoxy compounds used in Examples and Comparative Examples are shown below. The following C-11 is a specific compound, and B-1 to B-3 are compounds that do not correspond to a specific compound.
B-2 below is a mixture of two types of epoxy compounds (trade name: Epototo ZX-1059, manufactured by Toto Kasei Co., Ltd.).
<無機物(無機窒化物、及び、その他の無機物)>
以下に、実施例及び比較例で使用した無機物を示す。
「AA-3」:酸化アルミニウム(平均粒径:3μm、住友化学製)
「AA-04」:酸化アルミニウム(平均粒径:0.4μm、住友化学製)
「HP-40 MF100」:凝集状窒化ホウ素(平均粒径:40μm、水島合金鉄製)
「SP-3」:鱗片状窒化ホウ素(平均粒径:4μm、デンカ株式会社製) <Inorganic substances (inorganic nitrides and other inorganic substances)>
The inorganic substances used in Examples and Comparative Examples are shown below.
"AA-3": Aluminum oxide (average particle size: 3 μm, manufactured by Sumitomo Chemical)
"AA-04": Aluminum oxide (average particle size: 0.4 μm, manufactured by Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd.)
"HP-40 MF100": Aggregated boron nitride (average particle size: 40 μm, made of Mizushima alloy iron)
"SP-3": Scaly boron nitride (average particle size: 4 μm, manufactured by Denka Corporation)
以下に、実施例及び比較例で使用した無機物を示す。
「AA-3」:酸化アルミニウム(平均粒径:3μm、住友化学製)
「AA-04」:酸化アルミニウム(平均粒径:0.4μm、住友化学製)
「HP-40 MF100」:凝集状窒化ホウ素(平均粒径:40μm、水島合金鉄製)
「SP-3」:鱗片状窒化ホウ素(平均粒径:4μm、デンカ株式会社製) <Inorganic substances (inorganic nitrides and other inorganic substances)>
The inorganic substances used in Examples and Comparative Examples are shown below.
"AA-3": Aluminum oxide (average particle size: 3 μm, manufactured by Sumitomo Chemical)
"AA-04": Aluminum oxide (average particle size: 0.4 μm, manufactured by Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd.)
"HP-40 MF100": Aggregated boron nitride (average particle size: 40 μm, made of Mizushima alloy iron)
"SP-3": Scaly boron nitride (average particle size: 4 μm, manufactured by Denka Corporation)
<硬化促進剤>
硬化促進剤として、PPh3(トリフェニルホスフィン)を使用した。 <Curing accelerator>
PPh 3 (triphenylphosphine) was used as a curing accelerator.
硬化促進剤として、PPh3(トリフェニルホスフィン)を使用した。 <Curing accelerator>
PPh 3 (triphenylphosphine) was used as a curing accelerator.
<溶媒>
溶媒として、シクロペンタノンを使用した。 <Solvent>
Cyclopentanone was used as the solvent.
溶媒として、シクロペンタノンを使用した。 <Solvent>
Cyclopentanone was used as the solvent.
<分散剤>
分散剤として、DISPERBYK-106(酸性基を有するポリマー塩)を使用した。 <Dispersant>
DISPERBYK-106 (a polymer salt having an acidic group) was used as a dispersant.
分散剤として、DISPERBYK-106(酸性基を有するポリマー塩)を使用した。 <Dispersant>
DISPERBYK-106 (a polymer salt having an acidic group) was used as a dispersant.
<酸化アルミニウム用表面修飾剤(有機シラン分子)>
酸化アルミニウム用表面修飾剤として、下記化合物を使用した。
<Surface modifier for aluminum oxide (organic silane molecule)>
The following compounds were used as surface modifiers for aluminum oxide.
酸化アルミニウム用表面修飾剤として、下記化合物を使用した。
The following compounds were used as surface modifiers for aluminum oxide.
[実施例1~40及び比較例1~12(組成物の調製)]
下記表1~表3に示す組み合わせのエポキシ化合物とフェノール化合物とを、下記表1~表3に記載の添加量(g)で配合した硬化液を調製した。
得られた硬化液の全量、溶媒、分散剤、表面修飾剤(酸化アルミニウム用表面修飾剤)、及び、硬化促進剤の順で混合した後、無機物(無機窒化物、無機酸化物)を添加した。得られた混合物を自転公転ミキサー(THINKY社製、あわとり練太郎ARE-310)で5分間処理して、各実施例又は比較例の組成物(熱伝導材料形成用組成物)を得た。
なお、下記表1~表3中、例えば、実施例1および実施例31は、それぞれ同様の組成物であるが、後述する評価対象の作製方法がそれぞれ異なる例である。 [Examples 1 to 40 and Comparative Examples 1 to 12 (preparation of composition)]
A cured solution was prepared by blending the epoxy compounds and phenol compounds of the combinations shown in Tables 1 to 3 below in the addition amounts (g) shown in Tables 1 to 3 below.
After mixing the entire amount of the obtained curing liquid, the solvent, the dispersant, the surface modifier (surface modifier for aluminum oxide), and the curing accelerator in this order, an inorganic substance (inorganic nitride, inorganic oxide) was added. .. The obtained mixture was treated with a rotating revolution mixer (manufactured by THINKY, Awatori Rentaro ARE-310) for 5 minutes to obtain a composition (composition for forming a heat conductive material) of each Example or Comparative Example.
In Tables 1 to 3 below, for example, Examples 1 and 31 have similar compositions, but the methods for producing evaluation targets described later are different.
下記表1~表3に示す組み合わせのエポキシ化合物とフェノール化合物とを、下記表1~表3に記載の添加量(g)で配合した硬化液を調製した。
得られた硬化液の全量、溶媒、分散剤、表面修飾剤(酸化アルミニウム用表面修飾剤)、及び、硬化促進剤の順で混合した後、無機物(無機窒化物、無機酸化物)を添加した。得られた混合物を自転公転ミキサー(THINKY社製、あわとり練太郎ARE-310)で5分間処理して、各実施例又は比較例の組成物(熱伝導材料形成用組成物)を得た。
なお、下記表1~表3中、例えば、実施例1および実施例31は、それぞれ同様の組成物であるが、後述する評価対象の作製方法がそれぞれ異なる例である。 [Examples 1 to 40 and Comparative Examples 1 to 12 (preparation of composition)]
A cured solution was prepared by blending the epoxy compounds and phenol compounds of the combinations shown in Tables 1 to 3 below in the addition amounts (g) shown in Tables 1 to 3 below.
After mixing the entire amount of the obtained curing liquid, the solvent, the dispersant, the surface modifier (surface modifier for aluminum oxide), and the curing accelerator in this order, an inorganic substance (inorganic nitride, inorganic oxide) was added. .. The obtained mixture was treated with a rotating revolution mixer (manufactured by THINKY, Awatori Rentaro ARE-310) for 5 minutes to obtain a composition (composition for forming a heat conductive material) of each Example or Comparative Example.
In Tables 1 to 3 below, for example, Examples 1 and 31 have similar compositions, but the methods for producing evaluation targets described later are different.
ここで、溶媒の添加量は、組成物の固形分濃度が50~80質量%になる量とした。
なお、組成物の固形分濃度は、組成物の粘度がそれぞれ同程度になるように、上記範囲内で組成物ごとに調整した。
硬化促進剤の添加量は、組成物中の硬化促進剤の含有量が、エポキシ化合物及びエポキシ基を有する特定化合物の合計含有量に対して、1質量%となる量とした。
無機物の添加量(無機窒化物とその他の無機物との合計添加量)は、下記表1~表3に示す添加量(g)とした。
また、無機物は、各無機物の含有量の比(質量比)が下記表1~表3に示す関係を満たすように混合して使用した。
分散剤の添加量は、組成物中の分散剤の含有量が、無機物の含有量に対して、0.2質量%となる量とした。
酸化アルミニウム用表面修飾剤の添加量は、組成物中の酸化アルミニウム用表面修飾剤の含有量が、酸化アルミニウムの含有量(AA-3とAA-04との合計含有量)に対して、0.2質量%となる量とした。なお、組成物が酸化アルミニウムを含まない場合、酸化アルミニウム用表面修飾剤は使用しない。 Here, the amount of the solvent added was set so that the solid content concentration of the composition was 50 to 80% by mass.
The solid content concentration of the composition was adjusted for each composition within the above range so that the viscosities of the compositions would be about the same.
The amount of the curing accelerator added was such that the content of the curing accelerator in the composition was 1% by mass with respect to the total content of the epoxy compound and the specific compound having an epoxy group.
The addition amount of the inorganic substance (total addition amount of the inorganic nitride and other inorganic substances) was the addition amount (g) shown in Tables 1 to 3 below.
Further, the inorganic substances were mixed and used so that the ratio (mass ratio) of the contents of each inorganic substance satisfied the relationships shown in Tables 1 to 3 below.
The amount of the dispersant added was such that the content of the dispersant in the composition was 0.2% by mass with respect to the content of the inorganic substance.
The amount of the surface modifier for aluminum oxide added is 0 when the content of the surface modifier for aluminum oxide in the composition is 0 with respect to the content of aluminum oxide (the total content of AA-3 and AA-04). The amount was set to be 2% by mass. If the composition does not contain aluminum oxide, no surface modifier for aluminum oxide is used.
なお、組成物の固形分濃度は、組成物の粘度がそれぞれ同程度になるように、上記範囲内で組成物ごとに調整した。
硬化促進剤の添加量は、組成物中の硬化促進剤の含有量が、エポキシ化合物及びエポキシ基を有する特定化合物の合計含有量に対して、1質量%となる量とした。
無機物の添加量(無機窒化物とその他の無機物との合計添加量)は、下記表1~表3に示す添加量(g)とした。
また、無機物は、各無機物の含有量の比(質量比)が下記表1~表3に示す関係を満たすように混合して使用した。
分散剤の添加量は、組成物中の分散剤の含有量が、無機物の含有量に対して、0.2質量%となる量とした。
酸化アルミニウム用表面修飾剤の添加量は、組成物中の酸化アルミニウム用表面修飾剤の含有量が、酸化アルミニウムの含有量(AA-3とAA-04との合計含有量)に対して、0.2質量%となる量とした。なお、組成物が酸化アルミニウムを含まない場合、酸化アルミニウム用表面修飾剤は使用しない。 Here, the amount of the solvent added was set so that the solid content concentration of the composition was 50 to 80% by mass.
The solid content concentration of the composition was adjusted for each composition within the above range so that the viscosities of the compositions would be about the same.
The amount of the curing accelerator added was such that the content of the curing accelerator in the composition was 1% by mass with respect to the total content of the epoxy compound and the specific compound having an epoxy group.
The addition amount of the inorganic substance (total addition amount of the inorganic nitride and other inorganic substances) was the addition amount (g) shown in Tables 1 to 3 below.
Further, the inorganic substances were mixed and used so that the ratio (mass ratio) of the contents of each inorganic substance satisfied the relationships shown in Tables 1 to 3 below.
The amount of the dispersant added was such that the content of the dispersant in the composition was 0.2% by mass with respect to the content of the inorganic substance.
The amount of the surface modifier for aluminum oxide added is 0 when the content of the surface modifier for aluminum oxide in the composition is 0 with respect to the content of aluminum oxide (the total content of AA-3 and AA-04). The amount was set to be 2% by mass. If the composition does not contain aluminum oxide, no surface modifier for aluminum oxide is used.
[作製方法A:実施例1~15、18~19、22~25、28~29及び比較例1~2(熱伝導シートの作製)]
<熱伝導シートの作製>
アプリケーターを用いて、離型処理したポリエステルフィルム(NP-100A パナック社製、膜厚100μm)の離型面上に、調製した下記表1~表3に記載の組成物を均一に塗布し、120℃で5分間放置して塗膜を得た。
このような塗膜付きポリエステルフィルムを2枚作製し、2枚の塗膜付きポリエステルフィルム同士を塗膜面同士で貼り合せてから、空気下で平板の熱プレス(熱板温度65℃、圧力12MPaで1分間処理)することで半硬化膜を得た。
得られた半硬化膜を空気下で熱プレス(熱板温度160℃、圧力12MPaで20分間処理した後、更に、常圧下で180℃90分)で処理して塗膜を硬化し、樹脂シートを得た。樹脂シートの両面にあるポリエステルフィルムを剥がし、平均膜厚200μmの熱伝導シートを得た。 [Manufacturing method A: Examples 1 to 15, 18 to 19, 22 to 25, 28 to 29 and Comparative Examples 1 to 2 (preparation of heat conductive sheet)]
<Making a heat conductive sheet>
Using an applicator, the prepared compositions shown in Tables 1 to 3 below were uniformly applied onto the release surface of the release-treated polyester film (NP-100A, manufactured by Panac Co., Ltd., film thickness 100 μm), and 120 The film was left at ° C. for 5 minutes to obtain a coating film.
Two such polyester films with a coating film are produced, and the two polyester films with a coating film are bonded to each other on the coating film surfaces, and then a flat plate is hot pressed under air (hot plate temperature 65 ° C., pressure 12 MPa). (Treatment for 1 minute) to obtain a semi-cured film.
The obtained semi-cured film was treated with a hot press under air (hot plate temperature 160 ° C., pressure 12 MPa for 20 minutes, and then further treated at normal pressure at 180 ° C. for 90 minutes) to cure the coating film, and the resin sheet was cured. Got The polyester films on both sides of the resin sheet were peeled off to obtain a heat conductive sheet having an average film thickness of 200 μm.
<熱伝導シートの作製>
アプリケーターを用いて、離型処理したポリエステルフィルム(NP-100A パナック社製、膜厚100μm)の離型面上に、調製した下記表1~表3に記載の組成物を均一に塗布し、120℃で5分間放置して塗膜を得た。
このような塗膜付きポリエステルフィルムを2枚作製し、2枚の塗膜付きポリエステルフィルム同士を塗膜面同士で貼り合せてから、空気下で平板の熱プレス(熱板温度65℃、圧力12MPaで1分間処理)することで半硬化膜を得た。
得られた半硬化膜を空気下で熱プレス(熱板温度160℃、圧力12MPaで20分間処理した後、更に、常圧下で180℃90分)で処理して塗膜を硬化し、樹脂シートを得た。樹脂シートの両面にあるポリエステルフィルムを剥がし、平均膜厚200μmの熱伝導シートを得た。 [Manufacturing method A: Examples 1 to 15, 18 to 19, 22 to 25, 28 to 29 and Comparative Examples 1 to 2 (preparation of heat conductive sheet)]
<Making a heat conductive sheet>
Using an applicator, the prepared compositions shown in Tables 1 to 3 below were uniformly applied onto the release surface of the release-treated polyester film (NP-100A, manufactured by Panac Co., Ltd., film thickness 100 μm), and 120 The film was left at ° C. for 5 minutes to obtain a coating film.
Two such polyester films with a coating film are produced, and the two polyester films with a coating film are bonded to each other on the coating film surfaces, and then a flat plate is hot pressed under air (hot plate temperature 65 ° C., pressure 12 MPa). (Treatment for 1 minute) to obtain a semi-cured film.
The obtained semi-cured film was treated with a hot press under air (hot plate temperature 160 ° C., pressure 12 MPa for 20 minutes, and then further treated at normal pressure at 180 ° C. for 90 minutes) to cure the coating film, and the resin sheet was cured. Got The polyester films on both sides of the resin sheet were peeled off to obtain a heat conductive sheet having an average film thickness of 200 μm.
[作製方法A:実施例16~17、20~21及び26~27(熱伝導性多層シートの作製)]
<半硬化膜の作製>
アプリケーターを用いて、離型処理したポリエステルフィルム(NP-100A パナック社製、膜厚100μm)の離型面上に、調製した下記表1~表3に記載の組成物を均一に塗布し、120℃で5分間放置して塗膜を得た。
このような塗膜付きポリエステルフィルムを2枚作製し、2枚の塗膜付きポリエステルフィルム同士を塗膜面同士で貼り合せてから、空気下で平板の熱プレス(熱板温度65℃、圧力12MPaで1分間処理)することで半硬化膜を得た。 [Manufacturing method A: Examples 16 to 17, 20 to 21 and 26 to 27 (preparation of thermally conductive multilayer sheet)]
<Preparation of semi-cured film>
Using an applicator, the prepared compositions shown in Tables 1 to 3 below were uniformly applied onto the release surface of the release-treated polyester film (NP-100A, manufactured by Panac Co., Ltd., film thickness 100 μm), and 120 The film was left at ° C. for 5 minutes to obtain a coating film.
Two such polyester films with a coating film are produced, and the two polyester films with a coating film are bonded to each other on the coating film surfaces, and then a flat plate is hot pressed under air (hot plate temperature 65 ° C., pressure 12 MPa). (Treatment for 1 minute) to obtain a semi-cured film.
<半硬化膜の作製>
アプリケーターを用いて、離型処理したポリエステルフィルム(NP-100A パナック社製、膜厚100μm)の離型面上に、調製した下記表1~表3に記載の組成物を均一に塗布し、120℃で5分間放置して塗膜を得た。
このような塗膜付きポリエステルフィルムを2枚作製し、2枚の塗膜付きポリエステルフィルム同士を塗膜面同士で貼り合せてから、空気下で平板の熱プレス(熱板温度65℃、圧力12MPaで1分間処理)することで半硬化膜を得た。 [Manufacturing method A: Examples 16 to 17, 20 to 21 and 26 to 27 (preparation of thermally conductive multilayer sheet)]
<Preparation of semi-cured film>
Using an applicator, the prepared compositions shown in Tables 1 to 3 below were uniformly applied onto the release surface of the release-treated polyester film (NP-100A, manufactured by Panac Co., Ltd., film thickness 100 μm), and 120 The film was left at ° C. for 5 minutes to obtain a coating film.
Two such polyester films with a coating film are produced, and the two polyester films with a coating film are bonded to each other on the coating film surfaces, and then a flat plate is hot pressed under air (hot plate temperature 65 ° C., pressure 12 MPa). (Treatment for 1 minute) to obtain a semi-cured film.
<接着剤層フィルム1の調製(エポキシ系接着材層、フィラー無)>
エポキシ樹脂としてB-3を21.6部、硬化剤としてA-1を13.3部、硬化促進剤としてPPh3(トリフェニルホスフィン)を0.21部、シクロペンタノン64.9部を混合して接着材層用塗工液を得た。
アプリケーターを用いて、離型処理したポリエステルフィルム(NP-100A パナック社製、膜厚100μm)の離型面上に、調製した接着材層用塗工液を均一に塗布し、120℃で5分間放置して塗膜を得た。尚、接着材層の膜厚は5μmとなるようにした。 <Preparation of adhesive layer film 1 (epoxy adhesive layer, no filler)>
21.6 parts of B-3 as an epoxy resin, 13.3 parts of A-1 as a curing agent , 0.21 parts of PPh 3 (triphenylphosphine) as a curing accelerator, and 64.9 parts of cyclopentanone are mixed. The coating liquid for the adhesive layer was obtained.
Using an applicator, the prepared coating liquid for the adhesive layer was uniformly applied onto the release surface of the release-treated polyester film (NP-100A Panac Co., Ltd., film thickness 100 μm), and at 120 ° C. for 5 minutes. It was left to obtain a coating film. The film thickness of the adhesive layer was set to 5 μm.
エポキシ樹脂としてB-3を21.6部、硬化剤としてA-1を13.3部、硬化促進剤としてPPh3(トリフェニルホスフィン)を0.21部、シクロペンタノン64.9部を混合して接着材層用塗工液を得た。
アプリケーターを用いて、離型処理したポリエステルフィルム(NP-100A パナック社製、膜厚100μm)の離型面上に、調製した接着材層用塗工液を均一に塗布し、120℃で5分間放置して塗膜を得た。尚、接着材層の膜厚は5μmとなるようにした。 <Preparation of adhesive layer film 1 (epoxy adhesive layer, no filler)>
21.6 parts of B-3 as an epoxy resin, 13.3 parts of A-1 as a curing agent , 0.21 parts of PPh 3 (triphenylphosphine) as a curing accelerator, and 64.9 parts of cyclopentanone are mixed. The coating liquid for the adhesive layer was obtained.
Using an applicator, the prepared coating liquid for the adhesive layer was uniformly applied onto the release surface of the release-treated polyester film (NP-100A Panac Co., Ltd., film thickness 100 μm), and at 120 ° C. for 5 minutes. It was left to obtain a coating film. The film thickness of the adhesive layer was set to 5 μm.
<接着剤層フィルム2の調製(エポキシ系接着材層、フィラー有)>
エポキシ樹脂としてB-3を21.6部、硬化剤としてA-1を13.3部、硬化促進剤としてPPh3を0.21部、アルミナAA-04を35部、シクロペンタノン100部を混合して接着材層用塗工液を得た。
アプリケーターを用いて、離型処理したポリエステルフィルム(NP-100A パナック社製、膜厚100μm)の離型面上に、調製した接着材層用塗工液を均一に塗布し、120℃で5分間放置して塗膜を得た。尚、接着材層の膜厚は5μmとなるようにした。 <Preparation of adhesive layer film 2 (epoxy adhesive layer, with filler)>
21.6 parts of B-3 as an epoxy resin, 13.3 parts of A-1 as a curing agent , 0.21 parts of PPh 3 as a curing accelerator, 35 parts of alumina AA-04, and 100 parts of cyclopentanone. The mixture was mixed to obtain a coating liquid for an adhesive layer.
Using an applicator, the prepared coating liquid for the adhesive layer was uniformly applied onto the release surface of the release-treated polyester film (NP-100A Panac Co., Ltd., film thickness 100 μm), and at 120 ° C. for 5 minutes. It was left to obtain a coating film. The film thickness of the adhesive layer was set to 5 μm.
エポキシ樹脂としてB-3を21.6部、硬化剤としてA-1を13.3部、硬化促進剤としてPPh3を0.21部、アルミナAA-04を35部、シクロペンタノン100部を混合して接着材層用塗工液を得た。
アプリケーターを用いて、離型処理したポリエステルフィルム(NP-100A パナック社製、膜厚100μm)の離型面上に、調製した接着材層用塗工液を均一に塗布し、120℃で5分間放置して塗膜を得た。尚、接着材層の膜厚は5μmとなるようにした。 <Preparation of adhesive layer film 2 (epoxy adhesive layer, with filler)>
21.6 parts of B-3 as an epoxy resin, 13.3 parts of A-1 as a curing agent , 0.21 parts of PPh 3 as a curing accelerator, 35 parts of alumina AA-04, and 100 parts of cyclopentanone. The mixture was mixed to obtain a coating liquid for an adhesive layer.
Using an applicator, the prepared coating liquid for the adhesive layer was uniformly applied onto the release surface of the release-treated polyester film (NP-100A Panac Co., Ltd., film thickness 100 μm), and at 120 ° C. for 5 minutes. It was left to obtain a coating film. The film thickness of the adhesive layer was set to 5 μm.
<多層シートの作製>
上記で作製した半硬化膜の両面に設置された離型PETを剥離し、下記表1~表3に記載する接着剤層を有する接着剤層フィルムを接着材層が半硬化膜に対向するようにそれぞれ重ね、ラミネータを用いて、温度120℃、圧力0.7MPa、真空度≦1kPa、時間15秒間の条件で、接着剤層を貼り付けて、多層シートを得た。 <Making a multi-layer sheet>
The release PETs installed on both sides of the semi-cured film prepared above are peeled off, and the adhesive layer film having the adhesive layers shown in Tables 1 to 3 below is applied so that the adhesive layer faces the semi-cured film. An adhesive layer was attached to the film using a laminator under the conditions of a temperature of 120 ° C., a pressure of 0.7 MPa, a degree of vacuum of ≦ 1 kPa, and a time of 15 seconds to obtain a multilayer sheet.
上記で作製した半硬化膜の両面に設置された離型PETを剥離し、下記表1~表3に記載する接着剤層を有する接着剤層フィルムを接着材層が半硬化膜に対向するようにそれぞれ重ね、ラミネータを用いて、温度120℃、圧力0.7MPa、真空度≦1kPa、時間15秒間の条件で、接着剤層を貼り付けて、多層シートを得た。 <Making a multi-layer sheet>
The release PETs installed on both sides of the semi-cured film prepared above are peeled off, and the adhesive layer film having the adhesive layers shown in Tables 1 to 3 below is applied so that the adhesive layer faces the semi-cured film. An adhesive layer was attached to the film using a laminator under the conditions of a temperature of 120 ° C., a pressure of 0.7 MPa, a degree of vacuum of ≦ 1 kPa, and a time of 15 seconds to obtain a multilayer sheet.
<多層シート硬化物の作製>
得られた多層シートを空気下で熱プレス(熱板温度160℃、圧力12MPaで20分間処理した後、更に、常圧下で180℃90分)で処理して塗膜を硬化し、樹脂シートを得た。樹脂シートの両面にあるポリエステルフィルムを剥がし、平均膜厚200μmの多層シート硬化物(熱伝導性多層シート)を得た。 <Preparation of cured multi-layer sheet>
The obtained multilayer sheet was treated with a hot press under air (hot plate temperature 160 ° C., pressure 12 MPa for 20 minutes, and then further treated at normal pressure at 180 ° C. for 90 minutes) to cure the coating film, and the resin sheet was formed. Obtained. The polyester films on both sides of the resin sheet were peeled off to obtain a cured multilayer sheet (thermally conductive multilayer sheet) having an average film thickness of 200 μm.
得られた多層シートを空気下で熱プレス(熱板温度160℃、圧力12MPaで20分間処理した後、更に、常圧下で180℃90分)で処理して塗膜を硬化し、樹脂シートを得た。樹脂シートの両面にあるポリエステルフィルムを剥がし、平均膜厚200μmの多層シート硬化物(熱伝導性多層シート)を得た。 <Preparation of cured multi-layer sheet>
The obtained multilayer sheet was treated with a hot press under air (hot plate temperature 160 ° C., pressure 12 MPa for 20 minutes, and then further treated at normal pressure at 180 ° C. for 90 minutes) to cure the coating film, and the resin sheet was formed. Obtained. The polyester films on both sides of the resin sheet were peeled off to obtain a cured multilayer sheet (thermally conductive multilayer sheet) having an average film thickness of 200 μm.
[作製方法B:実施例31、34~35及び比較例3~5(熱伝導シートの作製)]
<熱伝導シートの作製>
アプリケーターを用いて、離型処理したPETフィルム(PET756501、リンテック社製、膜厚75μm)の離型面上に、調製した下記表1~表3に記載の組成物を均一に塗布し、120℃で4分間放置して塗膜を得た。
上記塗膜の表面に、更に、新たな上記ポリエステルフィルムを、離型面側を対抗させて貼り合わせた。ポリエステルフィルムに挟まれた塗膜を、空気下でロールプレスすることで半硬化膜を得た。ロールプレスの際は、塗膜の膜面の温度が100℃になるように加熱し、線圧は544N/cmとした。
得られた半硬化膜を空気下で熱プレス(熱板温度160℃、圧力12MPaで20分間処理した後、更に、常圧下で180℃90分)で処理して塗膜を硬化し、樹脂シートを得た。樹脂シートの両面にあるポリエステルフィルムを剥がし、平均膜厚200μmの熱伝導シートを得た。 [Manufacturing method B: Examples 31, 34 to 35 and Comparative Examples 3 to 5 (preparation of heat conductive sheet)]
<Making a heat conductive sheet>
Using an applicator, the prepared compositions shown in Tables 1 to 3 below were uniformly applied onto the release surface of the release-treated PET film (PET765501, manufactured by Lintec Corporation, film thickness 75 μm) at 120 ° C. The film was left for 4 minutes to obtain a coating film.
A new polyester film was further attached to the surface of the coating film with the release surface side facing each other. A semi-cured film was obtained by roll-pressing the coating film sandwiched between polyester films in air. At the time of roll pressing, the temperature of the film surface of the coating film was heated to 100 ° C., and the linear pressure was 544 N / cm.
The obtained semi-cured film was treated with a hot press under air (hot plate temperature 160 ° C., pressure 12 MPa for 20 minutes, and then further treated at normal pressure at 180 ° C. for 90 minutes) to cure the coating film, and the resin sheet was cured. Got The polyester films on both sides of the resin sheet were peeled off to obtain a heat conductive sheet having an average film thickness of 200 μm.
<熱伝導シートの作製>
アプリケーターを用いて、離型処理したPETフィルム(PET756501、リンテック社製、膜厚75μm)の離型面上に、調製した下記表1~表3に記載の組成物を均一に塗布し、120℃で4分間放置して塗膜を得た。
上記塗膜の表面に、更に、新たな上記ポリエステルフィルムを、離型面側を対抗させて貼り合わせた。ポリエステルフィルムに挟まれた塗膜を、空気下でロールプレスすることで半硬化膜を得た。ロールプレスの際は、塗膜の膜面の温度が100℃になるように加熱し、線圧は544N/cmとした。
得られた半硬化膜を空気下で熱プレス(熱板温度160℃、圧力12MPaで20分間処理した後、更に、常圧下で180℃90分)で処理して塗膜を硬化し、樹脂シートを得た。樹脂シートの両面にあるポリエステルフィルムを剥がし、平均膜厚200μmの熱伝導シートを得た。 [Manufacturing method B: Examples 31, 34 to 35 and Comparative Examples 3 to 5 (preparation of heat conductive sheet)]
<Making a heat conductive sheet>
Using an applicator, the prepared compositions shown in Tables 1 to 3 below were uniformly applied onto the release surface of the release-treated PET film (PET765501, manufactured by Lintec Corporation, film thickness 75 μm) at 120 ° C. The film was left for 4 minutes to obtain a coating film.
A new polyester film was further attached to the surface of the coating film with the release surface side facing each other. A semi-cured film was obtained by roll-pressing the coating film sandwiched between polyester films in air. At the time of roll pressing, the temperature of the film surface of the coating film was heated to 100 ° C., and the linear pressure was 544 N / cm.
The obtained semi-cured film was treated with a hot press under air (hot plate temperature 160 ° C., pressure 12 MPa for 20 minutes, and then further treated at normal pressure at 180 ° C. for 90 minutes) to cure the coating film, and the resin sheet was cured. Got The polyester films on both sides of the resin sheet were peeled off to obtain a heat conductive sheet having an average film thickness of 200 μm.
[作製方法B:実施例32~33及び比較例6~7(熱伝導性多層シートの作製)]
以下の方法で作製した半硬化膜を用いた以外は、実施例16と同様の方法で、多層シート硬化物(熱伝導性多層シート)を得た。
<半硬化膜の作製>
アプリケーターを用いて、離型処理したPETフィルム(PET756501、リンテック社製、膜厚75μm)の離型面上に、調製した下記表1~表3に記載の組成物を均一に塗布し、120℃で4分間放置して塗膜を得た。
上記塗膜の表面に、更に、新たな上記ポリエステルフィルムを、離型面側を対抗させて貼り合わせた。ポリエステルフィルムに挟まれた塗膜を、空気下でロールプレスすることで半硬化膜を得た。ロールプレスの際は、塗膜の膜面の温度が100℃になるように加熱し、線圧は544N/cmとした。 [Manufacturing Method B: Examples 32 to 33 and Comparative Examples 6 to 7 (Preparation of thermally conductive multilayer sheet)]
A cured multilayer sheet (heat conductive multilayer sheet) was obtained in the same manner as in Example 16 except that the semi-cured film prepared by the following method was used.
<Preparation of semi-cured film>
Using an applicator, the prepared compositions shown in Tables 1 to 3 below were uniformly applied onto the release surface of the release-treated PET film (PET765501, manufactured by Lintec Corporation, film thickness 75 μm) at 120 ° C. The film was left for 4 minutes to obtain a coating film.
A new polyester film was further attached to the surface of the coating film with the release surface side facing each other. A semi-cured film was obtained by roll-pressing the coating film sandwiched between polyester films in air. At the time of roll pressing, the temperature of the film surface of the coating film was heated to 100 ° C., and the linear pressure was 544 N / cm.
以下の方法で作製した半硬化膜を用いた以外は、実施例16と同様の方法で、多層シート硬化物(熱伝導性多層シート)を得た。
<半硬化膜の作製>
アプリケーターを用いて、離型処理したPETフィルム(PET756501、リンテック社製、膜厚75μm)の離型面上に、調製した下記表1~表3に記載の組成物を均一に塗布し、120℃で4分間放置して塗膜を得た。
上記塗膜の表面に、更に、新たな上記ポリエステルフィルムを、離型面側を対抗させて貼り合わせた。ポリエステルフィルムに挟まれた塗膜を、空気下でロールプレスすることで半硬化膜を得た。ロールプレスの際は、塗膜の膜面の温度が100℃になるように加熱し、線圧は544N/cmとした。 [Manufacturing Method B: Examples 32 to 33 and Comparative Examples 6 to 7 (Preparation of thermally conductive multilayer sheet)]
A cured multilayer sheet (heat conductive multilayer sheet) was obtained in the same manner as in Example 16 except that the semi-cured film prepared by the following method was used.
<Preparation of semi-cured film>
Using an applicator, the prepared compositions shown in Tables 1 to 3 below were uniformly applied onto the release surface of the release-treated PET film (PET765501, manufactured by Lintec Corporation, film thickness 75 μm) at 120 ° C. The film was left for 4 minutes to obtain a coating film.
A new polyester film was further attached to the surface of the coating film with the release surface side facing each other. A semi-cured film was obtained by roll-pressing the coating film sandwiched between polyester films in air. At the time of roll pressing, the temperature of the film surface of the coating film was heated to 100 ° C., and the linear pressure was 544 N / cm.
[作製方法C:実施例36、39~40及び比較例8~10(熱伝導シートの作製)]
<熱伝導シートの作製>
アプリケーターを用いて、離型処理したPETフィルム(PET756501、リンテック社製、膜厚75μm)の離型面上に、調製した下記表1~表3に記載の組成物を均一に塗布し、120℃で4分間加熱してから、さらに80℃で2分間加熱することで、半硬化膜を得た。
得られた半硬化膜を空気下で熱プレス(熱板温度160℃、圧力12MPaで20分間処理した後、更に、常圧下で180℃90分)で処理して塗膜を硬化し、樹脂シートを得た。樹脂シートの両面にあるポリエステルフィルムを剥がし、平均膜厚200μmの熱伝導シートを得た。 [Manufacturing method C: Examples 36, 39 to 40 and Comparative Examples 8 to 10 (preparation of heat conductive sheet)]
<Making a heat conductive sheet>
Using an applicator, the prepared compositions shown in Tables 1 to 3 below were uniformly applied onto the release surface of the release-treated PET film (PET765501, manufactured by Lintec Corporation, film thickness 75 μm) at 120 ° C. After heating for 4 minutes at 80 ° C., a semi-cured film was obtained by further heating at 80 ° C. for 2 minutes.
The obtained semi-cured film was treated with a hot press under air (hot plate temperature 160 ° C., pressure 12 MPa for 20 minutes, and then further treated at normal pressure at 180 ° C. for 90 minutes) to cure the coating film, and the resin sheet was cured. Got The polyester films on both sides of the resin sheet were peeled off to obtain a heat conductive sheet having an average film thickness of 200 μm.
<熱伝導シートの作製>
アプリケーターを用いて、離型処理したPETフィルム(PET756501、リンテック社製、膜厚75μm)の離型面上に、調製した下記表1~表3に記載の組成物を均一に塗布し、120℃で4分間加熱してから、さらに80℃で2分間加熱することで、半硬化膜を得た。
得られた半硬化膜を空気下で熱プレス(熱板温度160℃、圧力12MPaで20分間処理した後、更に、常圧下で180℃90分)で処理して塗膜を硬化し、樹脂シートを得た。樹脂シートの両面にあるポリエステルフィルムを剥がし、平均膜厚200μmの熱伝導シートを得た。 [Manufacturing method C: Examples 36, 39 to 40 and Comparative Examples 8 to 10 (preparation of heat conductive sheet)]
<Making a heat conductive sheet>
Using an applicator, the prepared compositions shown in Tables 1 to 3 below were uniformly applied onto the release surface of the release-treated PET film (PET765501, manufactured by Lintec Corporation, film thickness 75 μm) at 120 ° C. After heating for 4 minutes at 80 ° C., a semi-cured film was obtained by further heating at 80 ° C. for 2 minutes.
The obtained semi-cured film was treated with a hot press under air (hot plate temperature 160 ° C., pressure 12 MPa for 20 minutes, and then further treated at normal pressure at 180 ° C. for 90 minutes) to cure the coating film, and the resin sheet was cured. Got The polyester films on both sides of the resin sheet were peeled off to obtain a heat conductive sheet having an average film thickness of 200 μm.
[作製方法C:実施例37~38及び比較例11~12(熱伝導性多層シートの作製)]
以下の方法で作製した半硬化膜を用いた以外は、実施例16と同様の方法で、多層シート硬化物(熱伝導性多層シート)を得た。
<半硬化膜の作製>
アプリケーターを用いて、離型処理したPETフィルム(PET756501、リンテック社製、膜厚75μm)の離型面上に、調製した下記表1~表3に記載の組成物を均一に塗布し、120℃で4分間加熱してから、さらに80℃で2分間加熱することで、半硬化膜を得た。 [Manufacturing Method C: Examples 37 to 38 and Comparative Examples 11 to 12 (Preparation of thermally conductive multilayer sheet)]
A cured multilayer sheet (heat conductive multilayer sheet) was obtained in the same manner as in Example 16 except that the semi-cured film prepared by the following method was used.
<Preparation of semi-cured film>
Using an applicator, the prepared compositions shown in Tables 1 to 3 below were uniformly applied onto the release surface of the release-treated PET film (PET765501, manufactured by Lintec Corporation, film thickness 75 μm) at 120 ° C. After heating for 4 minutes at 80 ° C., a semi-cured film was obtained by further heating at 80 ° C. for 2 minutes.
以下の方法で作製した半硬化膜を用いた以外は、実施例16と同様の方法で、多層シート硬化物(熱伝導性多層シート)を得た。
<半硬化膜の作製>
アプリケーターを用いて、離型処理したPETフィルム(PET756501、リンテック社製、膜厚75μm)の離型面上に、調製した下記表1~表3に記載の組成物を均一に塗布し、120℃で4分間加熱してから、さらに80℃で2分間加熱することで、半硬化膜を得た。 [Manufacturing Method C: Examples 37 to 38 and Comparative Examples 11 to 12 (Preparation of thermally conductive multilayer sheet)]
A cured multilayer sheet (heat conductive multilayer sheet) was obtained in the same manner as in Example 16 except that the semi-cured film prepared by the following method was used.
<Preparation of semi-cured film>
Using an applicator, the prepared compositions shown in Tables 1 to 3 below were uniformly applied onto the release surface of the release-treated PET film (PET765501, manufactured by Lintec Corporation, film thickness 75 μm) at 120 ° C. After heating for 4 minutes at 80 ° C., a semi-cured film was obtained by further heating at 80 ° C. for 2 minutes.
[実施例1~40及び比較例1~12(熱伝導シート及び熱伝導性多層シートの評価)]
<熱伝導性>
各組成物を用いて得られた、それぞれの熱伝導シート及び熱伝導性多層シートを用いて、熱伝導性評価を実施した。下記の方法で熱伝導率の測定を行い、下記の基準に従って熱伝導性を評価した。 [Examples 1 to 40 and Comparative Examples 1 to 12 (evaluation of heat conductive sheet and heat conductive multilayer sheet)]
<Thermal conductivity>
The thermal conductivity evaluation was carried out using each thermal conductive sheet and the thermally conductive multilayer sheet obtained by using each composition. The thermal conductivity was measured by the following method, and the thermal conductivity was evaluated according to the following criteria.
<熱伝導性>
各組成物を用いて得られた、それぞれの熱伝導シート及び熱伝導性多層シートを用いて、熱伝導性評価を実施した。下記の方法で熱伝導率の測定を行い、下記の基準に従って熱伝導性を評価した。 [Examples 1 to 40 and Comparative Examples 1 to 12 (evaluation of heat conductive sheet and heat conductive multilayer sheet)]
<Thermal conductivity>
The thermal conductivity evaluation was carried out using each thermal conductive sheet and the thermally conductive multilayer sheet obtained by using each composition. The thermal conductivity was measured by the following method, and the thermal conductivity was evaluated according to the following criteria.
(熱伝導率(W/m・k)の測定)
(1)NETZSCH社製の「LFA467」を用いて、レーザーフラッシュ法で熱伝導シートの厚み方向の熱拡散率を測定した。
(2)メトラー・トレド社製の天秤「XS204」を用いて、熱伝導シートの比重をアルキメデス法(「固体比重測定キット」使用)で測定した。
(3)セイコーインスツル社製の「DSC320/6200」を用い、10℃/分の昇温条件の下、25℃における熱伝導シートの比熱を求めた。
(4)得られた熱拡散率に比重及び比熱を乗じて、熱伝導シートの熱伝導率を算出した。 (Measurement of thermal conductivity (W / m · k))
(1) Using "LFA467" manufactured by NETZSCH, the thermal diffusivity in the thickness direction of the heat conductive sheet was measured by a laser flash method.
(2) The specific gravity of the heat conductive sheet was measured by the Archimedes method (using the "solid specific gravity measurement kit") using the balance "XS204" manufactured by METTLER TOLEDO.
(3) Using "DSC320 / 6200" manufactured by Seiko Instruments Inc., the specific heat of the heat conductive sheet at 25 ° C. was determined under the heating condition of 10 ° C./min.
(4) The obtained thermal diffusivity was multiplied by the specific gravity and the specific heat to calculate the thermal conductivity of the heat conductive sheet.
(1)NETZSCH社製の「LFA467」を用いて、レーザーフラッシュ法で熱伝導シートの厚み方向の熱拡散率を測定した。
(2)メトラー・トレド社製の天秤「XS204」を用いて、熱伝導シートの比重をアルキメデス法(「固体比重測定キット」使用)で測定した。
(3)セイコーインスツル社製の「DSC320/6200」を用い、10℃/分の昇温条件の下、25℃における熱伝導シートの比熱を求めた。
(4)得られた熱拡散率に比重及び比熱を乗じて、熱伝導シートの熱伝導率を算出した。 (Measurement of thermal conductivity (W / m · k))
(1) Using "LFA467" manufactured by NETZSCH, the thermal diffusivity in the thickness direction of the heat conductive sheet was measured by a laser flash method.
(2) The specific gravity of the heat conductive sheet was measured by the Archimedes method (using the "solid specific gravity measurement kit") using the balance "XS204" manufactured by METTLER TOLEDO.
(3) Using "DSC320 / 6200" manufactured by Seiko Instruments Inc., the specific heat of the heat conductive sheet at 25 ° C. was determined under the heating condition of 10 ° C./min.
(4) The obtained thermal diffusivity was multiplied by the specific gravity and the specific heat to calculate the thermal conductivity of the heat conductive sheet.
(評価基準)
測定された熱伝導率を下記基準に照らして区分し、熱伝導性の評価とした。
「A」:17W/m・K以上
「B」:13W/m・K以上17W/m・K未満
「C」:10W/m・K以上13W/m・K未満
「D」:10W/m・K未満
結果を下記表1~表3に示す。 (Evaluation criteria)
The measured thermal conductivity was classified according to the following criteria and used as an evaluation of thermal conductivity.
"A": 17 W / m · K or more "B": 13 W / m · K or more and less than 17 W / m · K "C": 10 W / m · K or more and less than 13 W / m · K "D": 10 W / m · K The results of less than K are shown in Tables 1 to 3 below.
測定された熱伝導率を下記基準に照らして区分し、熱伝導性の評価とした。
「A」:17W/m・K以上
「B」:13W/m・K以上17W/m・K未満
「C」:10W/m・K以上13W/m・K未満
「D」:10W/m・K未満
結果を下記表1~表3に示す。 (Evaluation criteria)
The measured thermal conductivity was classified according to the following criteria and used as an evaluation of thermal conductivity.
"A": 17 W / m · K or more "B": 13 W / m · K or more and less than 17 W / m · K "C": 10 W / m · K or more and less than 13 W / m · K "D": 10 W / m · K The results of less than K are shown in Tables 1 to 3 below.
<耐水性>
各組成物を用いて得られた、それぞれの熱伝導シート及び熱伝導性多層シートを用いて、耐水性評価を実施した。下記の方法で含水率の測定を行い、下記の基準に従って耐水性を評価した。 <Water resistance>
Water resistance evaluation was carried out using each heat conductive sheet and heat conductive multilayer sheet obtained by using each composition. The water content was measured by the following method, and the water resistance was evaluated according to the following criteria.
各組成物を用いて得られた、それぞれの熱伝導シート及び熱伝導性多層シートを用いて、耐水性評価を実施した。下記の方法で含水率の測定を行い、下記の基準に従って耐水性を評価した。 <Water resistance>
Water resistance evaluation was carried out using each heat conductive sheet and heat conductive multilayer sheet obtained by using each composition. The water content was measured by the following method, and the water resistance was evaluated according to the following criteria.
(耐水性の測定)
硬化後の熱伝導シートを85℃85%の湿熱条件下に48時間曝し、前後のシート重量変化から含水率を算出した。
「A」:0.6%未満
「B」:0.6%以上0.8%未満
「C」:0.8%以上1.0%未満
「D」:1.0%以上
結果を下記表1~表3に示す。 (Measurement of water resistance)
The cured heat conductive sheet was exposed to a wet heat condition of 85 ° C. and 85% for 48 hours, and the water content was calculated from the change in the weight of the sheet before and after.
"A": less than 0.6% "B": 0.6% or more and less than 0.8% "C": 0.8% or more and less than 1.0% "D": 1.0% or more The results are shown in the table below. 1 to 3 are shown.
硬化後の熱伝導シートを85℃85%の湿熱条件下に48時間曝し、前後のシート重量変化から含水率を算出した。
「A」:0.6%未満
「B」:0.6%以上0.8%未満
「C」:0.8%以上1.0%未満
「D」:1.0%以上
結果を下記表1~表3に示す。 (Measurement of water resistance)
The cured heat conductive sheet was exposed to a wet heat condition of 85 ° C. and 85% for 48 hours, and the water content was calculated from the change in the weight of the sheet before and after.
"A": less than 0.6% "B": 0.6% or more and less than 0.8% "C": 0.8% or more and less than 1.0% "D": 1.0% or more The results are shown in the table below. 1 to 3 are shown.
[結果]
以下、下記表1~表3に各熱伝導シート及び熱伝導性多層シートで使用したフェノール化合物、エポキシ化合物、無機物、硬化促進剤、接着剤層の種類と添加量(g)及び分散剤の添加量(g)とともに、評価結果を示す。 [result]
Below, Tables 1 to 3 below show the types and amounts (g) of phenol compounds, epoxy compounds, inorganic substances, curing accelerators, adhesive layers, and dispersants used in each heat conductive sheet and heat conductive multilayer sheet. The evaluation result is shown together with the amount (g).
以下、下記表1~表3に各熱伝導シート及び熱伝導性多層シートで使用したフェノール化合物、エポキシ化合物、無機物、硬化促進剤、接着剤層の種類と添加量(g)及び分散剤の添加量(g)とともに、評価結果を示す。 [result]
Below, Tables 1 to 3 below show the types and amounts (g) of phenol compounds, epoxy compounds, inorganic substances, curing accelerators, adhesive layers, and dispersants used in each heat conductive sheet and heat conductive multilayer sheet. The evaluation result is shown together with the amount (g).
上記表1~表3に示す結果から、本発明の組成物を用いれば、熱伝導性に優れる熱伝導シート及び熱伝導性多層シートが得られることが確認された。また、組成物を用いて得られる熱伝導シート及び熱伝導性多層シートは耐水性に優れることが確認された。
また、平板プレス又はロールプレス等のプレスを用いて半硬化膜を作製した場合でも、プレスを用いずに半硬化膜を作製した場合でも、本発明の組成物から形成される熱伝導材料は本発明の効果を実現できることが確認された。 From the results shown in Tables 1 to 3 above, it was confirmed that the composition of the present invention can be used to obtain a heat conductive sheet and a heat conductive multilayer sheet having excellent heat conductivity. Further, it was confirmed that the heat conductive sheet and the heat conductive multilayer sheet obtained by using the composition are excellent in water resistance.
Further, regardless of whether the semi-cured film is produced by using a press such as a flat plate press or a roll press, or when the semi-cured film is produced without using a press, the heat conductive material formed from the composition of the present invention is the present invention. It was confirmed that the effect of the invention can be realized.
また、平板プレス又はロールプレス等のプレスを用いて半硬化膜を作製した場合でも、プレスを用いずに半硬化膜を作製した場合でも、本発明の組成物から形成される熱伝導材料は本発明の効果を実現できることが確認された。 From the results shown in Tables 1 to 3 above, it was confirmed that the composition of the present invention can be used to obtain a heat conductive sheet and a heat conductive multilayer sheet having excellent heat conductivity. Further, it was confirmed that the heat conductive sheet and the heat conductive multilayer sheet obtained by using the composition are excellent in water resistance.
Further, regardless of whether the semi-cured film is produced by using a press such as a flat plate press or a roll press, or when the semi-cured film is produced without using a press, the heat conductive material formed from the composition of the present invention is the present invention. It was confirmed that the effect of the invention can be realized.
特定化合物のLが、「2価の芳香環基を有する2価の有機基」である条件において、得られる熱伝導シートの熱伝導性がより優れることが確認された(実施例1~6、9~10と、実施例7及び8との比較)。
It was confirmed that the obtained heat conductive sheet was more excellent in heat conductivity under the condition that L of the specific compound was "a divalent organic group having a divalent aromatic ring group" (Examples 1 to 6). Comparison of 9 to 10 with Examples 7 and 8).
特定化合物のハンセン溶解度パラメーターが28以下である場合、得られる熱伝導シート及び熱伝導性多層シートが耐水性に優れることが確認された(実施例1~30及び比較例2と、比較例1との比較)。
また、特定化合物のハンセン溶解度パラメーターが26以下である場合、得られる熱伝導シート及び熱伝導性多層シートが耐水性により優れることが確認された(実施例1、3~6、8、13~15及び比較例1と、実施例2、7、9~12、16~30及び比較例2との比較)。 When the Hansen solubility parameter of the specific compound was 28 or less, it was confirmed that the obtained heat conductive sheet and heat conductive multilayer sheet had excellent water resistance (Examples 1 to 30, Comparative Example 2 and Comparative Example 1). comparison).
Further, it was confirmed that the obtained heat conductive sheet and heat conductive multilayer sheet are more excellent in water resistance when the Hansen solubility parameter of the specific compound is 26 or less (Examples 1, 3 to 6, 8, 13 to 15). And Comparative Example 1 and Examples 2, 7, 9 to 12, 16 to 30 and Comparative Example 2).
また、特定化合物のハンセン溶解度パラメーターが26以下である場合、得られる熱伝導シート及び熱伝導性多層シートが耐水性により優れることが確認された(実施例1、3~6、8、13~15及び比較例1と、実施例2、7、9~12、16~30及び比較例2との比較)。 When the Hansen solubility parameter of the specific compound was 28 or less, it was confirmed that the obtained heat conductive sheet and heat conductive multilayer sheet had excellent water resistance (Examples 1 to 30, Comparative Example 2 and Comparative Example 1). comparison).
Further, it was confirmed that the obtained heat conductive sheet and heat conductive multilayer sheet are more excellent in water resistance when the Hansen solubility parameter of the specific compound is 26 or less (Examples 1, 3 to 6, 8, 13 to 15). And Comparative Example 1 and Examples 2, 7, 9 to 12, 16 to 30 and Comparative Example 2).
熱伝導シートが含む無機物の構成が75質量%以上は窒化ホウ素である条件において、熱伝導性により優れることが確認された(実施例18~19と、実施例22~23との比較)。
また、熱伝導性多層シートが含む無機物の構成が80質量%以上は窒化ホウ素である条件において、熱伝導性により優れることが確認された(実施例16~17と実施例20~21との比較)。 It was confirmed that the heat conductive sheet was more excellent in heat conductivity under the condition that the composition of the inorganic substance contained in the heat conductive sheet was 75% by mass or more of boron nitride (comparison between Examples 18 to 19 and Examples 22 to 23).
Further, it was confirmed that the heat conductivity was superior to the heat conductivity under the condition that the composition of the inorganic substance contained in the heat conductive multilayer sheet was 80% by mass or more of boron nitride (comparison between Examples 16 to 17 and Examples 20 to 21). ).
また、熱伝導性多層シートが含む無機物の構成が80質量%以上は窒化ホウ素である条件において、熱伝導性により優れることが確認された(実施例16~17と実施例20~21との比較)。 It was confirmed that the heat conductive sheet was more excellent in heat conductivity under the condition that the composition of the inorganic substance contained in the heat conductive sheet was 75% by mass or more of boron nitride (comparison between Examples 18 to 19 and Examples 22 to 23).
Further, it was confirmed that the heat conductivity was superior to the heat conductivity under the condition that the composition of the inorganic substance contained in the heat conductive multilayer sheet was 80% by mass or more of boron nitride (comparison between Examples 16 to 17 and Examples 20 to 21). ).
Claims (12)
- 無機粒子と一般式(1)で表される化合物とを含む、熱伝導材料形成用組成物。
E1~E6は、それぞれ独立に、単結合、-NH-、又は、-NR-を表す。Rは、置換基を表す。
B1、B2、B3、及びB4は、それぞれ、k+1価、l+1価、m+1価、及びn+1価の有機基を表し、それらの少なくとも1つが、置換基を有していてもよいk+1価、l+1価、m+1価、又は、n+1価の芳香環基を表す。
Lは、2価の有機基を表す。
k、l、m、及び、nは、それぞれ独立に、0以上の整数を表す。
kが2以上の場合、k個存在するX1は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
lが2以上の場合、l個存在するX2は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
mが2以上の場合、m個存在するX3は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
nが2以上の場合、n個存在するX4は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
また、k、l、m、及び、nの合計は2以上である。
X1~X4は、それぞれ独立に、一般式(2)で表される基を表す。
D1は、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
A1は、置換基を有していてもよい芳香環基、又は、置換基を有していてもよい脂肪族環基を表す。
Q及びY1は、それぞれ独立に、水酸基、エポキシ基を有する1価の基、アミノ基、チオール基、カルボン酸基、イソシアネート基、及び、オキセタニル基を有する1価の基からなる群から選択される特定官能基を表す。
pは、0以上の整数を表す。
qは、0~2の整数を表す。
前記一般式(2)中、D1が複数存在する場合、複数存在するD1は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。A1が複数存在する場合、複数存在するA1は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。Qが複数存在する場合、複数存在するQは、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
rは、1以上の整数である。 A composition for forming a heat conductive material, which comprises inorganic particles and a compound represented by the general formula (1).
E 1 to E 6 independently represent a single bond, -NH-, or -NR-. R represents a substituent.
B 1 , B 2 , B 3 and B 4 represent k + 1 valent, l + 1 valent, m + 1 valent and n + 1 valent organic groups, respectively, and at least one of them may have a substituent k + 1. Represents a valent, l + 1 valent, m + 1 valent, or n + 1 valent aromatic ring group.
L represents a divalent organic group.
k, l, m, and n each independently represent an integer of 0 or more.
when k is 2 or more, X 1 to the k present, may each be the same or different.
when l is 2 or more, X 2 of the l present, may each be the same or different.
when m is 2 or more, X 3 and m pieces present, may each be the same or different.
when n is 2 or more, X 4 n number present, may each be the same or different.
Further, the total of k, l, m, and n is 2 or more.
Each of X 1 to X 4 independently represents a group represented by the general formula (2).
D 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
A 1 represents an aromatic ring group which may have a substituent or an aliphatic ring group which may have a substituent.
Q and Y 1 are independently selected from the group consisting of a monovalent group having a hydroxyl group and an epoxy group, an amino group, a thiol group, a carboxylic acid group, an isocyanate group, and a monovalent group having an oxetanyl group. Represents a specific functional group.
p represents an integer greater than or equal to 0.
q represents an integer of 0 to 2.
In the general formula (2), if D 1 there are a plurality, D 1 there are a plurality, may each be the same or different. If the A 1 there are plural, A 1 there are a plurality, they may each be the same or different. When there are a plurality of Qs, the plurality of Qs may be the same or different.
r is an integer of 1 or more. - 前記一般式(1)中のLが、置換基を有していてもよい2価の芳香環基、置換基を有していてもよい2価の脂肪族環基、及び、炭素数2以上の分岐を有していてもよいアルキレン基からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を有する2価の有機基である、請求項1に記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。 L in the general formula (1) is a divalent aromatic ring group which may have a substituent, a divalent aliphatic ring group which may have a substituent, and 2 or more carbon atoms. The composition for forming a heat conductive material according to claim 1, which is a divalent organic group having at least one selected from the group consisting of alkylene groups which may have a branch of.
- 前記一般式(1)中のLが、置換基を有していてもよい2価の芳香環基を有する2価の有機基である、請求項1又は2に記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。 The composition for forming a heat conductive material according to claim 1 or 2, wherein L in the general formula (1) is a divalent organic group having a divalent aromatic ring group which may have a substituent. thing.
- 前記一般式(1)で表される化合物のハンセン溶解度パラメーター値が28MPa0.5以下である、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。 The composition for forming a heat conductive material according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the Hansen solubility parameter value of the compound represented by the general formula (1) is 28 MPa 0.5 or less.
- 前記一般式(1)で表される化合物のハンセン溶解度パラメーター値が26MPa0.5以下である、請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。 The composition for forming a heat conductive material according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the Hansen solubility parameter value of the compound represented by the general formula (1) is 26 MPa 0.5 or less.
- 更に、硬化促進剤を含む、請求項1~5のいずれか1項に記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。 The composition for forming a heat conductive material according to any one of claims 1 to 5, further comprising a curing accelerator.
- 前記無機粒子が、無機窒化物である、請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。 The composition for forming a heat conductive material according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the inorganic particles are inorganic nitrides.
- 前記無機粒子が、窒化ホウ素である、請求項1~7のいずれか1項に記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。 The composition for forming a heat conductive material according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the inorganic particles are boron nitride.
- 前記熱伝導材料形成用組成物の全固形分に対して、前記一般式(1)で表される化合物の含有量が3~40質量%である、請求項1~8のいずれか1項に記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物。 According to any one of claims 1 to 8, the content of the compound represented by the general formula (1) is 3 to 40% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition for forming a heat conductive material. The composition for forming a heat conductive material according to the above.
- 請求項1~9のいずれか1項に記載の熱伝導材料形成用組成物を硬化して形成される熱伝導シート。 A heat conductive sheet formed by curing the composition for forming a heat conductive material according to any one of claims 1 to 9.
- 請求項10に記載の前記熱伝導シートと、
前記熱伝導シートの片面又は両面に設けられた、接着剤層又は粘着剤層と、を有する、熱伝導性多層シート。 The heat conductive sheet according to claim 10,
A heat conductive multilayer sheet having an adhesive layer or an adhesive layer provided on one side or both sides of the heat conductive sheet. - デバイスと、
前記デバイス上に配置された、請求項10に記載の熱伝導シート又は請求項11に記載の熱伝導性多層シートを含む熱伝導層と、を有する、熱伝導層付きデバイス。 With the device
A device with a heat conductive layer having a heat conductive sheet according to claim 10 or a heat conductive layer including the heat conductive multilayer sheet according to claim 11 arranged on the device.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2022501717A JP7245953B2 (en) | 2020-02-19 | 2021-01-21 | COMPOSITION FOR FORMING HEAT CONDUCTIVE MATERIAL, HEAT CONDUCTIVE SHEET, HEAT CONDUCTIVE MULTILAYER SHEET, AND DEVICE WITH HEAT CONDUCTIVE LAYER |
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2020-026006 | 2020-02-19 | ||
JP2020026006 | 2020-02-19 | ||
JP2020-070944 | 2020-04-10 | ||
JP2020070944 | 2020-04-10 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2021166541A1 true WO2021166541A1 (en) | 2021-08-26 |
Family
ID=77391965
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2021/002045 WO2021166541A1 (en) | 2020-02-19 | 2021-01-21 | Heat conductive material forming composition, heat conductive sheet, heat conductive multilayer sheet, and device having heat conductive sheet |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
JP (1) | JP7245953B2 (en) |
WO (1) | WO2021166541A1 (en) |
Citations (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2013143243A (en) * | 2012-01-10 | 2013-07-22 | Noritake Co Ltd | Conductive bonding material, bonding method of ceramic electronic material using the same, and ceramic electronic device |
WO2018147425A1 (en) * | 2017-02-09 | 2018-08-16 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Curable composition, thermally conductive material, and device with thermally conductive layer |
-
2021
- 2021-01-21 WO PCT/JP2021/002045 patent/WO2021166541A1/en active Application Filing
- 2021-01-21 JP JP2022501717A patent/JP7245953B2/en active Active
Patent Citations (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2013143243A (en) * | 2012-01-10 | 2013-07-22 | Noritake Co Ltd | Conductive bonding material, bonding method of ceramic electronic material using the same, and ceramic electronic device |
WO2018147425A1 (en) * | 2017-02-09 | 2018-08-16 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Curable composition, thermally conductive material, and device with thermally conductive layer |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JPWO2021166541A1 (en) | 2021-08-26 |
JP7245953B2 (en) | 2023-03-24 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
WO2022070718A1 (en) | Surface-modified boron nitride particles, method of producing surface-modified boron nitride particles, thermally conductive material-forming composition, thermally conductive material, thermally conductive sheet, and device having thermally conductive layer | |
JP7221307B2 (en) | COMPOSITION, HEAT CONDUCTIVE SHEET, DEVICE WITH HEAT CONDUCTIVE LAYER | |
JP7191988B2 (en) | COMPOSITION FOR HEAT CONDUCTIVE MATERIAL, HEAT CONDUCTIVE MATERIAL | |
JP7472135B2 (en) | Composition for forming thermally conductive material, thermally conductive material, surface-modified inorganic material | |
WO2021166541A1 (en) | Heat conductive material forming composition, heat conductive sheet, heat conductive multilayer sheet, and device having heat conductive sheet | |
JP7367063B2 (en) | Boron nitride particles, compositions for forming thermally conductive materials, thermally conductive materials, thermally conductive sheets, devices with thermally conductive layers | |
JP7182692B2 (en) | composition, thermally conductive material | |
JP7183307B2 (en) | COMPOSITION FOR HEAT CONDUCTIVE MATERIAL, HEAT CONDUCTIVE MATERIAL, HEAT CONDUCTIVE SHEET, DEVICE WITH HEAT CONDUCTIVE LAYER | |
WO2022054874A1 (en) | Curable resin composition, thermally conductive material, thermally conductive sheet, and device with thermally conductive layer | |
EP4101892B1 (en) | Composition, thermally conductive material, thermally conductive sheet, and device with thermally conductive layer | |
WO2022137994A1 (en) | Thermally conductive layer-forming sheet and method for producing thermally conductive layer-forming sheet | |
EP4024445A1 (en) | Composition for forming heat-conducting material, heat-conducting material, heat-conducting sheet, and device with heat-conducting layer | |
JP7582859B2 (en) | Composition for forming thermally conductive material, thermally conductive material, thermally conductive sheet, device with thermally conductive layer | |
WO2022153807A1 (en) | Curable composition, thermally conductive material, thermally conductive sheet, and device provided with thermally conductive layer | |
WO2022124005A1 (en) | Curable composition, thermally conductive material, thermally conductive sheet, and device with thermally conductive layer | |
JP2022098178A (en) | Heat-conductive material forming composition, heat-conductive material, heat-conductive sheet, and device with heat-conductive layer | |
WO2021131803A1 (en) | Composition, heat conductive sheet, and device having heat conductive sheet | |
WO2021054111A1 (en) | Method for manufacturing heat-conducting material, heat-conducting material, heat-conducting sheet, and device provided with heat-conducting layer | |
JP2022061152A (en) | Thermally conductive material forming composition, cured product, thermally conductive sheet, and device with thermally conductive layer | |
JP2021054922A (en) | Composition for forming thermally conductive material, thermally conductive material, thermally conductive sheet, device with thermally conductive layer |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 21756281 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2022501717 Country of ref document: JP Kind code of ref document: A |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 21756281 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |